Soi

100-E, Soils & Aggregates
Test Procedures
Revised February 2005

2005 by Texas Department of Transportation
All rights reserved
100-E, Soils & Aggregates Test Procedures

February 2005
Manual Notices
Manual Notice 2005-1

To:
Holders of the 100-E, Soils & Aggregates Test Procedures
From:
Thomas R. Bohuslav, P.E., Director, Construction Division
Manual:
Effective Date:
February 1, 2005
Purpose
This manual notice is intended to transmit changes to the content of the 100-E, Soils &
Aggregates Test Procedures.
Overview of Changes
The following chapters have been added:
Chapter 36, "Tex-145-E, Determining Sulfate Content in Soils Colorimetric Method
Chapter 37, Tex-146-E, Conductivity Test for Field Detection of Sulfates in Soil.
The following chapter has been revised:
Chapter 15, "Tex-114-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density

Relationship of Subgrade, Embankment Soils, and Backfill Material"
Extensive revisions made throughout test method.

Added Part III, Measuring Moisture-density Relationship of Cohesionless Backfill
Replaced graphics.
Supersedes
The revised manual supersedes the prior version of the manual.
Contents
The manual change issues the above additions online.
Contact
Contact the Geotechnical, Soils and Aggregates Branch of the Construction Division,
Materials & Pavements Section (CST/M&P) at 512/506-5907 for more information
pertaining to the methods in this manual.
Manual Notice 2004-1

To:
Holders of the Manual of Testing Procedures
From:
Thomas R. Bohuslav, P.E., Director, Construction Division
Manual:
Effective Date:
November 1, 2004
Purpose
To transmit the new 100-E, Soils & Aggregates Procedures manual.
Overview of Changes
Removed Chapter 1 from the Manual of Testing Procedures and created new manual
containing test methods for testing and evaluating soils, aggregates, and flexible base
materials.
Added "Tex-198-E, Minimum Standards for Acceptance of a Laboratory for Soils and
Flexible Base Testing" as a new test method.
Contact
Contact the Geotechnical, Soils and Aggregates Branch (512/506-5907) of the Materials &
Pavements Section of the Construction Division (CST/M&P) for more information
Chapter 1
Overview
Contents:
Section 1 Introduction...................................................................................................... 1-2
1-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 1 Overview
Section 1 Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
A Look Ahead
The chapters in this manual cover the methods for testing and evaluating soils, aggregates,
and flexible base materials. Chapters are further divided into the following sections:
Definitions
Sampling Procedures
Testing Procedures
Calculations.
Other sections appear as the subject warrants.

Remarks
Contact the Geotechnical, Soils and Aggregates Branch (512/506-5907) of the Materials &
Pavements Section of the Construction Division (CST/M&P) for more information
1-2
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 2
Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling Soils for Highways
Contents:
Section 1 Overview.......................................................................................................... 2-2
Section 2 Definitions ....................................................................................................... 2-3
Section 3 Soil Survey....................................................................................................... 2-6
Section 4 Sampling .......................................................................................................... 2-7
Section 5 Apparatus......................................................................................................... 2-8
100-E, Soils & Aggregate Test Procedures
2-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 2 Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling

Soils for Highways
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method provides definitions of some basic terms and describes the procedures for
surveying and sampling soils for highways. It describes the information required from the
survey and the sampling methods required, and it discusses the apparatus necessary to carry
out the sampling process.
Units of Measurement
The values given in parentheses (if provided) are not standard and may not be exact
mathematical conversions. Use each system of units separately. Combining values from the
two systems may result in nonconformance with the standard.
2-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils for Highways
Section 2 Definitions
Section 2
Definitions
The following terms and definitions are referenced in this test method:
aggregate - Aggregate is granular material of mineral composition such as sand, gravel,

shell, slag, crushed stone or lightweight. Aggregate may be used with a cementing
medium to form mortars or concrete, or alone in base courses or as a surface treatment.
bank gravel - Bank Gravel is found in natural deposits, usually intermixed with fine
material, such as sand or clay, or combinations thereof; the terms "gravelly clay,"
"gravelly sand," "clayey gravel," or "sandy gravel" indicate the varying proportions of
the materials in the mixture.
blast furnace slag - Blast furnace slag is a non-metallic by-product, developed in a blast
furnace simultaneously with iron in a molten condition, essentially consisting of
silicates and alumina-silicates of calcium and other bases.
bottom ash - Bottom Ash is the heavy residue from the combustion of ground or
powdered coal or lignite.
clay - Clay is a fine grained soil that can be made to exhibit plasticity (putty-like
properties) within a range of water contents and that exhibits considerable strength
when air dry.
clay size - Clay size refers to any material finer than 0.002 mm (2 m), though not
necessarily exhibiting clay characteristics.
coarse aggregate - Coarse aggregate is the portion of aggregate retained on the 2.00
mm (No. 10) sieve for Bituminous Concrete or retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve
for Portland Cement Concrete.
concrete - Concrete is a composite material consisting of a binding medium within

which are embedded particles or fragments of aggregate; in hydraulic cement concrete,
the binder is formed from a mixture of hydraulic cement and water.
conglomerate - Conglomerate is the coarse grained, clastic, sedimentary accumulation

of particles, composed of rounded to sub-angular fragments larger than 2 mm (0.08 in.)
in diameter, set in a fine-grained matrix of sand or silt and commonly cemented by
calcium carbonate, iron oxide, silica or hardened clay.
crushed face - Crushed face is a fractured surface produced by the mechanical crushing
of an aggregate. Crushed aggregate faces are identified by fresh fractures and lack of
evidence of weathering.
crushed gravel - Crushed gravel is the product resulting from the mechanical crushing
of gravel, with substantially all fragments having at least one face resulting from a
fracture.
crushed stone - Crushed stone is the product excavated from an in-situ deposit of rock,
crushed and processed for construction purposes with substantially all faces resulting
from the crushing operation.
2-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils for Highways
detrital (weathered) - Detrital material consists of particles which have been formed
through the disintegration of other particles by erosion or weathering.
fine aggregate - Fine aggregate is the portion of the aggregate passing the 2.00 mm
(No. 10) sieve for Bituminous Concrete or passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve for
Portland Cement Concrete.
fly ash - Fly ash is the finely divided residue from the combustion of ground or
powdered coal or lignite that is transported from the firebox through the boiler by flue
gases.
granite - Granite is an igneous rock consisting of quartz and alkali feldspars.
gravel - Gravel consists of unconsolidated or loose detrital sediment (aggregate

resulting from natural disintegration and abrasion of rock) with particle sizes passing
the 76.2 mm (3 in.) sieve and retained on the 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve.
lightweight aggregate - Lightweight aggregate consists of expanded shale, clay or slate,

and is produced by the rotary kiln method.
limestone rock asphalt - Limestone rock asphalt is limestone impregnated with

naturally occurring asphalt.
lithification - Lithification is the process of hardening, induration and compaction of

sediments, leading to the formation of solid materials.
mineral filler - Mineral filler is a fine aggregate or manufactured material used to

supply particle sizes where the mix design is deficient in gradation.
quarry - A quarry is an open surface excavation of minerals or construction materials.
riprap - Riprap is quarried stone especially selected, graded and placed to prevent
erosion and thereby preserve the shape of a surface, slope, or underlying structure.
rock - Rock is a mass of solid, naturally occurring material from an in-situ deposit,
excluding conglomerates. The formation may or may not be laminated.
sand - Sand consists of fine aggregate particles that are retained on the 75 m (No. 200)
sieve, either as natural sand resulting from natural disintegration and abrasion of rock,
or as manufactured sand which is produced by the crushing of rock, gravel, slag, etc.
sandstone - Sandstone is sedimentary rock consisting predominantly of weathered

sand-sized particles naturally cemented together.
silt - Silt is soil passing the 75 m (No. 200) sieve that is non-plastic or very slightly
plastic and that exhibits little or no strength when air dry.
silt size - Silt size is any material passing the 75 m (No. 200) sieve which is coarser
than 0.002 mm (2 m), though not necessarily exhibiting silt characteristics.
slag - Slag is a non-metallic by-product of the smelting or refining of metals,. and

consists of calcium and alumina-silicates.
soil - Soil is defined as a superficial, unconsolidated deposit of disintegrated and

decomposed rock material produced by surface weathering.
2-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils for Highways
source - A source is a geographical location of naturally occurring material that can be

mined or quarried from the original in-situ deposit. In the case of manufactured or byproduct material, it is the location of the plant at which the material is produced.
stone - Stone consists of crushed, angular particles of rock.
traprock - Traprock consists of various fine-grained, dense, dark colored igneous rocks,
typically basalt or diabase; also called "trap."
virgin material - Virgin material is material not previously used in construction.
NOTE: The above definitions have been approved by the Specification Committee.
2-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils for Highways
Section 3 Soil Survey
Section 3
Soil Survey
The soil survey is an important part of the engineering survey for the design, location and
construction of a highway. The investigation should furnish the following information:
the extent and location of each type of soil or rock in the subsurface
the condition of subsoils (moisture and density) upon which embankments will be
constructed
the design of ditches and backslopes in cut sections to prevent slides
the location and selection of suitable material for fills, sub-grade treatment and backfill
adjacent to structures
the location of local material for base and aggregate
the need for stabilization of sub-grade, sub-base and base materials
the supporting values of soils as foundation materials.
2-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils for Highways
Section 4 Sampling
Section 4
Sampling
A representative sample of disturbed soil consists of a combination of the various particles
in exactly the same proportion as they exist in the natural ground, roadway or pit.
The proper method of obtaining a sample will depend on the place, the quantity of
material, the proposed treatment, and the tests to be performed in the laboratory.
Unless it is known that different types of materials are to be uniformly mixed in certain
proportions, samples should contain only materials of like color and texture, and should
not be composite of materials apparently different in character.
It is impossible to obtain a sample from the earth, which is entirely undisturbed, because the
removal of the surrounding soil releases the pressure from the specimen and this causes a
certain amount of disturbance.
The intent of sampling, however, is to obtain a core of soil from the earth with as little
disturbance as possible to the natural density, moisture content, and structural arrangement
of the particles.
Such a soil core is satisfactory for all practical purposes and can be classified as an
undisturbed sample of soil.
2-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils for Highways
Section 5 Apparatus
Section 5
Apparatus
Many factors, such as the nature of the terrain, the kind of material, the depth of material
below the surface, the equipment available, and the use to be made of the survey
information, will affect the type and amount of equipment to be used in sampling.
Small hand tools are satisfactory for sample collection where the materials are at a shallow
depth and can be easily dug. However, if the materials are very hard, power equipment may
be more economical. The only feasible method of sampling strata located at a considerable
depth below the surface is the use of a power drill machine with a core or auger attachment.
The following list of equipment should suffice for ordinary conditions:
sample bags and moisture cans for disturbed samples
materials to maintain moisture content and boxes for packing undisturbed cores
power drill rig with core and/or auger attachments
metallic tape, 30 m (100 ft.) long
post hole digger, shovel, prospector's pick, other hand tools
jackhammer and air compressor
sample splitter or quartering cloth
engineer's level and level rod
stakes
gasoline burner and pan
ruler, 2 m (6 ft.)
soil auger.
2-8
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 3
Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for
Testing
Contents:
Section 4 Materials .......................................................................................................... 3-5
Section 5 Sample Identification....................................................................................... 3-6
Section 6 Part I, Preparing Samples for Soil Constants and Particle Size Analysis........ 3-7
Section 7 Part II, Preparing Samples for Compaction and Triaxial Tests ..................... 3-10
Section 8 Part III, Sieve Analysis of Road-Mix Stabilized Material............................. 3-11
3-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 3 Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and

Flexible Base Materials for Testing
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method describes three procedures for preparing of soil and flexible base samples for
soil constants and particle size analysis, compaction and triaxial, and sieve analysis of roadmixed material.
3-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2
Definitions
soil binder - Soil binder is any material passing the 425 m (No. 40) sieve.
percent soil binder - The percent soil binder is equal to 100 times the ratio of the ovendry mass of the soil binder to the oven-dry mass of the total.
3-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
The following apparatus is required:
set of standard U.S. sieves, meeting the requirements of Test Method "Tex-907-K,
Verifying the Accuracy of Wire Cloth Sieves"
scale, with a minimum capacity of 36 kg (80 lb.) with a minimum accuracy and
readability of 5 g or 0.1% of the test load, whichever is greater
drying oven, maintained at 60C (140F)
crusher (optional), which can be adjusted to produce material passing a 2.00 mm (No.
10) sieve
mechanical pulverizer (optional)
wedgewood mortar and pestle
scoop
small siphon tube (optional)
sample containers, metal pans, cardboard cartons
filter paper, non-fibrous
sample splitter, quartering machine, or quartering cloth
mechanical mixer (stirring device)
dispenser cup
plaster of Paris molds (optional).
NOTE: The plaster of Paris molds must be dried at a temperature not to exceed 60C
(140F) after forming, and washed and dried after each use.
3-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Materials
Section 4
Materials
The following materials are needed:
tap water.
3-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5 Sample Identification
Section 5
Sample Identification
Give each sample an identification number on a suitable card. This card should remain with
the sample throughout the processing and testing.
3-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6 Part I, Preparing Samples for Soil

Constants and Particle Size Analysis
Section 6
Part I, Preparing Samples for Soil Constants and Particle Size Analysis
If only soil constants are desired, use either 'Dry Preparation (Method A)' or
'Wet Preparation (Method B).' However if particle size analysis or percent soil binder is also
desired, use Method A. Furthermore, use Method A when preparing a referee test.
Preparing Samples
Dry Preparation (Method A)
The following table describes the dry preparation method to be used for analysis of soil
constants, particle size, or percent soil binder, or when preparing a referee test.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Action
Select a representative sample according to the appropriate test method ("Tex-100-E,
Surveying and Sampling Soils for Highways," or "Tex-400-A, Sampling Stone, Gravel, Sand
and Mineral Aggregates") large enough to yield at least 300 g of soil binder.
Dry the sample in a 60 C (140 F) oven.
Examine the sample by visual inspection or slake small portions in water to determine if the
material has any particles larger than 425 m (No. 40).
If the amount of aggregate larger than 425 m (No. 40) is easily distinguishable, remove these
particles by hand and proceed to Step 27.
For materials containing a considerable amount of aggregate, separate the fine loose binder
from the coarse particles by sieving over a m (No. 40) sieve.
Set the soil binder passing the sieve aside to later recombine with the additional binder obtained
from Steps 8 through 24.
If desired, slake the total material.
Place the material to be slaked into a pan.
Cover the material completely with water and soak for a minimum of 12 hours unless a shorter
time is determined by Test Method "Tex-102-E, Determining Slaking Time for Preparing Base
Material."
Place the empty 425 m (No. 40) sieve into a clean pan and pour the liquid from the wet
sample through it.
Transfer the wet sample to the sieve in increments not exceeding 450 g.
Pour water over the sieve until the water level is about 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) above the sample on
the sieve.
Alternately agitate the sieve up and down and stir the sample by hand.
If the material retained on the sieve contains lumps that have not disintegrated, crumple any
that can be broken down between thumb and fingers and wash through the sieve.
After all the soil binder appears to have passed through the sieve, hold the sieve above the pan
and wash the retained aggregates clean by pouring a small amount of water over it and letting
the water drain into the pan.
Transfer the retained aggregate from the sieve to a clean pan.
Repeat the procedure in Steps 10-16 until all of the soaked sample has been washed
Dry the retained aggregate portion of the sample in a 60C (140F) oven
Re-screen over the 425 m (No. 40) sieve and add the binder passing the sieve to the soil
3-7
TxDOT 11/2004


Action
Step
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

binder obtained in Step 6.

Weigh the mass of the aggregate and retain for use in 'Part I, Sieve Analysis of Material
Retained on the 425 m (No. 40) Sieve' of Test Method "Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of
Soils."
Place the pan containing the soil binder and wash water aside, where it will not be disturbed,
until all the soil has settled to the bottom of the pan and the water above the soil is clear.
Decant the water off the soil.
Dry the remaining soil in a 60C (140F) oven.
In cases where the materials fail to settle overnight, evaporate the water by placing the sample
in a 60C (140F) oven until it is dry, or siphon the water on to a plaster of Paris mold lined
with filter paper.
When the water has disappeared, place the filter paper with adhering soil in a pan and dry in
the oven.
Sweep the dry soil from the filter paper with a stiff brush into the pan of fines.
Break down the dried soil binder with a mortar and pestle or use a suitable mechanical
pulverizer with an opening set from 635 to 889 m (0.025 to 0.035 in.).
If a pulverizer is used, any material still aggregated in lumps larger than 425 m (No. 40)
should be broken down with a mortar and pestle.
Combine all of the soil binder obtained and weigh the mass to the nearest 5 g.
Mix thoroughly to produce a uniform sample of all of the particles.
Add the masses obtained in Steps 20 and 29 and record the sum as the Total Dry Mass of the
sample.
Wet Preparation (Method B)
The table below describes a wet preparation method for the analysis of soil constants only.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Wet Preparation (Method B)

Action
Select a representative sample according to Test Method "Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling
Soils for Highways," or Test Method "Tex-400-A, Sampling Stone, Gravel, Sand and Mineral
Aggregates."
Make the sample large enough to yield at least 300 g of soil binder.
Place the sample in a clean pan.
Cover the sample completely with clear water.
Soak soils with moderate to high Plasticity Indices (PI) for a minimum of 12 hours unless a
shorter time is determined by Test Method "Tex-102-E, Determining Slaking Time for
Preparing Base Material."
Soak flexible base and low PI materials for a minimum of 2 hours.
Sieve the wet sample into a clean pan in increments of approximately 450 g over a 2.00 mm
(No. 10) sieve to remove large aggregate particles.
Wash the aggregate retained on the sieve with a small amount of water.
Discard the portion of material retained on the sieve.
For soils and base materials with low PI, go to Step 14.
For soils with moderate to high PI, place the wet material passing the 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve
into the dispersion cup of a mechanical malt mixer.
Do not fill the cup more than half full.
3-8
TxDOT 11/2004

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Mix the material for 3 to 5 minutes or until the soil binder is separated.
Pour the material through a 425 m (No. 40) sieve into a plaster of Paris bowl lined with filter
paper.
Vigorously agitate the sieve up and down over the bowl while occasionally stirring the sample
by hand to allow as much material as possible to pass the 425 m (No. 40) sieve.
If the material retained on the sieve contains lumps that have not disintegrated, return to the
dispersion cup and remix and wash through the sieve.
Sieve until at least 95% of the soil binder appears to have passed through the sieve.
Reduce the water content of the material in the plaster of Paris bowl to below the Liquid Limit.
When the sample can be divided into pie-like wedges and each wedge can be easily removed,
it can be used for testing of soil constants.
If the soil constants are not to be determined immediately, place the material into an airtight
container to prevent moisture loss.
Calculation
Use the following to calculate the percent soil binder.
Percent Soil Binder = 100( W1 WT )

Where:
W1 = dry mass of soil binder
WT = dry mass of total sample.
Report
Report the percent soil binder to the nearest whole percent.
3-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 7 Part II, Preparing Samples for

Compaction and Triaxial Tests
Section 7
Part II, Preparing Samples for Compaction and Triaxial Tests
Use this part to prepare samples for the compaction and triaxial tests.
Preparing Samples
This procedure applies to all materials, except stabilized material, in the roadway condition.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
Preparing Samples for Compaction and Triaxial Tests

Action
Select approximately a 90 kg (200 lb.) representative sample according to Test Method
"Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling Soils for Highways," or Test Method "Tex-400-A,
Sampling Stone, Gravel, Sand and Mineral Aggregates."
Check specifications for maximum aggregate size.
Spread sample on a clean floor to air dry or use a forced draft of warm air not to exceed 60C
(140F).
Reduce the water content of the sample to slightly below the estimated optimum moisture content.
Process moist clay and other soils (which form hard lumps when dried or contain aggregates) to
pass a 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) wire-mesh.
Separate aggregate materials (caliche, crushed rock, and gravel) by dry sieving into the following
sizes:
44.5 mm (1 3/4 in.)
31.7 mm (1 1/4 in.)
22.2 mm (7/8 in.)
16 mm (5/8 in.) optional
9.5 mm (3/8 in.)
4.75 mm (No. 4).
When material contains aggregate retained on the 44.5 mm (1-3/4 in.) sieve, add the percentage in
Step 6 to the percentage passing 44.5 mm (1-3/4 in.) sieve and retained on the 31.7 mm (1-1/4 in.)
sieve for recombining individual specimens.
NOTE: Do not use particles larger than 44.5 mm (1-3/4 in.) in the compacted specimens.
When aggregates between 44.5 mm (1- 3/4 in.) and 31.7 mm (1-1/4 in.) are needed, crush particles
larger than 44.5 mm (1-3/4 in.) or obtain additional material from the project.
NOTE: Do not crush the material if it is an uncrushed gravel.
Mix each size to make moisture as uniform as possible.
Weigh each size of material to the nearest 5 g.
Calculate the cumulative percentages retained on each sieve size as shown under 'Calculation.'
These values are to be used in recombining the sample for compaction specimens.
Calculation
Calculate the cumulative percentages retained on each sieve:
Percent Re tained = 100( Mass Re tained Total Mass of Sample )
3-10
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 8 Part III, Sieve Analysis of Road-Mix

Stabilized Material
Section 8
Part III, Sieve Analysis of Road-Mix Stabilized Material
This procedure applies to chemically stabilized materials sampled from the roadway during
construction. These materials may be tested in the roadway condition for adequate
pulverization, using sieves required by the governing TxDOT standard specifications as
described in Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges
(1995).
Procedure
Use the following steps to perform the sieve analysis.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Sieve Analysis of Road-Mix Stabilized Material

Action
Select a representative sample from the roadway according to with Test Method "Tex-100-E,
Surveying and Sampling Soils for Highways."
Reduce the sample, using a sample splitter or other approved method, to a minimum of 4.5 kg (10
lb.).
Remove all non-slakable aggregates retained on the specified sieves.
Weigh the sample to the nearest 5 g and record as the Total Mass under 'Calculation.'
Use the specified sieves to separate the sample into different size fractions.
Use either a sieve shaker or the hand method in the sieving operation.
Sieve the sample with a lateral and vertical motion of the sieves, accompanied by a jarring action
to keep the material moving over the surface of the sieve.
Continue the sieving operation until no more than one percent of the test sample, by mass, passes
through any sieve after one minute of continuous shaking.
Weigh the material passing each of the required sieves and record its mass to the nearest 5 g.
Calculation
Use the following to determine percent material passing each sieve.
Percent Pas sin g = 100 ( Mass Pas sin g a Sieve Total Mass of Sample )
Report
Report test results to the nearest whole percent.
3-11
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 4
Tex-102-E, Determining Slaking Time
Contents:
Section 4 Procedure ......................................................................................................... 4-5
Section 5 Test Results...................................................................................................... 4-6
4-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 4 Tex-102-E, Determining Slaking Time
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the slaking time to use in preparing flexible base materials.
4-2
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
apparatus used in Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials
for Testing"
sample splitter, quartering machine or quartering cloth.
4-3
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 3 Materials
Section 3
Materials
clear potable water.
4-4
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 4 Procedure
Section 4
Procedure
This table lists the steps necessary to determine the slaking time needed to prepare base
material.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Determining Slaking Time for Preparing Base Material

Action
Select a field sample of approximately 14 kg (30 lbs.).
Dry the field sample at 60 5 C (140 9 F).
Use a sample splitter and divide the field sample into six equal test samples.
Slake the test samples in clean water for different lengths of time (Ex: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 24
hours).
Wash the samples and determine the soil binder according to 'Part I, Preparing Samples for Soil
Constants and Particle Size Analysis' of Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible
Base Materials for Testing."
4-5
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 5 Test Results
Section 5
Test Results
The slaking time required for flexible base material will be the shortest time interval that
produced the maximum amount of soil binder. Use this minimum slaking time for all control
tests of materials from the particular source investigated.
4-6
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 5
Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials
Contents:
Section 4 Preparations ..................................................................................................... 5-5
Section 5 Part I, Conventional Oven Method.................................................................. 5-7
Section 6 Part II, Microwave Oven Method.................................................................... 5-9
5-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 5 Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture

Content in Soil Materials
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the moisture (water) content of soil, rock, and soil-aggregate
mixtures, expressed as a percentage of the mass, by means of either a conventional oven or a
microwave oven.
NOTE: This method does not give true representative results for materials containing
significant amounts of holloysite, montimorillonite, or gypsum minerals, highly organic
soils, or materials in which the pore water contains dissolved solids (such as salt in case
of marine deposits). For the above named materials, a modified method of testing or
data calculation may be established to give results consistent with the purpose of the
test.
5-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2
Definitions
water content - Water content of a material is equal to the ratio of the mass of "pore"
or "free" water in a given mass of material to the mass of the solid particles in the same
mass of material, expressed as a percentage.
heat sink - Heat sink is a solid or liquid placed in the microwave oven to absorb energy
after the moisture has been driven from a test specimen. The heat sink reduces the
possibility of over-heating the specimen.
5-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
The following apparatus is needed:
drying oven, maintained at 110 5 C (230 9 F)
microwave oven, variable power controls and input power ratings of 700 watts
preferred
balance, having a precision (repeatability) of 0.01 g for specimens having a mass of

200 g or less; 0.1 g for specimens having a mass of between 200 and 1000 g, or 0.5
g for specimens having a mass greater than 1000 g or 0.1% of the test load (whichever
is greater)
specimen containers for conventional ovens, with close fitting lids if specimen is less
than 200 g
specimen containers for microwave ovens, non-metallic, non-absorbent
container handling apparatus, such as glove or holder suitable for removing hot
containers from the ovens
desiccator cabinet, or jar, containing silica gel or anhydrous calcium sulfate
heat sink, for microwave ovens.
5-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Preparations
Section 4
Preparations
Preparing Test Specimens
The following table lists the steps necessary to prepare test specimens.
Step
1
2
3
Preparing Test Specimens

Action
Store samples prior to testing in air-tight containers at a temperature between 2.8C (37F) and
30C (86F) and in an area that prevents direct contact with sunlight (see NOTE 1).
Make water content determination as soon as practical after sampling, especially if potentially
corrodible containers (thin-walled Shelby tubes, paint cans, etc.) or sample bags are used.
For bulk samples, select the test specimen from the material after it has been thoroughly mixed. The
mass of moist material selected shall be in accordance with the
'Minimum Mass of Moist Specimens by Sieve Size' table.
NOTE 1: Test specimen selection and mass is determined by the proposed application, type
of material, and type of sample. Always select a representative sample in all cases. For
determination of water contents in conjunction with other test methods, the method of
specimen selection is that which is specified in that method.
Preparing Small Jar Samples
The following steps are necessary to prepare small jar samples (do one of the following):
Cohesionless Soils
Thoroughly mix the material, and then select a test specimen having a mass of
moist material in accordance with the Minimum Mass of Moist Specimens by
Sieve Size table.
Remove about 3 mm (0.12 in.) of material from the exposed periphery of the
sample and slice it in half (to check if the material is layered) prior to selecting the
test specimen.
If the soil is layered, select an average portion or individual portions or both, and note
which was tested in the report of the results.
The mass of moist material selected should not be less than 25 g or if coarsegrained particles are noted, should be according to the
'Minimum Mass of Moist Specimens by Sieve Size' table (see NOTE 2).
Using a test specimen smaller than the minimum mass indicated previously requires
discretion, though it may be adequate for the purpose of the test. If a specimen has a mass
less than the previously indicated value, note this fact in the report of the results.
NOTE 2: In many cases, when working with a small sample containing a relatively large
coarse-grained particle, it is appropriate not to include this particle in the test specimen.
If a large particle is not included, note this fact in the results.
5-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Preparations
The following table lists the recommended minimum mass of moist specimens by sieve
sizes retaining more than 10% of various sample.
Minimum Mass of Moist Specimens by Sieve Size
Sieve Size Retaining More Than 10% of
Recommended Minimum Mass of Moist
Sample
Specimen, g
2.00 mm (No. 10)
100 to 200
4.75 mm (No. 4)
300 to 500
19.00 mm (3/4 in.)
500 to 1000
38.10 mm (1 1/2 in.)
1500 to 3000
76.20 mm (3 in.)
5000 to 10,000
5-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5 Part I, Conventional Oven Method
Section 5
Part I, Conventional Oven Method
This part outlines the procedures for determining the moisture (water) content of soil, rock,
and soil-aggregate mixtures by using the conventional oven method.
Procedure
The following table lists the steps to perform the conventional oven method of drying soils.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Conventional Oven Drying of Soils

Action
Select a representative test specimen of the mass designated in the
'Minimum Mass of Moist Specimens by Sieve Size' table.
Determine the tare mass of a clean, dry container and lid, and record as WC under 'Calculations.'
Place the moist specimen in the container and secure the lid onto the container.
Determine and record the mass of the container, lid and moist specimen as W1 under Calculations
Remove the lid and place the container with the sample in the drying oven.
Dry for a minimum of 16 hours or to a constant mass.
To oven-dry large test specimens, place the material in containers having a large surface area (such
as a pan) and break into smaller aggregations.
After the material has dried to a constant mass, remove the container from the oven and replace the
lid firmly.
Allow the material and container to cool to room temperature or until the container can be handled
comfortably with bare hands and the operation of the balance will not be affected by the convection
currents.
Determine the mass of the container, lid and dry specimen using the same balance as in Step 2 and
record as W2 under 'Calculations.'
Calculations
Use the following calculations to determine the masses of water, solid particles and water
content:
Mass of the Water:
Ww = W1 W2
Mass of the Solid Particle:
Ws = W2 Wc
Water Content (%):
WC = 100( Ww Ws )
Where:
Wc = mass of container and lid, g
5-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5 Part I, Conventional Oven Method
W1 = mass of container, lid, and moist specimen, g
W2 = mass of container, lid, and oven-dried specimen, g.
Report
Include the following information on the report (data sheet):
identification of the sample (material) being tested by boring number, sample number,
test number, etc.
water content of the specimen to the nearest 0.1% or 1%, depending on the purpose of
the test
indication of any test specimen having a mass less than the minimum indicated
indication of any test specimen containing more than one soil type (layered, etc.)
indication of the method of drying, 'Part I, Conventional Oven Method' or 'Part II,
Microwave Oven Method'
indication of any material (size and amount) excluded from the test specimen
time and setting of initial drying period and subsequent incremental drying periods
when 'Part II, Microwave Oven Method' is used
initial mass of the test specimen prior to drying, and the mass after the incremental
drying periods when Part II, Microwave Oven Method' is used
identification of the microwave oven and the drying settings and cycles used when
standardized drying is used.
5-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6 Part II, Microwave Oven Method
Section 6
Part II, Microwave Oven Method
This part outlines the procedures for determining the moisture (water) content of soil, rock,
and soil-aggregate mixtures by using the microwave oven method.
Hazards
The following lists the potential hazards of the microwave, and how to avoid or counteract
them.
Handle hot containers with insulated container holder. Some soil types can retain
considerable heat, and serious burns can result from improper handling.
Observe any safety precautions supplied by the manufacturer of the microwave. Pay
particular attention to keeping the door sealing gasket and door interlocks clean and in
good working condition.
CAUTION: Manufacturers of microwave ovens may consider using their products to dry
soils to be abusive and to constitute the voiding of warranties. Drying soils containing
metallic materials may cause arcing in the oven. Highly organic soils and those
containing oils and coal may ignite and burn during drying. Continued operation of the
oven after the soil has reached constant weight may also cause damage or premature
failure of the unit.
When first introduced, microwave ovens were reported to affect heart pacemakers,
primarily because of the operating frequencies of the two devices. Since that time,
pacemakers have been redesigned and the microwave oven is not regarded as the health
hazard it once was. However, it may be advisable to post warnings that a microwave is
in use.
CAUTION: Highly organic soils and soils containing oil or other contaminates may ignite
into flames during microwave drying. Means for smothering flames to prevent operator
injury or oven damage should be available during testing. Fumes given off from
contaminated soils or wastes may be toxic, and the oven should be vented accordingly.
Do not use metallic containers in a microwave oven. Arcing and oven damage may
result.
Observe manufacturer's instructions when installing and using the oven.
CAUTION: Placement of the test specimens directly on the glass liner tray provided with
some ovens is strongly discouraged. Concentrated heating of specimens may shatter the
glass tray, possibly causing injury to the user.
The use of a microwave oven is acceptable in place of a 110 5 C (230 9 F) oven

for the purpose of drying soil specimens. Experience and good judgment should dictate
sufficient drying time related to using a microwave oven.
5-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Procedure
The following table lists the steps to perform the Microwave Oven Method of drying soils.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Microwave Oven Drying of Soils

Action
Determine the tare mass of a clean, dry container and lid, and record as WC under 'Calculations.'
Place the soil specimen in the container.
Replace the lid.
Determine and record the combined mass as W1 under 'Calculations.'
Place the soil and container, without lid, in a microwave oven.
Turn on the microwave oven for 3 minutes.
Adjust the initial and subsequent drying times if experience with a particular soil type and
specimen size indicates that shorter or longer initial drying times can be used without over
heating.
The 3 minute initial setting is for a minimum sample mass of 100 g, as indicated in the
'Minimum Mass of Moist Specimens by Sieve Size.'
Smaller samples are not recommended when using the microwave oven because drying may be
too rapid for proper control.
It may be necessary to split the sample into segments and dry them separately to obtain the dry
mass of the total sample when very large samples are needed to represent soil containing large
gravel particles.
Most ovens have a variable power setting.
For the majority of the soils tested, a setting of "high" should be satisfactory; however, for
some soils such a setting may be too severe.
The proper setting can be determined only through experience with a particular oven for
various soil types and sample sizes.
The energy output of microwave ovens may decrease with age and usage; therefore, establish
power settings and drying times for each oven.
After set time has elapsed, remove the containers and soil from oven and cool the specimen in the
desiccator to allow handling and to prevent damage to the balance.
NOTE: If containers with close-fitting lids are used, the desiccator is not necessary.
Determine and record the combined mass of the container, lid and oven-dried specimen.
With a small spatula, knife or short length of glass rod, carefully mix the soil.
Return the container and soil to the oven and reheat in the oven for 1 minute.
Repeat drying, cooling, and weighing, until the change between two consecutive mass
determinations has an insignificant effect on the calculated moisture content.
A change of 0.1% or less of the initial wet mass of the soil should be acceptable for most
specimens.
Record the final combined mass as W2 under 'Calculations.'
Standardize the drying times and number of cycles for each oven when routine testing of similar
soils is contemplated.
Periodically verify standardized drying times and cycles to assure that the results of the final dry
mass determination are equivalent to those obtained with the repeated drying, cooling and
weighing procedure.
Minimize overheating and localized drying of the soil with incremental heating and stirring,
thereby achieving results more consistent with those obtained by 'Part I, Conventional Oven
Method.'
The recommended time increments have been suitable for most specimens having particles
smaller than a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve and with a mass of approximately 200 g; however, they
5-10
TxDOT 11/2004

Step
20
Microwave Oven Drying of Soils

Action
may not be appropriate for all soils and ovens, and adjustment may be necessary.
Discard water content specimens after testing and do not use them in any other tests, since they
may suffer particle breakdown, chemical changes or losses, melting, or losses of organic
constituencies.
Calculations
Use the same 'Calculations' as shown in 'Part I, Conventional Oven Method.'
Report
Include the same 'Report' information as detailed in 'Part I, Conventional Oven Method.'
5-11
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 6
Tex-104-E, Determining Liquid Limits of Soils
Contents:
Section 3 Report Form..................................................................................................... 6-6
Section 4 Material............................................................................................................ 6-7
Section 6 Preparing Sample........................................................................................... 6-10
Section 7 Part I, Multi-Point Method ............................................................................ 6-11
Section 8 Part II, One-Point Method ............................................................................. 6-14
6-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 6 Tex-104-E, Determining Liquid Limits

of Soils
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This procedure determines the liquid limit of soils, defined as the water content of a soil at
the arbitrarily determined boundary between the liquid and plastic states, expressed as a
percentage of the oven-dried mass of the soil.
6-2
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
mixing dish, porcelain, 102 mm to 127 mm (4 in. to 5 in.) in diameter
spatula, flexible, with blade approximately 102 mm (4 in.) long and 19 mm (0.75 in.)
wide
balance, minimum capacity of 100 g accurate and readable to 0.01 g or 0.1% of the test
load, whichever is greater
drying oven, vented, maintained at 110 5 C (230 9 F)
weighing dishes, non-absorbent, with lids
grooving tool, dimensions shown in 'Grooving Tool Dimensions,' made of nonabsorbent, non-reactive material. (This grooving tool may be used in combination with
the grooving tool specified by AASHTO T-89.)
liquid limit device, consisting of a brass cup having a weight including cup hanger of
185 to 215 g and carriage conforming to the dimensions shown in
'Mechanical Liquid Limit' (see NOTE 1)
height-of-drop metal gauge block, 10 mm (0.4 in.) thick and approximately 51 mm (2

in.) long and 25 mm (1 in.) wide
spray bottle.
NOTE 1: Wear is considered excessive when the point of contact on the cup or base exceeds
13 mm (0.5 in.) in diameter, or when any point on the rim of the cup is worn to half of
the original thickness. Replace the cup when the groove-wear in the cup is 0.1 mm
(0.004 in). Refinish a base which is excessively worn, as long as the thickness meets the
tolerance specified in Mechanical Liquid Limit illustration.
6-3
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 2 Apparatus
Figure 6-1. Grooving Tools Dimensions.
Figure 6-2. Grooving Tool (ASTM).
Figure 6-3. Grooving Tool (AASHTO).
6-4
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 2 Apparatus
Figure 6-4. Mechanical Liquid Limit.
6-5
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 3 Report Form
Section 3
Report Form
Determining Liquid Limit of Soils (Worksheet for Test Method Tex-104-E) use:
worksheet 1748-1, for the 1-point method
worksheet 1748-3, for the 3-point method
Click on ex1748 to see and example of determining liquid limit of soils worksheet, 3-point
method.
6-6
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 4 Material
Section 4
Material
The following material is required:
distilled or deionized water.
6-7
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 5 Procedure
Section 5
Procedure
The following table describes adjusting the liquid limit device.
Step
1
3
4
5
Adjusting the Liquid Limit Device

Action
Inspect the 'Liquid Limit Device' to ensure it is in good working condition by checking that:
the pin connecting the cup is not worn sufficiently to permit side play;
the screws connecting the cup to the hanger arm are tight;
the points of contact on the cup and base are not excessively worn; and
a groove has not been worn into the cup from long usage.
Inspect the grooving tool and the liquid limit device frequently to ensure that the critical
dimensions meet those shown in 'Grooving Tool Dimensions' and 'Mechanical Liquid Limit,'
respectively.
Use the height-of-drop gauge block and the adjustment plate (H, shown in 'Mechanical Liquid
Limit') to adjust the height of the cup.
Secure the adjustment plate by tightening the screws.
With the gauge block in place, check the adjustment by revolving the crank rapidly several times.
If the height of drop for the cup is correct, a slight ringing sound will be heard when the cam
strikes the cam follower.
Make further adjustment if no sound is heard or the cup is raised off the gauge. (See NOTE 2)
Figure 6-5. Adjusting Liquid Limit Device.

NOTE 2: A convenient procedure for adjusting the height of drop is as follows:
Place a piece of masking tape across the outside bottom of the cup parallel with the axis
of the cup hanger pivot.
The edge of the tape away from the cup hanger should bisect the spot on the cup that
contacts the base.
6-8
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 5 Procedure
For new cups, placing a piece of carbon paper on the base and allowing the cup to drop
several times will mark the contact spot.
Attach the cup to the device and turn the crank until the cup is raised to its maximum
height.
Slide the height gauge under the cup from the front, and observe whether the gauge
contacts the cup or the tape. See 'View of Mechanical Liquid Limit' for a side view.
If the tape and cup are both contacted, the height of drop is approximately correct. If
not, adjust the cup until simultaneous contact is made.
Check adjustment by turning the crank at 2 revolutions per second while holding the
gauge in position against the tape and cup.
If a ringing or clicking sound is heard without the cup rising from the gauge, the
adjustment is correct.
If no ringing is heard, or if the cup rises from the gauge, readjust the height of drop.
If the cup rocks on the gauge during this checking operation, the cam follower pivot is
excessively worn and the worn parts should be replaced.
Always remove the tape after completion of the adjustment operation.
6-9
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 6 Preparing Sample
Section 6
Preparing Sample
Prepare the soil binder according to 'Dry Preparation (Method A)' or
'Wet Preparation (Method B)' of Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible
Base Materials for Testing." A referee sample shall be prepared according to Method A
only.
6-10
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 7 Part I, Multi-Point Method
Section 7
Part I, Multi-Point Method
Use the multi-point method (Part I) as a referee method. The results of this method shall
overrule the results of the one-point method (Part II) in cases of dispute.
Procedure
The following table describes the procedure to carry out the Multi-Point Method of
determining the liquid limit of soils.
NOTE 3: If 'Wet Preparation (Method B)' of Test Method
"Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing" was used to
prepare the dry soil sample, go immediately to Step 6.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
Multi-Point Method: Liquid Limit of Soil

Action
Place approximately 100 g of the soil sample in the mixing dish.
Thoroughly mix the soil with small increments of distilled or deionized water.
Use a spray bottle to apply a uniform mist of water to the sample.
Alternately stir, knead and chop the sample with a spatula, thoroughly mixing each increment of
water with the soil before adding another increment of water.
NOTE: Do not use the cup of the liquid limit device for mixing the soil and water.
Add water and mix thoroughly until the soil-water mixture produces a groove closure with 25 to 35
blows by following Steps 7 through 14.
Cover the mixing dish and allow the sample to stand for at least 12 hours. (See NOTE 4.)
Place a sufficient quantity of thoroughly mixed material in the cup of the liquid limit device and
above the spot where the cup rests on the base.
Squeeze and spread the soil-water mixture with the spatula to level and at the same time trim to a
depth of about 10 mm (0.4 in.) at the point of maximum thickness.
Use as few strokes of the spatula as possible, being careful not to entrap air bubbles within the
mass.
Return the excess soil to the mixing dish.
Divide the soil in the cup by a firm stroke of the grooving tool along the diameter through the
centerline of the cam follower, so a clean sharp groove of the proper dimensions is formed.
The grooving tool should be drawn in an arc and perpendicular to the surface of the cup through
its movement.
To avoid tearing the sides of the groove or slipping of the soil pat in the cup, use no more than six
strokes.
The depth of the groove should be increased with each stroke and only the last stroke should scrape
the bottom of the cup.
When using the AASHTO grooving tool, the depth of the groove should be measured to assure a
groove depth of 8 0.1 mm (0.3 0.05 in.).
Lift and drop the cup by turning the crank at the approximate rate of two (2) revolutions per second
until the two halves of the soil pat come in contact at the bottom of the groove for a distance of
about 13 mm (0.5 in).
Record the number of blows required to close the groove.
Observe at least two groove closures before one is accepted for the record.
6-11
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Step
15
16
17
18
19
20
Multi-Point Method: Liquid Limit of Soil

Action
NOTE: Do not hold the base of the machine while the crank is being turned. (See NOTE 5.)
Remove a slice of soil approximately the width of the spatula, extending from edge to edge of the
soil pat, at a right angle to the groove in which the soil flowed together.
Place at least 10 g of the sample in a tared container.
Weigh and record the mass of the sample and container to the nearest 0.01 g (see 'Calculations').
Dry the sample to a constant mass in the oven.
Weigh and record the mass of the dry soil and container to the nearest 0.01 g (see 'Calculations'
).
Calculate and record the loss in mass due to drying as the mass of water under 'Calculations.'
Transfer the remaining soil in the cup to the mixing dish.
Wash and dry the cup and grooving tool in preparation for the next trial.
Add small increments of water to the soil, mix thoroughly, allow sufficient time for the
moisture to be absorbed, and repeat steps 6 through 19 with at least two additional trials.
Obtain one trial with the required groove closure in each of the following ranges:
15 - 25 blows
20 - 30 blows
25 - 35 blows.
The minimum range of blows for the three trials shall be 10 blows.
NOTE 4: Some soils are slow to absorb water, therefore, it is possible to add increments of
water so fast that a false liquid limit is obtained. Avoid this by allowing more mixing
and/or time for soil to sufficiently absorb moisture. If more soil is added to dry out the
sample, mix thoroughly and allow ample time for the soil to sufficiently absorb
moisture. Judgment may be used to shorten the soaking time for low PI materials. All
referee samples will be soaked for the full term.
NOTE 5: Some soils tend to slide on the surface of the cup instead of flowing. If this occurs,
remove the sample from the cup and place in the mixing bowl, then add more water to
the sample and remix. Place the soil-water mixture in the cup. Spread and smooth the
soil with the spatula. Cut a groove with the grooving tool, and repeat the above step. If
the soil continues to slide on the cup with 20 blows or less, this test is not applicable
and Test Method "Tex-107-E, Determining Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils" should be
performed.
Calculation
Use the following calculation to determine percent water content:
W=
( A B)
( 100 )
(BC)
Where:
W = percent water content
6-12
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
A = mass of wet sample + tare, g
B = mass of dry sample + tare, g
C = mass of tare, g.
Data Reduction
Plot data
Plot the relationship between the water content and the corresponding number of
blows on a semi-logarithmic graph with the water content on the arithmetical scale,
and the number of blows on the logarithmic scale.
Draw a "best-fit" straight line through the three or more plotted points.
Repeat the procedure to add or replace point(s) necessary to find the "best-fit"
straight line.
Liquid Limit
Take the water content corresponding to the intersection of the line with the 25blow abscissa as the liquid limit of the soil.
Report this value to the nearest whole percent.
6-13
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 8 Part II, One-Point Method
Section 8
Part II, One-Point Method
Procedure
Use the 'Multi-Point Method : Liquid Limit of Soils' except for the following.
Step
1
2
3
4
One-Point Method: Liquid Limit of Soils

Action
Use approximately 50 g of the prepared soil sample.
For accuracy equal to that obtained by the standard multi-point method, apply between 20 and 30
blows for groove closure.
Observe at least two groove closures before one is accepted for the record to ensure the accepted
number is truly characteristic of the soil being tested (see NOTE 5.)
Take one moisture sample only for the final (accepted) trial.
Calculations
Use the following calculations to determine soil water content and liquid limit.
Calculate the water content of the soil at the time of the accepted groove closure
according to 'Part I, Multi-Point Method.'
WN = 100[( Massof Water ) ( Massof Oven Dry Soil )]
or,
100 [( A B ) ( B C ) ]
Calculate the liquid limit by one of the two following equations:
LL = WN ( N 25 )0 .121
or,
LL = K ( WN )
Where:
N = No. of blows causing closure of the groove
K = A factor given in the 'Factors for Obtaining Liquid Limit from Water Content
& Number of Blows Causing Closure of Groove' table
WN =Water content at N blows
A = mass of wet sample + tare, g
B = mass of dry sample + tare, g
6-14
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 8 Part II, One-Point Method
Factors for Obtaining Liquid Limit from Water Content & Number of Blows Causing
Closure of Groove
N
K
(Number of Blows)
(Factor for LL)
20
0.974
21
0.979
22
0.985
23
0.990
24
0.995
25
1.000
26
1.005
27
1.009
28
1.014
29
1.018
For low PI and non-plastic materials, when the two halves close or slide prior to 20
blows, determine the liquid limit (LL) as follows.
Perform Test Method "Tex-107-E, Determining Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils."
Calculate the Plasticity Index (LS = linear shrinkage in percent)
PI = LS ( 1.6 )
Determine the Plastic Limit (PL) according to Test Method "Tex-105-E,

Determining Plastic Limit of Soils"
Calculate the Liquid Limit
LL = PI + PL
Report
Report the liquid limit to the nearest whole percent.
6-15
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 7
Tex-105-E, Determining Plastic Limit of Soils
Contents:
Section 4 Preparing Sample............................................................................................. 7-5
Section 6 Calculations ..................................................................................................... 7-8
Section 7 Report .............................................................................................................. 7-9
7-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 7 Tex-105-E, Determining Plastic Limit

of Soils
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the plastic limit of soils.
7-2
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 2
Definitions
The following term and definition is referenced in this test method:
plastic limit of soils. - Plastic limit is the constant defined as the lowest moisture
content and expressed as a percentage of the weight of the oven dried soil at which the
soil can be rolled into threads one-eighth inch in diameter without the soil breaking into
pieces, also the moisture content of a solid at which a soil changes from a plastic state to
a semisolid state.
7-3
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
porcelain evaporating dish, 102 mm - 127 mm (4 in. - 5 in.) in diameter
flexible spatula, blade approximately 102 mm (4 in.) long x 19 mm (0.75 in.) wide
Plastic Limit Rolling Device (PLRD), and paper
balance, 100 g minimum capacity, accurate and readable to 0.01 g or 0.1% of the test
drying oven maintained at 110 5 C (230 9 F)
weighing dishes, non-absorbent, with lids
plaster of Paris disks, approximately 102 mm (4 in.) in diameter (optional)
rolling surface, minimum area of 300 mm x 300 mm (12 in. x 12 in.), non-absorptive,
non-corrosive, light surface texture (i.e., ground glass plate, linoleum, or plastic-faced
plywood).
NOTE 1: The hand method may be used; however, PLRD will be used as the referee.
7-4
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 4
Preparing Sample
The following table discusses preparing a sample for determining the plastic limit of soils.
Step
1
2
Preparing Sample
Action
Select approximately 20 g from material prepared for Test Method "Tex-104-E, Determining
Liquid Limit of Soils."
Reduce water content of soil until it reaches a consistency at which it can be rolled without
sticking to hands. Water content can be reduced by one of the following methods:
Place the soil in between two plaster of Paris disks;
Expose the soil to the air current from an electric fan, or;
Roll on paper that does not add any fiber to the soil, such as hard surface paper.
7-5
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 5 Procedure
Section 5
Procedure
The table below itemizes the steps necessary to determine the plastic limit of soils.
Step
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
Determining the Plastic Limit of Soils

Action
From the 20 g mass, select four to five portions of 1.5 to 2 g.
Form each portion into a ellipsoidal mass.
Place the masses in a row on a piece of paper on the PLRD, spaced evenly apart.
Roll the masses in the device with just sufficient pressure to form threads of uniform diameter
(see NOTE 2).
Taking no more than 2 minutes, further deform the threads on each stroke so the diameters are
continuously reduced and the lengths are extended, until the diameters reach 3.2 0.5 mm (1/8
0.02 in.).
Reduce the diameter of the threads to 3.2 0.5 mm (1/8 0.2 in.).
Break each thread into several pieces.
Squeeze the pieces of each thread together, knead between the thumb and first finger, and reform
into an ellipsoidal mass.
Repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the soil crumbles under the pressure required for rolling and can no
longer be rolled into a 3.2 mm (1/8 in.) diameter thread.
There is no problem if the thread breaks into shorter segments before reaching the 3.2 mm (1/8
in.) diameter.
Roll each of these shorter segments to 3.2 mm (1/8 in.) diameter (see NOTE 3).
Gather the portions of the crumbled threads and place in a tared container.
Immediately cover the container.
Continue the procedure to accumulate at least 10 g of sample rolled to the 3.2 mm (1/8 in.) diameter.
Weigh and record the mass of the sample and container to the nearest 0.01 g (see 'Calculations' ).
Dry the soil sample in the container to a constant mass in a 110 C (230 F) oven.
Weigh and record the mass of the dry soil and container to the nearest 0.01 g (see 'Calculations').
NOTE 2: A normal rate of rolling for most soils is 80 to 90 strokes per minute, counting a
stroke as one complete motion forward and backward to the starting position. This rate
of rolling may have to be decreased for very fragile soils.
NOTE 3: The only requirement for continuing the test is that the sample can be reformed
into an ellipsoidal mass and rerolled.
The operator shall at no time attempt to produce failure at exactly 3.2 mm (1/8 in.) by
reducing the rate of rolling and/or pressure, while continuing the rolling without further
deformation.
For low PI soils, it is permissible to reduce the initial diameter of the ellipsoidal mass to
near the required 3.2 mm (1/8 in.) final diameter.
Use palm, finger or a flexible spatula to roll low PI materials.
7-6
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 5 Procedure
If crumbling occurs when the thread has a diameter greater than 3.2 mm, this shall be
considered a satisfactory end point, provided the soil has been previously rolled to a 3.2
mm (1/8 in.) thread.
Crumbling of the thread will manifest itself differently with various types of soil. Some
soils fall apart into numerous small aggregations of particles. Others may form an
outside tubular layer that starts splitting at both ends. The splitting progresses toward
the middle, and finally, the thread falls apart in many small platy particles.
Fat clay soils require much pressure to deform the thread, particularly as they approach
the plastic limit. With these soils, the thread breaks into a series of barrel-shaped
segments about 3.2 mm to 9.5 mm (1/8 in. to 3/8 in.) in length.
7-7
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 6 Calculations
Section 6
Calculations
Use the following calculations to determine water mass and plastic limit.
Mass of water:
W = A B
Plastic Limit (%):
PL(%) = 100 [ W ( B C ) ]
Where:
A = mass of wet soil + tare, g
B = mass of dry soil + tare, g
7-8
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soils
Section 7 Report
Section 7
Report
Report the PL to the nearest whole percent.
7-9
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 8
Tex-106-E, Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils
Contents:
Section 4 Calculation....................................................................................................... 8-5
Section 5 Reporting ......................................................................................................... 8-6
8-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 8 Tex-106-E, Calculating the Plasticity

Index of Soils
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the plasticity index of soils.
8-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Index of Soils
Section 2
Definitions
plasticity index. - Plasticity index is a test conducted on soil samples as set out in this
test method. The plasticity index is a range of moisture in which a soil remains in a
plastic state while passing from a semisolid state to liquid state. Numerical difference
between Liquid Limit and Plastic Limit of a soil (PI = LL - PL) using Test Method
"Tex-106-E, Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils."
8-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Index of Soils
Section 3 Procedure
Section 3
Procedure
Determine liquid limit according to Test Method "Tex-104-E, Determining Liquid Limit of
Soils."
Determine plastic limit according to Test Method "Tex-105-E, Determining Plastic Limit of
Soils."
8-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Index of Soils
Section 4 Calculation
Section 4
Calculation
Use the following calculation to determine plasticity index:
PI = Liquid Limit Plastic Limit
8-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Index of Soils
Section 5 Reporting
Section 5
Reporting
Record results to the nearest whole number.
8-6
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 9
Tex-107-E, Determining the Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils
Contents:
Section 4 Preparing Sample............................................................................................. 9-5
Section 6 Calculations ..................................................................................................... 9-7
Section 7 Report .............................................................................................................. 9-8
9-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 9 Tex-107-E, Determining the Bar

Linear Shrinkage of Soils
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method allows the user to determine bar linear shrinkage of soils. It shows how to
prepare the sample, take measurements, and calculate the linear shrinkage.
9-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
porcelain evaporating dish, approximately 115 mm to 140 mm (4.5 in. to 5.5 in.) in
diameter
flexible spatula, with a blade approximately 102 mm long x 19 mm wide (4 in. x 0.75
in.)
straight edge, stainless steel shrinkage gauge
balance, minimum capacity of 200 g, accurate and readable to 0.01g or 0.1% of the test
grooving tool made of non-absorbent, non-reactive material, as shown in Test Method

"Tex-104-E, Determining Liquid Limit of Soils"
bar linear shrinkage mold, stainless steel or aluminum with section 19 mm x 19 mm x

127 mm (0.75 in. x 0.75 in. x 5 in.)
number 20 scale (optional).
9-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Materials
Section 3
Materials
The following materials are required:
petroleum jelly
9-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4
Preparing Sample
The bar linear shrinkage test is made on soil binder.
The moist soil sample remaining after the completion of Test Method "Tex-104-E,
Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils," may be used to form the soil bar.
If there is not a sufficient amount of soil remaining from the liquid limit test, prepare a soil
sample according to 'Preparing Samples for Soil Constants and Particle Size Analysis' of
Test Method "Tex-101-E Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials For Testing," and
mixed uniformly with water to reach the consistency as outlined in the procedure of this test.
9-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5 Procedure
Section 5
Procedure
The table below specifies the steps needed to determine the bar linear shrinkage of soils.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Determining Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils

Action
Place enough material in the evaporating dish to fill the shrinkage mold.
Add water, realizing that a considerable amount of manipulation is required to mix plastic soils.
NOTE: It is very important to thoroughly and uniformly mix the soil and water.
Test wet soil for the proper molding consistency by shaping the sample into a smooth layer about 13
mm (0.5 in.) thick on the bottom of the dish and making a groove with the grooving tool.
If the material immediately flows of its own accord and just closes the groove at the bottom, the
sample is ready for molding.
If a slight jarring is required to close the groove or if the soil is obviously too wet, add more water
or dry soil and remix the sample.
Grease the inside walls of the bar linear shrinkage mold with a thin layer of petroleum jelly to prevent
the adhesion of the soil to the mold.
Shape the soil bar by placing a small portion of the wet soil evenly into the mold and gently jarring
the mold to cause the soil to flow and to assist in the removal of entrapped air bubbles.
When the mold has been completely filled, remove the excess soil from the bar by means of the
straightedge and smooth the surface level with the top of the mold.
Air dry the soil bar at room temperature until color changes slightly, place in 110 5 C (230 9
F) oven and dry to a constant mass.
Remove specimen from oven, allow to cool and measure the length of the bar.
9-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6
Calculations
The linear shrinkage can be obtained as a direct reading from the stainless steel shrinkage
gauge or calculated as below.
Calculate the Percent of Linear Shrinkage:
LS = 100( LW LD ) LW
(if measured in millimeters [inches]):

or
LS = LW LD
(if measured in percent):

Where:
LW = length of the wet soil bar, always 100 if measured in %, or 127 mm (5 in.) if
measured in millimeters (inches)
LD = length of the dry soil bar, either % or mm (in.).
9-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 7 Report
Section 7
Report
Report to the nearest whole percent.
9-8
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 10
Tex-108-E, Determining the Specific Gravity of Soils
Contents:
Section 1 Overview........................................................................................................ 10-2
Section 2 Definitions ..................................................................................................... 10-3
Section 3 Apparatus....................................................................................................... 10-4
Section 4 Materials ........................................................................................................ 10-5
Section 5 Procedures...................................................................................................... 10-6
Section 6 Calculations ................................................................................................... 10-7
Section 7 Report ............................................................................................................ 10-9
10-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 10 Tex-108-E, Determining the Specific

Gravity of Soils
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines specific gravity of soils that pass the 425 m (No. 40) sieve.
10-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Gravity of Soils
Section 2
Definitions
specific gravity - Specific gravity is the ratio of the mass of a given volume of solid or
liquid to the mass of an equal volume of water at a specified temperature, commonly 4
C (39 F).
10-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Gravity of Soils
Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
volumetric flask, 500 cc
hot plate or sand bath
balance, with minimum capacity of 800 g accurate and readable to 0.05 g or 0.1% of the
test load, whichever is greater
constant temperature water bath
mercury thermometer calibrated between -15 and 43 C by 1 C intervals (-5 to 110 F

by 2 F intervals)
bent wire or glass rod
aspirator or vacuum pump
weighing dishes.
10-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Gravity of Soils
Section 4 Materials
Section 4
Materials
soil binder prepared according to

'Preparing Samples for Soil Constants and Particle Size Analysis' of Test Method
"Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil And Flexible Base Materials For Testing"
10-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Gravity of Soils
Section 5 Procedures
Section 5
Procedures
Calibrating Apparatus
For accurate results and ease of calculations, it is preferable that the volumetric flask be
calibrated and all subsequent tests be made at one chosen temperature.
Any temperature between 10 and 27C (50 and 80F) may be selected.
The following table lists the steps necessary to calibrate the apparatus.
Step
1
2
3
4
Calibrating Apparatus
Action
Fill the volumetric flask to the graduation mark with distilled or deionized water.
Place the flask in a water bath, maintained at a selected temperature (19 C [67 F] for example)
until the temperature of the flask and contents is constant.
Adjust the water to the precise level of the graduation mark with distilled or deionized water at 19
C (67 F).
Remove flask from bath, carefully dry flask and weigh.
Weigh flask and water at 19 C (67 F) to the nearest 0.05 g or better, and record as T under
'Calculations.'
Determining Specific Gravity of Soil Binder

The following table lists the steps necessary to determine the specific gravity of soil binder.
Step
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
Determining the Specific Gravity of Soil Binder

Action
Weigh out 50 g of air-dried soil prepared according to of Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil
And Flexible Base Materials For Testing."
Determine the hygroscopic moisture content of a separate portion of the air-dried soil according to
Test Method "Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials."
Use the glass funnel to carefully place the soil sample into the volumetric flask and fill flask about
one-half full with distilled or deionized water.
Remove the entrapped air by either:
gently boiling on a hot plate for 30 minutes (bubble breaker will prevent loss of material), or
subjecting the contents to a partial vacuum.
Apply a low vacuum and gradually increase the vacuum level to cause the water in the flask to
boil.
Continue this vacuum level for approximately 10 minutes.
Place flask and contents in water bath and adjust water level at the same temperature at which the
flask was calibrated.
Clean and dry flask.
Weigh to the nearest 0.05 g or better and record the mass of the flask, soil and water to fill to
graduation mark as L under 'Calculations'.
Record the temperature of the water.
10-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Gravity of Soils
Section 6
Calculations
Use the following calculations to determine mass of the oven-dry soil and specific gravity.
Calculate the mass of the oven-dried soil (in grams):
M = 100( A ) / ( 100 + P )
Where:
M = mass of oven-dried soil, in g
A = mass of air-dried soil, in g
P = percent of hygroscopic moisture.
Calculate specific gravity:
G =( M D)/ ( M +T L)
Where:
G = specific gravity
T = mass of flask and water to fill at temperature at which flask was calibrated, g
L = mass of flask, soil and water to fill at constant temperature, g
D = density of water at the temperature at which determination was made ('Density

of Distilled Water at Various Fahrenheit Temperatures' or 'Density of Distilled
Water at Various Centigrade Temperatures' tables)
Density of Distilled Water at Various Fahrenheit Temperatures

Temp., F
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

Density
Temp., F
Density
Temp., F
0.99987
56
0.99936
80
0.99990
57
0.99929
81
0.99993
58
0.99929
82
0.99996
59
0.99913
83
0.99997
60
0.99904
84
0.99998
61
0.99895
85
0.99999
62
0.99886
86
1.00000
63
0.99876
87
1.00000
64
0.99866
88
0.99999
65
0.99856
89
0.99998
66
0.99845
90
0.99997
67
0.99834
91
0.99995
68
0.99823
92
0.99992
69
0.99811
93
0.99989
70
0.99800
94
0.99986
71
0.99788
95
10-7
Density
0.99663
0.99648
0.99632
0.99616
0.99600
0.99584
0.99567
0.99550
0.99533
0.99516
0.99498
0.99480
0.99462
0.99444
0.99425
0.99406
TxDOT 11/2004

Gravity of Soils
Temp., F
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55

Density
Temp., F
Density
Temp., F
0.99982
72
0.99775
96
0.99978
73
0.99761
97
0.99973
74
0.99748
98
0.99968
75
0.99735
99
0.99962
76
0.99721
100
0.99956
77
0.99707
101
0.99950
78
0.99693
102
0.99943
79
0.99678
103
Density
0.99387
0.99367
0.99347
0.99327
0.99307
0.99287
0.99266
0.99245
Density of Distilled Water at Various Centigrade Temperatures

Temp., C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Density of Distilled Water at Various Centigrade Temperatures

Density
Temp., C
Density
Temp., C
0.99987
14
0.99927
28
0.99993
15
0.99913
29
0.99997
16
0.99897
30
0.99999
17
0.99880
31
1.00000
18
0.99862
32
0.99999
19
0.99843
33
0.99997
20
0.99823
34
0.99993
21
0.99802
35
0.99988
22
0.99780
36
0.99981
23
0.99756
37
0.99973
24
0.99732
38
0.99963
25
0.99707
39
0.99952
26
0.99681
40
0.99940
27
0.99654
41
10-8
Density
0.99626
0.99597
0.99567
0.99537
0.99505
0.99473
0.99440
0.99406
0.99371
0.99336
0.99299
0.99262
0.99224
0.99186
TxDOT 11/2004

Gravity of Soils
Section 7 Report
Section 7
Report
Report the specific gravity to the nearest 0.01.
10-9
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 11
Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils
Contents:
Section 2 Part I, Sieve Analysis of Material Retained on the 425 m (No. 40) Sieve.. 11-3
Section 3 Part II, Hydrometer Analysis of Soils Passing 425 m (No. 40) Sieve ........ 11-6
11-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 11 Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of

Soils
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method covers the quantitative determination of the distribution of particle sizes in
soils. The distribution of particle sizes larger than 75 m (No. 200) is determined by sieving,
while the distribution of particle sizes smaller than 75 m is determined by a sedimentation
process, using a hydrometer to secure the necessary data.
If hydrometer analysis is not required, but a determination of material passing the 75 m
(No. 200) sieve is desired, refer to Test Method "Tex-401-A, Sieve Analysis of Fine and
Coarse Aggregate" for low P.I. materials, or Test Method "Tex-111-E, Determining the
Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the 75 m (No. 200) Sieve" for clay materials.
11-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Section 2 Part I, Sieve Analysis of Material

Retained on the 425 (m (No. 40) Sieve
Section 2
Part I, Sieve Analysis of Material Retained on the 425 m (No. 40) Sieve
Part I details the necessary steps for sieve analysis of material retained on the 425 m (No.
40) sieve.
Apparatus
mechanical sieve shaker
balance, minimum capacity of 15 kg ( 33 lbs.), accurate and readable to at least 0.5 g or

0.1% of the test load, whichever is greater
sample splitter, quartering machine, or quartering cloth
standard U.S. sieves meeting the requirements of Test Method "Tex-907-K, Verifying
the Accuracy of Wire-Cloth Sieves"
pans.
Samples
The mass of sample shall be sufficient for particle size analysis. The minimum amount
required of material retained on the 425 m (No. 40) sieve depends on the maximum
particle size. The size shall not be less than the amount shown in the following table. When
the nominal maximum size is between sizes shown, use next larger minimum mass.
Mass Requirement for Sieve Analysis
Nominal Maximum Size
Approximate Minimum Mass
9.5 mm (3/8 in.)
0.5 kg (1 lb.)
25 mm (1 in.)
2 kg (4 lb.)
37.5 mm (1-1/2 in.)
4 kg (8 lb.)
50 mm (2 in.)
5 kg (10 lb.)
75 mm (3 in.)
6 kg (12 lb.)
NOTE: The size of the portion passing the 425 m (No. 40) sieve shall be:
for the hydrometer test, approximately 100 g for sandy soil and approximately 50 g for
silty or clayey soils
for hygroscopic moisture determination, at least 10 g.
11-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils

Procedure
The following table details the steps for sieve analysis of material retained on the 425 m
(No. 40) sieve.
Step
1
Sieve Analysis
Action
Prepare a sample of material for analysis according to 'Dry Preparation (Method A)' of Test
Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing."
Record the mass of the material passing the 425 m (No. 40) sieve (soil binder) as WS under
'Calculations.'
Obtain all sieve sizes required by the material specification.
Stack sieves in descending order with the sieve having the largest opening on top and a pan on
the bottom.
Pour the plus (+) 425 m (No. 40) portion of the sample into the sieves.
Use a mechanical shaker and shake the sieves for five minutes.
After shaking, remove the top sieve from the stack without losing any of the retained material.
Over a clean pan, hand sieve until not more than one percent, by weight, of the material
retained on the sieve continues to pass through the sieve.
Combine any material passing the sieve with the material retained on the next smallest size
sieve.
Weigh the portion retained on the first sieve and record the mass as W1 under 'Calculations.'
Repeat Step 4 for the next largest sieve size and then add the material retained to the portion
retained on the first sieve and record the combined weight as W2 under 'Calculations.'
Continue hand sieving and recording the combined masses, as W3, W4, etc., until all sieving
is completed.
Calculations
Calculate the total mass of the sample:
WT = WS + W
Where:
WT = total mass of sample, g
WS = mass of material passing the 425 m (No. 40) sieve, g
W = cumulative mass of smallest sieve size, g.
Calculate cumulative percent retained for each sieve:
Cumulative % Re tained first sieve = 100 W1 WT

Cumulative % Re tained sec ond sieve = 100 W2 WT , etc.
Calculate individual percent retained for each sieve by subtracting the cumulative
percent retained of one sieve size larger from the cumulative percent retained of the
sieve size:
11-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils

Individual % Re tained = Cum. % of W2 Cum. % of W1 , etc.
Plot the cumulative percent retained, from above, versus the sieve size, on 'Form 481,
Cumulative Mechanical Analysis' or semi-logarithmic paper.
The following table illustrates the calculation for sieve analysis.
Sieve Size
12.5 mm (1/2 in.)
9.5 mm (3/8 in.)
4.75 mm (No. 4)
2.36 mm (No. 8)
Total including minus (-) 425 m
(No. 40) material
Sieve Analysis Calculations

Cumulative Weight
Cumulative
Retained (g)
Percent Retained
108.4
2.8
412.5
10.8
2285.0
59.6
3523.0
91.9
3832.0
100
Individual Percent
Retained
2.8
8.0
48.8
32.3
Test Report
Report the individual percent retained on each sieve to the nearest whole number.
11-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Section 3 Part II, Hydrometer Analysis of Soils

Passing 425 (m (No. 40) Sieve
Section 3
Part II, Hydrometer Analysis of Soils Passing 425 m (No. 40) Sieve
This part describes the analysis of soils passing the 425 m (No. 40) sieve using a
hydrometer.
Apparatus
balance, minimum capacity of 200 g, accuracy of 0.01 g or less
stirring apparatus (either a 'Mechanical Stirring Device' or an 'Air Dispersion Device' )
'Hydrometer,' graduated in grams per liter, Type 151 H or 152 H
sedimentation cylinder a glass hydrometer cylinder approximately 457 mm (18 in.) in

height and 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) in diameter, graduated for a volume of 1000 cc (shown in
'Air Dispersion Device')
mercury thermometer, range of 0 to 104 C (1 to 220 F), accurate to 0.5 C (1 F)
standard U.S. sieves, meeting the requirements of Test Method "Tex-907-K, Verifying
the Accuracy of Wire-Cloth Sieves," in these sizes:
75 mm (3 in)
50 mm (2 in)
25 mm (1 in)
9.5 mm (3/8 in)
4.75 mm (No. 4)
2 mm (No. 10)
425 m ( No. 40)
75 m (No. 200)
oven, maintained at 110 5 C (230 9 F)
evaporating dishes
water bath, or constant temperature room
timing device with a second hand
beaker, 250 mL (7.5 oz.).
Figure. Mechanical Stirring Device.

11-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils

Figure. Air Dispersion Device.
Figure. Hydrometer with Dimensions.

Material
dispersing agent: A solution of sodium hexametaphosphate shall be used in distilled or

demineralized water, at the rate of 40 g of Sodium Hexametaphosphate per liter of
solution.
Solution of this salt, if acidic, slowly revert or hydrolyze back to the

orthophosphate form with a resultant decrease in dispersing action.
Solutions shall be prepared frequently (at least once a month) or adjusted to pH of 8

or 9 by means of sodium carbonate.
Bottles containing solutions shall have the date of preparation marked on them.
distilled or demineralized water
source of compressed air, if 'Air Dispersion Device' is used.
Determining Composite Correction for Hydrometer Reading

Equations for percentages of soil remaining in suspension, as given in 'Calculations' of
'Part II, Hydrometer Analysis of Soils Passing 425 m (No. 40) Sieves' are based on the use
of distilled or demineralized water.
11-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils

A dispersing agent is used in the water, however, and the specific gravity of the resulting
liquid is appreciably greater than that of distilled or demineralized water.
The soil hydrometers are calibrated by the manufacturer at 20 C (68 F), and variations in
temperature from this standard temperature produce inaccuracies in the actual hydrometer
readings. The amount of the inaccuracy increases as the variation from the standard
temperature increases.
Hydrometers are graduated by the manufacturer to be read at the bottom of the meniscus
formed by the liquid on the stem. Since it is not possible to secure readings of soil
suspensions at the bottom of the meniscus, readings must be taken at the top and a correction
applied.
The net amount of the corrections for the three items enumerated is designated as the
composite correction, and may be determined experimentally.
For convenience, a graph or table of composite corrections for a series of 1 degree
temperature differences for the range of expected test temperatures may be prepared and
used as needed. Measurement of the composite corrections may be made at two
temperatures spanning the range of expected test temperatures, and corrections for the
intermediate temperatures calculated assuming a straight-line relationship between the two
observed values.
Prepare 1,000 mL (30 fl. oz.) of liquid composed of distilled water and dispersing agent in
the same proportion as will prevail in the sedimentation (hydrometer) test.
Place the liquid in a sedimentation cylinder and the cylinder in the constant-temperature
water bath, set for one of the two temperatures to be used.
When the temperature of the liquid becomes constant, insert the hydrometer at the top of the
meniscus formed on the stem. For hydrometer 151 H the composite correction is the
different between this reading and one; for hydrometer 152 H it is the difference between the
reading and zero.
Bring the liquid and the hydrometer to the other temperature to be used, and secure the
composite correction as before.
Procedure
Hydrometer Analysis
The following table details the steps for hydrometer test.

Step
1
Hydrometer Analysis
Action
Use soil binder prepared in 'Part I,' Analysis of Material Retained on the 425 m [No. 40]
Sieve' or prepare the soil binder according to Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and
Flexible Base Materials for Testing" if Part I was not used.
Record the mass of the air-dried sample as WA under 'Calculations.'
11-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Step
2
3
4

Hydrometer Analysis
Action
Determine the hygroscopic moisture of the soil binder according to Test Method
"Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials."
Record the percent hygroscopic moisture as PH under 'Calculations.'
Determine the specific gravity of the soil binder according to Test Method "Tex-108-E,
Determining the Specific Gravity of Soils."
Use a sample splitter to obtain 50 g (for silty or clayed soils) or 100 g (for sandy soil) of soil
binder to the nearest 0.01 g.
Place the sample in a 250 cc beaker, or in the hydrometer cylinder if the dispersion tube is
available.
Add approximately 125 cc of the sodium hexametaphosphate solution and cover with
distilled water.
Stir the soil thoroughly and then allow to soak for at least 12 hours.
After the soaking period, disperse the soil with the stirring device or a soil dispersion tube as
follows:
Stirring Device
Wash the soil into the dispersion cup and add distilled water until the cup is slightly
more than half full.
Disperse the contents for a period of 1 minute in the mechanical stirring device.
After dispersion, transfer the soil slurry to the hydrometer cylinder and add sufficient
distilled water (having the same temperature as the water bath) to bring the level of the
water to the 1000 cc mark on the cylinder.
Place the cylinder in the constant temperature water bath.
Soil Dispersion Tube
Add about 300 cc of distilled water to the soaked sample and carefully place the
dispersion tube into the hydrometer cylinder.
Adjust the air pressure by means of the valve and disperse the soil.
Disperse the soil-water mixture using an air pressure of 152 kPa (20 psi).
Disperse soils with a PI of 5 or less for 5 minutes; soils with a PI between 6 and 20 for
10 minutes; and soils with a PI greater than 20 for 15 minutes.
Soils containing large percentage of mica need be dispersed for 60 seconds only.
Wash the soil from the dispersion tube into cylinder and add sufficient amount of
distilled water to bring the level of the water to the 1000 cc mark before placing into the
constant temperature bath.
When the soil suspension reaches the temperature of the bath, remove the graduate and
thoroughly shake its contents for one minute, using the palm of the hand or a stopper over
the open end of the cylinder.
Mix the contents of the cylinder by alternately turning the cylinder upside-down, then rightside up and by loosening any material remaining on the bottom while in the inverted
position.
At the conclusion of this shaking, place the hydrometer cylinder on the table, immediately
lower the hydrometer into the suspension and record the time.
Read the hydrometer at the peak of the meniscus formed on the stem to the nearest 0.5 g per
liter at the end of 2 minutes from the time the graduate was set on the table.
Remove the hydrometer and carefully place the cylinder with contents into the constant
temperature bath.
Obtain hydrometer readings at time intervals of 5, 15, 30, 60, 250, and 1440 minutes after
the beginning of sedimentation.
About 15 seconds before the time of each reading, slowly and carefully lower the
hydrometer into the soil suspension and read the hydrometer after it has come to rest.
11-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Step

Hydrometer Analysis
Action
After each reading, remove the hydrometer from the cylinder in such a manner as to cause
as little disturbance as possible.
Determine and record the temperature of the suspension each time a hydrometer reading is
taken.
Record data on work card, to the nearest 0.1%.
Fine Sieve Analysis
The following table details the sieving steps for the portion of the soil sample from
hydrometer test.
Step
1
2
Fine Sieve Analysis

Action
At the conclusion of the final hydrometer reading, pour the soil suspension onto a 75 m (No.
200) sieve and rinse the retained particles with tap water until the wash water is clear.
Flush any material retained on the 75 m (No. 200) sieve to an evaporating dish and dry to a
constant mass at a temperature of 110 5 C (230 9 F).
No water should be decanted from the evaporating dish, to avoid loss of material or after the
material has settled and the water is clear, carefully decant water from the evaporating dish
avoiding any loss of material.
A sieve analysis is made using the 425 m (No. 40) and 75 m (No. 200) sieves and such
other sieves as may be required by the material under test.
Calculations
Calculate the percentage of hygroscopic moisture to the nearest 0.001 percent:
PH = 100 ( W Air Dry WOvenr Dry ) WOvenr Dry
Where:
WAir Dry = mass of air-dry soil for hygroscopic moisture test, g
WOvenr Dry = mass of oven-dry soil for hygroscopic moisture test, g.
Calculate the mass of oven-dry soil sample for the hydrometer test:
WO = 100 W A ( 100 + PH )
Where:
WO = mass of oven-dry soil sample for the hydrometer test
PH = percent hygroscopic moisture
WA = mass of air-dry sample for the hydrometer test.
Calculate the percent soil binder in the total sample:
PB = 100 WS WT
100-E, Soils & Aggregates Test Procedures 11-10
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils

Where:
PB = percent soil binder in the total sample
WS = mass of material passing the 425 m (No. 40) sieve, g
WT = total mass of the sample, g (as calculated in 'Part I, Sieve Analysis of

Material Retained on the 425 m [No. 40] Sieve').
Calculate the percentage of the total original material that is retained on any given fine
sieve analysis sieves:
% of Original Re tained = PB W1 WB + ( 100 - PB ), etc.
Where:
WB = mass of oven-dry soil sample for the hydrometer test, g
W1 = mass of portion retained on the first sieve from fine sieve analysis, g.
Calculate the percentage of soil in suspension:
PS = ( PB R a WO )
Where:
PS = percentage of soil binder in suspension
R = corrected hydrometer reading
a = constant depending on the density of the suspension and varies with the specific
gravity of the soil (Gr.), (shown in the Constant a table)
WO = mass of oven-dry soil sample for the hydrometer test.
The following table details the 'a' values for different specific gravities.
Constant a
Specific Gravity, Gr.
2.95
2.90
2.85
2.80
2.75
2.70
2.65
2.60
2.55
2.50
2.45
Constant, a
0.94
0.95
0.96
0.97
0.98
0.99
1.00
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.05
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils

Calculate the maximum diameter, d, of the particles in suspension, corresponding to the

percentages indicated by a given hydrometer reading, using modified Stoke's Law:
d = ( K / 1000 ) ( L / T )1 / 2
Where:
L = distance from the surface of the suspension is being level at which the density
of the suspension is being measured, cm. For a given hydrometer and
sedimentation cylinder, the values vary according to the hydrometer readings.
These values of distance L, known as the effective depth, are given in the
'Effective Depth' table.
T = an interval of time from beginning of sedimentation to the taking of the reading

, minutes (2, 5, 15, 30, 60, 250, and 1440 min);
K = a constant depending on the temperature of the suspension and the specific

gravity of the soil particles. Values of K for a range of temperatures and specific
gravities are given in the 'Constant K' table. The value of K does not change for a
series of readings constituting a test, while values of L and T do vary.
Test Report
Report the total percentages retained on each sieve, or the grain diameter to the nearest
whole number, as follows:
Sieves, opening in millimeters (inches or sieve numbers):
75 mm (3 in.)
50 mm (2 in.)
25 mm (1 in.)
9.5 mm (3/8 in.)
4.75 mm (No. 4)
2.00 mm (No. 10)
425 m (No. 40)
75 m (No. 200)
Grain diameter:
0.02 mm
0.002 mm
0.001 mm.
The sieve sizes listed above are suggested sizes only and may be specified only in part.
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils

Plotting Test Results
The percentage of grains of different diameters are plotted on semi-logarithmic paper to

obtain a grain size accumulation curve.
The data obtained from the hydrometer analysis are plotted as percent of material in
suspension (% passing) against corrected grain diameter in millimeters.
The data from the mechanical analysis are plotted as the percent retained against sieve
size.
Computer Program
An Excel 7.0 worksheet (Tex-110e) is available to automate the calculation, plot, and report.
The following table gives the effective depth, L, based on hydrometer 152 H and
sedimentation cylinder of specified sizes.
Actual Hydrometer
reading
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Effective Depth, L
Effective Depth,
Actual Hydrometer
L, cm
reading
16.3
31
16.1
32
16.0
33
15.8
34
15.6
35
15.5
36
15.3
37
15.2
38
15.0
39
14.8
40
14.7
41
14.5
42
14.3
43
14.2
44
14.0
45
13.8
46
13.7
47
13.5
48
13.3
49
13.2
50
13.0
51
12.9
52
12.7
53
12.5
54
12.4
55
12.2
56
12.0
57
Effective Depth, L,
cm
11.2
11.1
10.9
10.7
10.6
10.4
10.2
10.1
9.9
9.7
9.6
9.4
9.2
9.1
8.9
8.8
8.6
8.4
8.3
8.1
7.9
7.8
7.6
7.4
7.3
7.1
7.0
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Actual Hydrometer
reading
27
28
29
30

Effective Depth, L
Effective Depth,
Actual Hydrometer
L, cm
reading
11.9
58
11.7
59
11.5
60
11.4
Effective Depth, L,
cm
6.8
6.6
6.5
The following table gives the constant K based on temperature and specific gravity of soil
particles.
Temp
C
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
2.45
15.10
15.11
14.92
14.74
14.56
14.38
14.21
14.04
13.88
13.72
13.57
13.42
13.27
13.12
12.98
2.50
15.05
14.86
14.67
14.49
14.31
14.14
13.97
13.81
13.65
13.49
13.34
13.19
13.04
12.90
12.76
2.55
14.81
14.62
14.43
14.25
14.08
13.91
13.74
13.58
13.42
13.27
13.12
12.97
12.83
12.69
12.56
Constant K
Specific Gravity of Soil Particles
2.60
2.65
2.70
2.75
14.57
14.35
14.14
13.94
14.39
14.17
13.96
13.76
14.21
13.99
13.78
13.59
14.03
13.82
13.61
13.42
13.86
13.65
13.44
13.25
13.69
13.48
13.28
13.09
13.53
13.32
13.12
12.94
13.37
13.17
12.97
12.79
13.21
13.01
12.82
12.64
13.06
12.86
12.67
12.49
12.91
12.72
12.53
12.35
12.77
12.58
12.39
12.21
12.64
12.44
12.25
12.08
12.49
12.30
12.12
11.95
12.36
12.17
11.99
11.82
2.80
13.74
13.56
13.39
13.23
13.07
12.91
12.76
12.61
12.46
12.32
12.18
12.04
11.91
11.78
11.65
2.85
13.56
13.38
13.21
13.05
12.89
12.73
12.58
12.43
12.29
12.15
12.01
11.88
11.75
11.62
11.49
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 12
Tex-111-E, Determining the Amount of Material in Soils
Finer than the 75 m (No. 200) Sieve
Contents:
Section 3 Procedure ....................................................................................................... 12-4
Section 5 Report ............................................................................................................ 12-6
12-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 12 Tex-111-E, Determining the Amount

of Material in Soils Finer than the 75 (m (No.
200) Sieve
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the amount of soil material finer than the 75 m (No. 200) sieve.
12-2
TxDOT 11/2004

200) Sieve
Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
balance, accurate and readable to 0.01 g for samples having a mass of 200 g or less; 0.1
g for specimens having a mass of between 200 to 1000 g; or 0.5 g for specimens having
a mass greater than 1000 g or 0.1% of the test load, whichever is greater
containers of sufficient size to hold the test sample covered with water and to permit
vigorous agitation without inadvertent loss of any part of the sample
sieves, meeting the requirements of Test Method "Tex-907-K, Verifying the Accuracy
of Wire-Cloth Sieves," in the following sizes:
425 m (No. 40)
75 m (No. 200)
quartering machine, sample splitter or quartering cloth
stirring device with dispersion cup or soil dispersion tube.
12-3
TxDOT 11/2004

200) Sieve
Section 3 Procedure
Section 3
Procedure
Use the following procedure to determine the amount of soil material finer than the 75 m
(No. 200) sieve.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Amount of Soil Material Finer than 75 m

Action
Thoroughly mix the field sample and use a sample splitter or quartering cloth to produce a
representative test sample.
The test sample should be sufficient in size to produce a dry mass of approximately the sample
size indicated in the 'Representative Test Sample Size' table.
Place the test sample in a tared container and dry to a constant mass in the 110 5 C (230 9 F)
oven.
Weigh and record the initial mass of the sample as WT under 'Calculations.'
Cover the sample completely with clean water in the container and allow to soak for a minimum of
two hours (preferably overnight).
Agitate the contents of the container vigorously and pour the washed water immediately over the
nested sieves with the 425 m (No. 40) sieve on top.
Repeat the process of adding clear water to the container, agitate the contents, and keep pouring the
wash water over the sieves until the water is clear (see NOTE).
After the first washing (when the total sample is small) transfer the entire contents of the soaking
container to the nested sieves and wash them under running water.
When the sample is larger than can be handled at one time on the nested sieves, wash a portion of
the sample and transfer to another container for later drying.
Use a small amount of water to transfer the retained particles to the original container.
Drain off clear water and dry the container and retained materials in the oven to a constant mass.
Sieve the oven-dried material over the nested sieves, and weigh and record the total mass of the
oven-dry materials retained as WR under 'Calculations.'
Below is a table of values for the approximate minimum dry mass of a representative test
sample (g) of finer than 75 m (No. 200) soil material, based upon the nominal size of the
largest particle in the sample.
Representative Test Sample Size
Nominal size of Largest Particle
Approximate Minimum Dry Mass of Sample, g
2.00 mm (No. 10)
200
4.75 mm (No. 4)
500
19.00 mm (3/4 in.)
1500
25.00 mm (1 in.)
2000
37.50 mm (1-1/2 in.) and larger
2500
NOTE: For soils containing a relative high percentage of material finer than 75 m (No.
200) sieve, after the initial washing disperse the particles passing the 425 m (No. 40)
sieve in the stirring device for one minute. Return the dispersed sample on to the 75 m
(No. 200) sieve and wash until the wash water is clear. While washing, tap the sieve to
expedite the operation.
12-4
TxDOT 11/2004

200) Sieve
Section 4
Calculations
Use the following equation to calculate the percentage of material finer than the 75 m (No.
200) sieve:
P = 100( WT WR ) / WT
Where:
WT = initial mass of the oven-dried test sample
WR = mass of the oven-dried samples retained on the sieves.
12-5
TxDOT 11/2004

200) Sieve
Section 5 Report
Section 5
Report
Report calculations to nearest 0.1%.
12-6
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 13
Tex-112-E, Admixing Lime to Reduce Plasticity Index of
Soils
Contents:
Section 4 Calculation..................................................................................................... 13-5
Section 5 Report ............................................................................................................ 13-6
13-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 13 Tex-112-E, Admixing Lime to Reduce

Plasticity Index of Soils
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method covers reducing the plasticity of soils and flexible base materials. The strength
imparted to the compacted mass by the lime is not considered only the permanent effect
produced on the soil constants of the binder.
This method of improving a material should not be confused with soil-lime stabilization (see
Test Method "Tex-121-E, Soil Lime Testing").
It is desirable to test and use the recommended construction procedure for soil-lime
stabilization to gain the strength of the matrix resulting from the chemical reaction of the
lime with clay.
13-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
sample splitter or quartering cloth
all apparatus listed for Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base
Materials for Testing"
apparatus for conducting the soil constants tests listed under the various procedures.
13-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Procedure
Section 3
Procedure
The table below demonstrates the admixing lime method to measure the reduction of the
plasticity index of soils.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Admixing Lime Method

Action
Select a large representative sample of soil or flexible base material to be treated with lime.
Using a sample splitter, obtain a representative test sample that will produce approximately 300 g
of soil binder.
Prepare soil binder from test sample according to 'Part I, Dry Preparation (Method A)' of Test
Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing."
Calculate the amount of lime to be added to the soil binder by multiplying the target lime
percentage by the mass (50 g) of soil binder and divided by the percent soil binder (in
decimal).
The recommended target lime percentages are 1, 2, 3, and 4 % for base material and 2, 4, 6 and
8 % for sub-grade.
Weigh 50 g of soil binder and add the amount of lime calculated in Step 4 to the soil binder; the
percentage of lime used is based on the dry mass of the soil.
Add enough water to each sample, including the natural material without time being added, to
bring the soil-water mixture to approximately the plastic limit consistency.
Cover the wet material and allow the mixture to cure for 24 hours.
Perform the soil constants tests specified in the controlling specifications and compare with the
test results obtained on the original untreated material.
Plot the liquid and plastic limits of the various soil and lime mixtures as water content on the
ordinate and time percentages of the abscissa.
13-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Calculation
Section 4
Calculation
The optimum percentage of lime is the least amount of lime used to produce the lowest
plasticity index (PI) which is the difference between the liquid and plastic limits.
13-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5 Report
Section 5
Report
Determine the optimum lime percentage to the nearest whole percent.
13-6
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 14
Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and
Moisture-density Relationship of Base Materials
Contents:
Section 4 Calibrating Equipment................................................................................... 14-5
Section 6 Materials Difficult to Compact...................................................................... 14-7
Section 8 Precautions................................................................................................... 14-10
Section 9 Calculations ................................................................................................. 14-11
Section 10 Computer Program..................................................................................... 14-12
Section 11 Test Record................................................................................................ 14-13
Section 12 General Notes ............................................................................................ 14-14
Section 13 Reporting Test Results............................................................................... 14-15
Section 14 Archived Versions ..................................................................................... 14-16
14-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 14 Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics and Moisture-density
Relationship of Base Materials
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
Effective Date: November 2004 (refer to 'Archived Versions' for previous versions).
This method determines the relationship between water content and the dry unit mass
(density) of base materials. The base materials are compacted in a mold with a rammer
dropped from a set height (10 lb. hammer, 18 inch drop, 50 blows/layer). The test is
performed on prepared materials passing the 45 mm (1-3/4 in.) sieve. Follow Test Method
"Tex-114-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of
Subgrade & Embankment Soils," to determine moisture-density relationships of untreated
subgrade and embankment soils.
14-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2
Definitions
maximum dry density (DA) - Maximum dry density is the maximum value obtained
by the compaction curve using the specified compactive effort.
optimum water content (WO) - Optimum water content is the water content at which
the soil can be compacted to the maximum dry density.
compactive effort (C.E.). - Compactive effort is the total energy, expressed as kiloNewton-meters per cubic meter (foot-pounds per cubic inch) used to compact the
specimen.
C. E .=
Compactive effort is calculated as follows:
Ht . of Drop ( m or ft ) Wt . of Hammer( kN or lb ) # Drops # Layers

Volume of Mold ( m 3 or in 3 )
This procedure requires 13.26 ft.-lb./in3.
NOTE: In the metric system the units for weight and mass are not the same. In order to
convert the mass of the hammer to the metric "weight" you must multiply the mass by
the force of gravity, g, which in the metric system is 9.8 m/sec2. The resulting unit is a
Newton. Divide that number by 1000 to get kilo-Newtons (kN).
14-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
automatic tamper (compaction) device with base plate to hold 152.4 mm (6 in.) inside
diameter (I.D.) forming molds, equipped with a 4.55 0.01 kg (10 0.02 lb.) rammer
and adjustable height of fall
Striking face of the rammer should conform to a 43 2 segment of a 74 2.5 mm

(2.9 0.1 in.) radius circle.
The base plate of the tamper shall be secured to a rigid foundation such as a
concrete block with a mass of not less than 91 kg (200 lbs.).
An alternate foundation support, such as a rigid stand or table, may be used if the
DA produced is within 2% of that produced by an automatic tamper bolted to a
concrete floor.
a rigid metal compaction mold having a 152.4 mm, +1.59 or -0.40 mm (6 in., +1/16 or 1/64 in.) I.D. and 215.9 1.6 mm (8.5 1/16 in.) height with removable collar
a metal stand with a set of standard spacer blocks and a micrometer dial assembly, with
50 mm (2 in.) travel, for determining height of specimens. Spacer blocks 25.4, 101.6,
152.4 and 279.4 mm (1, 4, 6 and 11 in.) accurate to 0.025 mm (0.001 in.).
balance with a minimum capacity of 15 kg (35 lb.), accurate and readable to 0.5 g or
0.1% of the test mass, whichever is greater
extra base plate secured on a rigid stand to hold the forming mold
hydraulic press to extrude compacted specimens from mold
drying oven maintained at 110 5 C (230 9 F)
metal pans, wide and shallow for mixing and drying materials
circular porous stones slightly less than 152.4 mm (6 in.) in diameter and 51 mm (2 in.)
high
a supply of small tools including a 1.8 to 2.3 kg (4 to 5 lb.) rawhide hammer, 0.5 to 0.9
kg (1 to 2 lb.) plastic mallet, level, finishing tool and others.
14-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Calibrating Equipment
Section 4
Calibrating Equipment
The following steps are necessary to calibrate equipment:
Measure the diameter of the mold at the ends and at several intermediate points, using a
micrometer caliper and micrometer dial.
Calculate an average diameter, davg, in mm (in.).
Calculate the cross sectional area of the mold:
Ax = ( 3.1416 d avg 2 ) / 4 , mm 2 ( in 2 )
Calculate the volume , in m3 (ft3) for 1 mm (0.04 in.) of height of the mold:
Volume per mm = A x / 10 9 ,m 3 / mm
(Volume per in.= Ax / 1728 , ft 3 / in. )
14-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5
Preparing Sample
Prepare the material according to 'Part II, Preparing Samples for Compaction and Triaxial
Tests' of Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing."
NOTE: For wetted stabilized materials taken from the roadway, see appropriate test method
for preparation procedure for specification compliance, density, and/or strength.
Cement Stabilization: Test Method "Tex-120-E, Soil-Cement Testing"
Lime Stabilization: Test Method "Tex-121-E, Soil-Lime Testing"
Lime-Fly Ash Stabilization: Test Method "Tex-127-E, Lime-Fly Ash Compressive

Strength Test Methods"
14-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6 Materials Difficult to Compact
Section 6
Materials Difficult to Compact
Materials that are difficult to compact are an exception and require special attachments to
the compaction apparatus
A 4.54 kg (10 lb.) rammer with twin striking face, a drop height of 457.2 mm (18 in.)
A 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) thick neoprene pad (Type A Shore durometer of 65 3).
The 152.4 mm (6 in.) diameter neoprene pad should just slide into the mold on top
of the sand layer and will divert some of the impact to vibrations.
Compact the material in eight 25.4 mm (1 in.) layers using the neoprene pad and 100 ram
blows of the 4.55 kg (10 lb.) rammer for each layer.
The rammer with a twin striking face should be used when the material, wetted to slightly
below optimum water content, mixed thoroughly and molded in two 51 mm (2 in.) lifts, is
sheared or torn by the ram in excess of 25.4 mm (1 in.) on the last (50th) blow.
14-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 7 Procedure
Section 7
Procedure
The following table lists the steps necessary to determine the relationship between water
content and the dry unit mass (density) of base materials.
Determining the Relationship between Water Content and the Dry Unit Mass (Density) of Base Materials
Step
Action
1
Obtain a representative sample of prepared material and determine the percent hygroscopic moisture of
the sample.
2
Estimate the mass of air dry material that will fill the mold when wetted and compacted.
3
Using this estimated mass and the percentages of the various sizes of particles obtained in the preparation
of the sample, compute the cumulative masses for each size to be combined to make a specimen.
NOTE: The compacted material will not be trimmed with a straight edge and is not expected to
completely fill the mold after compaction.
4
Weigh out several samples as calculated in Step 2.
5
Estimate the percent moisture at optimum.
6
Start the water content of the first specimen at 2 to 4% below this estimate and adjust water content of the
other specimens in approximately 2% increments.
7
Calculate the amount of water to be added based on the mass of the air-dried material.
8
Weigh out this amount of water in a tared sprinkling jar.
9
Place the total sample in the mixing pan, mix thoroughly and wet with all of the mixing water by
sprinkling water in increments onto the sample during mixing.
10 Mix thoroughly breaking up the soil lumps. Do not break any aggregate particles in the sample.
11 Turn the wet material over with the mixing trowel to allow the aggregate particles to absorb water.
12 After thoroughly mixing, weigh the sample and cover the mixture to prevent loss of moisture by
evaporation.
13 Allow the wetted samples to stand for 12 hours before compaction.
A standing time of more than 12 hours may be required for materials with a PI of 12 or greater.
When the PI is less than 12, the standing time may be reduced to not less than 4 hours.
Split or referee samples should stand the full term.
14 Prior to compaction, weigh the sample and replace any evaporated water and thoroughly mix each
specimen to ensure even distribution of water throughout the sample.
15 Determine the mass of the compaction mold and record on the 'M/D & Triaxial Test Worksheet,' Form
1176.
16 Estimate the mass needed for one 51 mm (2 in.) layer of compacted material (approximately one-fourth
of the total material for this specimen.)
17 Separate the coarse aggregate into the quadrants of the pan in equal and representative portions for each
layer.
18 Weigh out material for the first layer.
With a spatula, separate the aggregate from the fines.
19 Place some loose fines in the bottom 13 mm (0.5 in.) of the mold and level with a spatula.
20 Hand place any aggregates retained on the 22.6 mm (7/8 in.) sieve for maximum density.
With a spatula or hand, separate the intermediate aggregates and fines.
Add a small amount of fines to fill voids between the coarse aggregates.
21 From the top of the mold, use a scoop to place all material passing the 22.6 mm (7/8 in.) sieve, saving
some fines.
14-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 7 Procedure
Determining the Relationship between Water Content and the Dry Unit Mass (Density) of Base Materials
Step
Action
Use a spatula to arrange aggregate so as to minimize contact with the mold.
Finish the lift with the addition of the remaining fines from this layer.
22 Use a spatula or similar hand tool to spade around the inside of the mold to allow some of the fines to fill
any cavities around the edge before compacting the layer.
23 The finishing tool may be used to level the surface of the sample before compacting.
24 Do not push this layer down by hand or other means than that described above.
25 Compact the layer by applying 50 ram blows of the 4.55 kg (10 lb.) rammer from a height of 457.2 mm
(18 in.).
26 Stop the compactor as frequently as necessary to clean the ram face of sticking material.
27 Use the sample mass and compacted thickness of the first layer to adjust the mass and thickness of the
subsequent lifts.
28 After the fourth layer has been compacted, fasten the mold containing the material on top of the extra
base plate.
29 Finish the specimen to an even and level top surface by means of the various hand tools, such as a putty
knife, a plastic mallet, and a circular plate with a smooth surface.
30 Use the small level to check the surface of the specimen so that it will be plane and level with the top of
the forming mold.
NOTE: Do not trim the specimen.
31 When the surface is level, apply a schedule of blows to the top of the finishing tool.
32 Use five to ten light blows of the 0.5 to 0.9 kg (1 to 2 lb.) plastic mallet followed by five firm blows
of the 1.8 to 2.3 kg (4 to 5 lb.) rawhide hammer to finish the surface of the compacted specimen.
The height of the finished specimen should be 203.2 3 mm (8 1/8 in.).
33 Remove mold from the base plate.
34 Weigh the specimen in the mold to the nearest estimated 0.5 g and measure the sample height by means
of the micrometer dial assembly to the nearest 0.03 mm (0.001 in.)
35 Record data on the 'M/D & Triaxial Test Worksheet,' Form 1176..
36 Carefully center the specimen over a porous stone and place in the hydraulic press to extrude the
specimen from the mold.
37 Remove the stones from the specimen over a tared flat drying pan.
38 Break up the specimen and place the identification tag with the loose material in the drying pan.
39 Obtain the mass of the drying pan and wet sample.
Weigh and record to 0.5 g.
40 Place the drying pan with wet material in an oven at a temperature of 110 C (230 F) until a constant
mass has been reached.
41 Record the mass of the oven-dried material to the nearest 0.5 g under 'Calculations.'
42 After compacting the first two or three specimens, construct the M/D curve to aid in evaluating the shape
of the curve.
If a well-defined compaction curve is not obtained, it may be necessary to adjust the water content of
other prepared samples by adding additional water or air-drying to obtain a well-defined M/D curve.
To obtain a well-defined compaction curve, provide two water content percentages on both sides of
optimum.
NOTE: Compacted sample(s) should not be reused for preparation of other compaction specimens.
14-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 8 Precautions
Section 8
Precautions
Please note that in Steps 16-26 of the table 'Determining the Relationship between Water
Content and the Dry Unit Mass (Density) of Base Materials,' when placing material in the
mold, larger aggregates should be placed well down near the bottom of the layer in their
most stable position.
Usually, aggregates of 19.0 mm (3/4 in.) in size or larger do not move down into the layer
during the action of the ram.
The finer sizes on top will beat down between the larger aggregates, but care and judgment
must be exercised in order to prevent creating excessive voids in the specimen.
The finished top should be as free as possible from large aggregates.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 9
Calculations
Use the following equations to determine the volume, the percent water content, and the dry
density of each specimen.
Calculate the wet density of the compacted specimens, kg/m3 (lbs/ft3):
DWET = ( WT WM ) / V M
Where:
WT = mass of the mold and the compacted sample, kg (lb.)
WM = mass of the mold, kg (lb.)
VM = volume of the mold, m3 (ft3).
Calculate the percent water content:
WC = 100[( M W M D ) / M D ]
Where:
MW = wet mass of the sample, kg (lb.)
MD = dry mass of the sample, kg (lb.).
Calculate the dry density of the compacted specimens:
D DRY = 100 DWET / ( 100 + WC )
Where:
WC = water content of the compacted specimen, % (includes hygroscopic

moisture)
Calculate the zero air voids density:
DZAV = ( Specific Gravity 62.5 ) / { 1 + [ Specific Gravity (% MC / 100 )]}
Where the specific gravity is not known, a value of 2.65 may be used as an average value.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 10 Computer Program
Section 10
Computer Program
The following worksheet (TEX113) may be used to calculate.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 11 Test Record
Section 11
Test Record
Record test data on the 'M/D & Triaxial Test Worksheet,' Form 1176.
Graph
Plot the dry density against the percent of molding moisture on 'Plot of Sample MoistureDensity Curve.'
Figure 14-1. Plot of Sample Moisture-Density Curve.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 12 General Notes
Section 12
General Notes
The zero percent air void line can be used as an aid in drawing the moisture-density curve.
For materials containing more than approximately 10% fines, the wet leg of the moisturedensity curve generally parallels with the zero air void curve. Theoretically, the moisturedensity curve cannot plot to the right of the zero percent air void curve. If it does, there is an
error in specific gravity, in measurement, in calculation, in sample preparation, or in
plotting.
When determining the M/D curve for stabilized subgrade and base materials the following
options are recommended:
Recommended Amounts of Lime for Stabilization of Subgrades and Bases, in Test

Method "Tex-121-E, Soil-Lime Testing" or
'Determining Stabilization Ability of Lime by Soil pH' of Test Method "Tex-121-E,

Soil-Lime Testing."
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 13 Reporting Test Results
Section 13
Reporting Test Results
Report the:
Maximum Dry Density (DA) to the nearest kg/m3 (0.1 lb/ft3).
Optimum Water Content to the nearest 0.1%.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 14 Archived Versions
Section 14
Archived Versions
Archived versions of Test Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and
Moisture-density Relationship of Base Materials" are available through the following links:
Click on 113-0899 for the test procedure effective August 1999 through October 2004.
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 15
Tex-114-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and
Moisture-Density Relationship of Subgrade, Embankment
Soils, and Backfill Material
Contents:
Section 5 Part I, Measuring Moisture-Density Relationship of Subgrade and
Embankment Soils................................................................................................ 15-8
Section 6 Part II, Measuring Moisture-Density Relationship of Subgrade and
Embankment Soils.............................................................................................. 15-12
Section 7 Part III, Measuring Moisture-density Relationship of Cohesionless Backfill15-15
Section 8 Archived Versions ....................................................................................... 15-19
15-1
TxDOT 2/2005

Characteristics and Moisture-Density
Relationship of Subgrade, Embankment Soils,
and Backfill Material
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
Effective date: February 2005 (refer to 'Archived Versions' for earlier versions).
Use this test method to determine the relationship between water content and the dry unit
mass (density) of sub-grade and embankment materials.
Part I
Part I is a subgrade or embankment sample, 4 in. (101.6 mm) in diameter and 6 in. (152.4
mm) high, is molded in 4 layers, using a 5.5-lb. (2.5-kg) hammer dropped 25 times per layer
from a height of 12 in. (304.8 mm).
This part is intended for plastic, fine-grain soils, such as silts and clays (ML, MH, CL, and
CH classifications as determined by "Tex-142-E, Laboratory Classification of Soils for
Engineering Purposes").
Part II
Part II is a subgrade or embankment sample, 6 in. (152.4 mm) in diameter and 8 in. (203.2
mm) high, is molded in 4 layers using a 5.5-lb. (2.5-kg) hammer dropped 75 times per layer
from a height of 12 in. (304.8 mm).
This part is intended for plastic, coarse-grain soils such as sands and gravels with fines (GM,
GC, SM, and SC classifications as determined by "Tex-142-E, Laboratory Classification of
Soils for Engineering Purposes."
Part III
Part III is a cohesionless backfill (sand/silt) sample, 4 in. (101.6 mm) in diameter and 6 in.
(152.4 mm) in height, is molded in 4 layers, using a 10-lb. (4.54-kg) hammer dropped 61
times per layer from a height of 12 in. (304.8 mm). The test in Part III is performed on
prepared materials passing the 1/4-in. (6.3-mm) sieve.
This part is intended for clean, cohesionless sands used for MSE backfill (SW and SP
classifications as determined by "Tex-142-E, Laboratory Classification of Soils for
Engineering Purposes").
Follow "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density
Relationship of Base Materials," to determine moisture-density relationships of base
materials, coarse-grained materials containing particles larger than 7/8 in. (22.4 mm), and
treated subgrade and embankment materials.
15-2
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 1 Overview
15-3
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 2
Definitions
This method references the following terms and definitions:
Maximum Dry Density (Da). Maximum dry density is the maximum value obtained by
the compaction curve using the specified compactive effort.
Optimum Water Content (Wopt). Optimum water content is the water content at which
the soil can be compacted to the Da.
Compactive Effort (C.E.). Compactive effort is the total energy, expressed as footpounds per cubic inch (kilo-Newton-meters per cubic meter) used to compact the
specimen.
C.E. is calculated as follows:
Ht. of Drop ( ft or m) Wt. of Hammer (kN or lb) # Drops # Layers

Volume of Mold (m3 or in 3 )
This procedure requires, for Part I and Part II, 7.30 ft.-lb./in.3 (604 KN-m/m3) and,
for Part III, 32.36 ft.-lb./in.3 (2677 kN-m/m3), equivalent to ASTM "D 1557,
Modified Proctor."
15-4
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
Use the following apparatus:
automatic tamper (compaction) device with
base plate to hold 4 in. (101.6 mm) or 6 in. (152.4 mm) inside diameter (ID)
forming molds
a 5.5 lb. 0.02 lb. (2.5 kg 0.01 kg) sector-face rammer
a 10 0.02 lb. (4.55 0.01 kg) sector-face rammer
adjustable drop height
striking face of the rammer conforming to a 43 2 segment of a 2.9 0.1 in. (74
2.5 mm) radius circle
a rigid foundation, such as a concrete block with a mass of not less than 200 lb. (91
kg) on which the base plate of the tamper is secured. (An alternate foundation
support, such as a rigid stand or table, is allowed if the Da produced is within 2% of
that produced by an automatic tamper bolted to a concrete floor.)
rigid metal compaction mold, with 4 1/64 in. (101.6 0.4 mm) average ID and a height
of 6 0.0026 in. (152.4 0.7 mm) with removable collar, and/or a 6 in., +1/16 or -1/64
in. (152.6 mm, +1.6 or -0.4 mm) average ID and a height of 8-1/2 1/16 in. (215.9 1.6
mm) with removable collar.
metal stand with a set of standard spacer blocks and a micrometer dial assembly, with 2
in. (50 mm) travel, for determining height of specimens. Spacer blocks 1, 4, 6 and 11 in.
(25.4, 101.6, 152.4 and 279.4 mm) accurate to 0.001 in. (0.025 mm).
balance, with a minimum capacity of 35 lb. (15 kg), accurate and readable to 0.001 lb.
(0.5 g) or 0.1% of the test mass, whichever is greater
extra base plate secured on a rigid stand to hold the forming mold
hydraulic press to extrude molded specimens
drying oven, maintained at 230 9F (110 5C)
metal pans, wide and shallow for mixing and drying materials
circular porous stones, slightly less than 6 in. (152.4 mm) in diameter and 2 in. (51 mm)
high
supply of small tools including a 4 to 5-lb. (1.8 to 2.3-kg) rawhide hammer, level,
finishing tool and others
standard U.S. sieves in the following sizes:
1-3/4 in. (45 mm)
7/8 in. (22.4 mm)
15-5
TxDOT 2/2005

3/8 in. (9.5 mm)
No. 4 (4.75 mm).
15-6
Section 3 Apparatus
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 4
Calibrate equipment according to "Tex-198-E, Minimum Standards for Acceptance of a
Laboratory for Soils and Flexible Base Testing." In addition, calibrate equipment before
initial use, after repair, or after any occurrence that might affect the test results.
Follow the steps outlined in 'Calibrating Equipment' in "Tex-113-E, Laboratory
Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials."
15-7
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 5 Part I, Measuring Moisture-Density

Relationship of Subgrade and Embankment Soils
Section 5
Part I, Measuring Moisture-Density Relationship of Subgrade and
Embankment Soils
Part I uses a 4-in. (102 mm) ID mold and applies only to soils with:
100% passing the 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) sieve
80% passing the 1/4 in. (6.3 mm) sieve
ML, MH, CL, and CH soil classification as determined by "Tex-142-E, Laboratory

Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes."
Preparing Sample
Tests' in "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing." Do not use
materials that have been previously laboratory compacted.
Procedure
The following table lists the steps to measure the moisture-density relationship of subgrade
and embankment soils.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Measuring Moisture-Density Relationship of Subgrade and Embankment Soils

Action
Determine the % hygroscopic moisture of a representative sample of prepared material according
to "Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials."
Separate sample on 7/8 in. (22.4 mm), 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), and 1/4 in. (6.3 mm) sieves and
determine particle size distribution.
Estimate the mass of air-dried material that will fill the mold when wetted and compacted.
Using this estimated mass, and the percentages of the various sizes of particles obtained in Step 2,
compute the cumulative masses of each size to combine to make a specimen.
Using the masses calculated in Step 3, recombine at least 4 specimens of approximately 7.7 lb.
(3.5 kg) each.
Estimate the optimum % moisture required to attain maximum density.
NOTE: The plastic limit is a good indicator of optimum moisture content, typically within 2%, or
3-4% higher for PI >35 material.
Start the M-D curve using a sample with a moisture content of 2% below the estimated
optimum moisture content.
For soils with a low to moderate plasticity index (PI < 35), adjust the moisture content of the
remaining samples in approximately 2% increments to attain 2 samples above and 2 samples
below the optimum moisture content.
For soils with high plasticity index (PI 35), the moisture content may be adjusted in 4%
increments to attain 2 samples above and 2 samples below the optimum moisture. (See NOTE
1.)
Calculate the mass of the water to be added based on the air-dry mass of the material.
15-8
TxDOT 2/2005

Step
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32


Action
Weigh out this amount of water into a tared sprinkling jar.
Sprinkle water onto the soil during mixing, in increments.
Thoroughly mix each specimen to ensure even distribution of water throughout specimen.
Cover the mixed sample and allow sample to stand and cure for at least 12 hr. before
compacting.
When the PI is less than 12, the curing time may be reduced to not less than 3 hr.
Cure split or referee samples for the full 12 hr.
Assemble and secure the mold and collar to the base plate.
Thoroughly remix the cured sample.
Obtain approximately 1 lb. (453.6 g) of the sample and determine water content as described in
'Calculations' in "Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials."
Place loose soil into the mold and spread into a layer of uniform thickness.
Before compaction, use hand tools to lightly tamp the soil until it is not fluffy or loose.
Separate the material in the pan into 4 equal portions. Each portion must contain representative
quantities of all sizes and adequate material to compact four 1.5-in. (38-mm) layers.
For each layer, dump the material into the mold. Spade and level the layer of material with a
spatula to fill cavities around the edge and to ensure an even distribution of material in each layer
before compacting. Do not push this layer down by hand or other means than that described
above.
Compact each layer using 25 per lift with a drop height of 12 in. (304.88 mm).
Use the soil mass and compacted thickness of the first lift to adjust the mass and thickness of the
subsequent lifts.
Upon completion of compacting each of the first 3 lifts, use a knife or other convenient tool to
scarify the surface to a depth of 1/4 in. (6.3 mm). Dislodge uncompacted soils that extend above
the compacted surface.
Upon completion of the fourth lift, the compacted specimen should extend above the top, but by
no more than 1/4 in. (6.3 mm). Discard the compacted specimen if it does not extend above the
top of the mold at any point.
After compaction of the last lift, remove the collar and use a straight edge or draw knife to
carefully trim the compacted specimen even with the top of the mold.
Invert the mold and trim the bottom of the specimen even with the bottom of the mold.
Use trimmed soil from the specimen to fill holes on the trimmed surfaces. Trim again as needed
to ensure a smooth, level surface.
Determine and record the mass of the specimen and mold as WT to the nearest 0.001 lb. (0.5 g)
under 'Calculations' in "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and MoistureDensity Relationship of Base Materials."
Record the data on the Form 1175, M/D & Triaxial Worksheet.'
Use the hydraulic jack press to remove the specimen from the mold.
Place the compacted specimen and identification tag into a large pan and break into several
pieces.
Obtain the mass of the drying pan and wet sample and record to 0.001 lb. (0.5 g).
Place the specimen in an oven at a temperature of 230 9F (110 5C) and dry to constant
weight.
NOTE: Use a 140 9F (60 5C) oven for ML or MH soils (as determined by "Tex-145-E,
Determining Sulfate Content in Soils-Colorimeter Method").
15-9
TxDOT 2/2005

Step
33
34


Action
Record the mass of the oven-dried material to the nearest 0.001 lb. (0.5 g) under 'Calculations'
"Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base
Materials."
Repeat steps 8-33 for all samples.
NOTE 1: After compacting the first 2 or 3 specimens, the initial M-D curve can be
constructed to aid in evaluation of the shape of the curve. If necessary, adjust the water
content of the other prepared samples by adding additional water or air-drying to obtain
a well-defined compaction curve.
Calculations
Use the equations in the 'Calculations' section of "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials."
Graphs
Plot the molding moisture and dry density curve for Da as shown in the 'Plot of Sample
Moisture-density Curve.'
MOISTURE-DENSITY CURVE
96
94
92
DRY DENSITY (pcf)
90
88
86
84
82
80
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
MOISTURE CONTENT (%)
Figure 15-1. Plot of Sample Moisture-density Curve.
TxDOT 2/2005



Report:
Da to the nearest 0.1 lbs/ft3 (1 kg/m3)
Wopt to the nearest 0.1 %.
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 6 Part II, Measuring Moisture-Density

Section 6
Part II, Measuring Moisture-Density Relationship of Subgrade and
Embankment Soils
Part II uses a 6-in. (152.4-mm) diameter mold and applies only to soils with:
100% passing the 7/8-in. (22.4-mm) sieve
GM, GC, SM, or SC soil classifications as described by "Tex-142-E, Laboratory

Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes."
Use "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density

Relationship of Base" for moisture-density curve determination of base materials and
coarse-grained materials containing particles larger than 7/8 in. (22.4 mm).
Preparing Sample
Secure a representative sample of material and prepare approximately 132 lb. (60 kg) of
moist soil as described in 'Part II, Preparing Samples for Compaction and Triaxial Tests,' of
Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing," for
moisture-density test. Do not reuse soil that has been previously laboratory compacted.
Procedure
The table below lists the steps required to measure the moisture-density relationship of
subgrade and embankment soils.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6

Action
Determine the % hygroscopic moisture of a representative sample of prepared material according
to "Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials."
Separate sample on 7/8-in. (22.4-mm), 3/8-in. (9.5 mm) and 1/4-in. (6.3 mm) sieves, and
determine the particle size distribution.
Estimate the mass of air-dried material that will fill the mold when wetted and compacted.
Using this estimated mass and the percentages of the various sizes of particles obtained in Step 2,
compute the cumulative masses of each size to combine to make a specimen.
Using the masses calculated in Step 3, recombine at least 4 specimens of approximately 22 lb. (10
kg) each.
Estimate the optimum % moisture required to attain maximum density.
NOTE: The plastic limit is a good indicator of optimum moisture content, typically within 2%, or
3-4% higher for PI >35 material.
Start the M-D curve using a sample with a moisture content of 2% below the estimated
optimum moisture content.
For soils with a low to moderate plasticity index (PI < 35), adjust the moisture content of the
remaining samples in approximately 2% increments to attain 2 samples above and 2 samples
TxDOT 2/2005

Step
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29


Action
below the optimum moisture content.
For soils with high plasticity index (PI 35), the moisture content may be adjusted in 4%
increments to attain 2 samples above and 2 samples below the optimum moisture. (See NOTE
1.)
Calculate the mass of the water to be added based on the air-dry mass of the material.
Weigh the required mass of water into a tared sprinkling jar.
Sprinkle water onto the soil during mixing, in increments.
Thoroughly mix each specimen to ensure an even distribution of water.
Cover the mixed sample and allow sample to stand and cure for at least 12 hr. before
compacting.
When the PI is less than 12, the curing time may be reduced to not less than 3 hr.
Cure split or referee samples for the full 12 hr.
Assemble and secure the mold and collar to the base plate.
Thoroughly remix the cured sample.
Obtain approximately 1 lb. (453.6 kg) of the sample and determine water content as described in
'Calculations' in "Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials."
Place loose soil into the mold and spread into a layer of uniform thickness.
Use hand tools to lightly tamp the soil until it is not fluffy or loose.
Separate the material in the pan into 4 equal portions. Each portion must contain representative
quantities of all sizes and adequate material to compact four 2-in. (50-mm) layers.
spatula to fill cavities around the edge and to ensure an even distribution of material in each layer
before compacting. Do not push this layer down by hand or other means than that described
above.
Compact each layer using 75 per lift with a drop height of 12 in. (304.88 mm).
Use the soil mass and compacted thickness of the first lift to adjust the mass and thickness of the
subsequent lifts.
Upon completion of compacting each of the first 3 lifts, use a knife or other convenient tool to
scarify the surface and dislodge the uncompacted soils that extend above the compacted surface.
Use the finishing tools as outlined in "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and
Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials," and 4 medium-firm blows of the 4 to 5 lb.
(1.818 to 2.273 kg) rawhide hammer to level and finish the fourth lift.
Using the height measuring stand, measure and record the specimen height to the nearest 0.001
in. (0.025 mm).
The height of the finished specimen should be 8 1/4 in. (2036.3 mm).
Discard the specimen if it is too short or too tall.
See NOTE 2.
Determine and record the mass of the specimen and mold as WT to the nearest 0.001 lb. (0.5 g),
under 'Calculations' in "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction characteristics and Moisture-Density
Relationship of Base Materials."
Record the data on the Form 1176, M/D & Triaxial Worksheet.
Use the hydraulic jack press to remove the specimen from the mold.
pieces.
TxDOT 2/2005

Step
30
31
32


Action
Place the specimen in an oven at a temperature of 230 9F (110 5C) and dry to constant
weight.
NOTE: Use a 140 9F (60 5C) oven for ML or MH soils (as determined by "Tex-142-E,
Laboratory Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes") or soils with measurable
sulfates (as determined by "Tex-145-E, Determining Sulfate Content in Soils-Colorimeter
Method").
"Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base
Materials."
Repeat steps 8-31 for all samples.
NOTE 2: To adjust the molded height of specimen in Step 21 (above), calculate as follows:
Dry Weight of Specimen = ( Dry Weight of Specimen 8" ) / Height of Specimen
Calculations
Use the equations under 'Calculations' in "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction
Graphs
Plot the molding moisture vs. the dry density curve for Da shown
'Plot of Sample Moisture-density Curve.'
Report test results as described in 'Part I, Measuring Compaction Characteristics of
Subgrade and Embankment Soils.'
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 7 Part III, Measuring Moisture-density

Relationship of Cohesionless Backfill
Section 7
Part III, Measuring Moisture-density Relationship of Cohesionless Backfill
Part III uses a 4-in. (102-mm) ID mold and applies only to cohesionless soils and backfills
as described below:
50% passing the No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve
25% passing the No. 200 (75-mm) sieve
SW SP classification.
Preparing Samples
Tests' in "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing." Do not use
materials that have been previously laboratory compacted.
The following table lists the steps necessary to determine the relationship between water
content and the dry unit mass (density) of backfill and cohesionless materials.
Step
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Measuring15 Moisture-Density Relationship of Cohesionless Backfill

Action
Perform Steps 1 through 15, except for Step 12, in 'Part I, Measuring Moisture-Density
Relationship of Subgrade and Embankment Soils.'
Mix the material thoroughly and separate into 4 equal portions. Each portion must contain
representative quantities of all sizes and contain enough material to compact four 1.5-in. (38mm) layers.
spatula to fill cavities around the edge and to ensure an even distribution of material in each
layer before compacting. Do not push this layer down by hand or other means than that
described above.
Compact each layer by applying 61 ram blows with a 10-lb. (4.55-kg.) rammer from a height of
12 in. (457.2 mm).
Stop the compactor as frequently as necessary to clean the ram face.
Use the soil mass and compacted thickness of the first layer to adjust the mass and thickness of
the subsequent layers.
Each layer thickness should be approximately equal in height and mass. All material should be
molded.
Upon completion of the fourth lift, the compacted specimen should extend above the top, but by
no more than 1/4 in. (6.3 mm). Discard the compacted specimen if it does not extend above the
top of the mold at any point.
Remove the collar and use a straight edge or draw knife to carefully trim the compacted
specimen even with the top of the mold.
Use trimmed material from the specimen to fill holes on the trimmed surfaces. Trim again, as
needed to ensure a smooth, level surface.
TxDOT 2/2005

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Determine and record the mass of the specimen and mold as WT to the nearest 0.001 lb. (0.5 g)
under 'Calculations' in "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and MoistureDensity Relationship of Base Materials."
Record the data on Form 1176, M/D & Triaxial Worksheet.
Carefully center the specimen over a porous stone and place in the hydraulic press to extrude the
specimen from the mold.
pieces.
Place the drying pan with wet material in an oven at a temperature of 230F (110C) and dry to
constant weight.
in Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base
Materials."
Repeat Steps 2-17 for all samples.
Calculations
Use the equations under 'Calculations' in "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction
Graphs
Plot the molding moisture vs. the dry density curve for Da as shown in
'Plot of Sample Moisture-density Curve.'
Report test results as described in 'Part I, Measuring Compaction Characteristics of
Subgrade and Embankment Soils.'
Family of Curves
The materials used for subgrade and embankment construction are variable in color, texture,
and moisture-density relationship.
To adequately control the compaction and field densities of these materials, it is necessary to
have several compaction curves prepared and plotted on the same graph to assist the
inspector to make a sound judgment as to which curve is representative of the material being
tested for field density.
TxDOT 2/2005


The family of compaction curves shown in

'Family of Curves & One-Point Control (Example)' illustrates that, as the material's
plasticity and fineness increase, the Da will decrease with a corresponding increase in Wopt.
Also, the wet leg of the compaction curve generally parallel with the 0% air void line.
To properly correlate the soil properties to a compaction curve, the soil properties presented
in the 'Soil Properties, Family of Curves, & One-Point Control' table should be provided
along with the family of compaction curves.
The following tables lists the soil properties, family of curves, and one point control table as
shown in 'Family of Curves & One-Point Control (Example).'
Soil Properties, Family of Curves, & One-Point Control
Curve
Max. Dry
Optimum Liquid PI
Wet Gradation, % Retained
No. Density kg/m3
Water
Limit
(pcf)
Content %
%
22.4 mm
9.5 mm
4.75 mm
(7/8 in.)
(3/8 in.)
(No.4)
1
93.6 (1499.5)
22.0
61
43
0
0
0
2
96.6 (1547.5)
20.4
48
30
0
0
1.4
3
100.3 (1606.8)
18.8
44
27
0
0
2.5
4
104.6 (1675.7)
17.4
38
21
0
0
4.3
Material
Description
dark brown clay

brown Clay
brown Clay
lt. brown clay
One Point Control

In the event the material being tested for field density does not match the description and
properties of any of the materials from the family of compaction curves, the one-point
control method may be used to derive an adjusted Da and Wopt by:
air drying the field sample to a water content near the plastic limit of the material
molding one compaction specimen
using the one-point moisture-density data to construct a compaction curve which

mimics the shape of the family of curves.
The wet leg of the compaction curve is well defined by the 0% air void line; therefore, it is
essential to air-dry the field sample to a water content near the plastic limit of the material
and provide better definition of the dry side of the curve. An example of the one-point
control method is shown on 'Family of Curves & One-Point Control (Example).'
TxDOT 2/2005


110
108
106
104
DRY DENSITY, pcf
102
100
One Point
Moisture-Density
98
96
94
92
90
88
86
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
MOISTURE CONTENT, %
FAMILY OF CURVES & ONE POINT CONTROL (EXAMPLE)
Figure. 15-2. Family of Curves & One-Point Control (Example).
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 8
Archived Versions
Archived versions of "Tex-114-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and MoistureDensity Relationship of Subgrade and Embankment Soils" are available through the
following links:
Click on 114-0899 for the test procedure effective August 1999 through January 2005.
TxDOT 2/2005
Chapter 16
Tex-115-E, Field Method for Determining In-Place Density
of Soils and Base Materials
Contents:
Section 2 Test Record Forms......................................................................................... 16-3
Section 3 Part I, Nuclear Gauge Method ....................................................................... 16-4
Section 4 Part II, Sand-Cone Method ............................................................................ 16-7
Section 5 Part III, Volumeter Method ......................................................................... 16-15
16-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 16 Tex-115-E, Field Method for

Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base
Materials
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the density of untreated and treated soil and granular material
compacted in the roadway or in the natural state, as exists in a cut section and borrow source
prior to excavation.
The principal use of the in-place density is to determine the degree of compaction or
percentage of the density obtained by the method outlined in test methods "Tex-113-E,
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics And Moisture-Density Relationship of Base
Materials" and "Tex-114-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density
Relationship of Subgrade & Embankment Soils."
The term "soils" used in this procedure includes all base materials, as well as fine grain soils.
16-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
Section 2 Test Record Forms
Section 2
Test Record Forms
Field Density Data Card.
16-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
Section 3 Part I, Nuclear Gauge Method
Section 3
Part I, Nuclear Gauge Method
Apparatus
nuclear testing gauge capable of making density and moisture determinations
portable reference standard
calibration curves for the nuclear gauge
scraper plate and drill rod guide
drill rod and driver or hammer
shovel, sieve, trowel or straightedge and miscellaneous hand tools
gauge logbook.
Standardizing Equipment
Standardize equipment to a reference standard at the start of each day's use and when test
measurements are suspect.
Set the standardizing block 1.5 m (5 ft.) from any object and 7.62 m (25 ft.) from any
other nuclear gauge.
Place the gauge on the standardizing block in the closed (safe) mode and take four (4)
one-minute density counts.
Repeat the four one-minute counts for moisture in the back-scatter position.
Record in the gauge logbook.
When the nuclear gauge is equipped with electronic circuitry capable of automatically
averaging four one-minute density and moisture standard counts simultaneously, place
the gauge on the standardizing block in the closed (safe) mode and take the averages on
the field form and in the gauge logbook.
NOTE: Any field form suitable for use with the gauge being used is acceptable. For
additional gauge operation information not covered in this paragraph, follow
instructions given in the manufacturer's manual.
NOTE: Each individual count (taken using the appropriate time base) must be within the
statistical tolerance of:
1.96 ( average count rate )1/ 2
16-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
Since some gauges display one or two digits less than the gauge is actually counting, the
count on those gauges should be multiplied by either 10 or 100 before calculating the
tolerance. This tolerance is then divided by 10 or 100 to determine the statistical tolerance.
Example of Individual Count and Its Statistical Tolerance
Count/Time Base
Tolerance
23500
300
2350(0)
30
235(00)
3
Procedure
The following table lists the steps necessary to determine in-place density of soils and base
materials using the nuclear gauge.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Determining In-Place Density Using Nuclear Gauge

Action
Prepare the test area by creating a surface plane free of loose material and deformations, that
extends laterally not less than 152 mm (6 in.) beyond the gauge housing.
Fill in minor depressions with sand or native fines.
Proper test site preparation is closely related to testing accuracy.
Every effort should be made to smooth the site as much as possible.
Make a hole using the pin and guide plate.
Extract the pin by hand or with a pin puller or pipe wrench.
The depth of hole shall be 51 mm (2 in.) greater than the transmission depth being used.
This hole must be as close as possible to 90 from the plane of the testing surface.
If the plate is rotated slightly around the pin and the plate does not make contact with the
ground, or if it appears that the hole is crooked, make a new hole.
Place the nuclear gauge on the prepared surface so that the bottom of the gauge is firmly seated in
full contact with the soil or base material.
Insert the rod into the hole to the predetermined depth.
Adjust the gauge so that the rod is firmly against the side of the hole that is nearest to the source or
detector tube(s).
After seating the probe, record the number of readings required for the particular instrument being
used.
Rotate the gauge 90 and repeat. (Rotating gauge 90 is optional.)
Calculations
Determine the wet density and moisture by dividing the field counts by the standard counts
and use the appropriate calibration curves.
On programmable models the density and moisture may be read directly.
16-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials

Report dry density to the nearest 1 kg/m3 (0.1 lb/ft3) and moisture to the nearest 0.1%.
Notes
This procedure is intended to be a general guide method.
The instruction manual furnished with a particular gauge should be followed for
specific operation of that gauge. This is essential due to the fact that several different
models and different brands are in standard use by TxDOT.
Check nuclear density gauges for density at regular time intervals by taking readings
using the limestone and granite blocks located in each district. Variation in readings will
indicate a possible problem with the gauge. The test position of the gauge on the block
and the location of the blocks should be as near the same as practical each time.
If moisture results obtained by the nuclear gauge are suspect, use Test Method
"Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials," to determine the correct
moisture content of the soil.
Use of these gauges must be according to all applicable State and Federal rules and
regulations, and the terms of the radioactive materials license issued to TxDOT.
Chemical composition of the materials tested may affect the test results of the gauge.
Where the material contains chemically bound water (i.e., gypsum) and other hydrogen
atoms, such as in asphalt, iron ore, coal, mica and vegetation, use of nuclear gauges may
not provide accurate results.
When used for trench measurements or near obstructions such as abutments, the
instructions provided in the gauge manual should be carefully followed.
16-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
Section 4 Part II, Sand-Cone Method
Section 4
Part II, Sand-Cone Method
Significance and Use
This method is applicable for soils without appreciable amounts of rock or coarse materials
in excess of 38 mm (1.5 in.) in diameter, natural soil deposits, aggregates, soil mixtures and
other similar material, and for undisturbed (or in-situ) soils, provided natural void or pore
openings in the soil are small enough to prevent sand used in the test from entering the
voids.
This test method is used to determine the density of compacted soils placed during
construction of earth embankments, road fill, and structural backfill. It is often used as a
basis of acceptance for soils compacted to a specified density or percentage of a maximum
density determined by test methods "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
And Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials" and "Tex-114-E, Laboratory
Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Subgrade & Embankment
Soils."
The soil or other materials being tested should have sufficient cohesion or particle attraction
to maintain stable sides on a small hole or excavation, and be firm enough to withstand the
minor pressures exerted in digging the hole and placing the apparatus over it, without
deforming or sloughing.
NOTE: This test method is not suitable for:
organic, saturated, or highly plastic soils that would deform or compress during the
excavation of the test hole
soils consisting of unbound granular materials that will not maintain stable sides in the
test hole
granular soils having high void ratios.
The use of this method is generally limited to soils in an unsaturated condition.
It is not recommended for soils that are soft or friable (crumble easily) or in a moisture
condition such that water seeps into the hand excavated hole.
The accuracy of this test may be affected for soils that deform easily or that undergo a
volume change in the excavated hole from vibration, or from standing or walking near
hole during test.
NOTE: When testing in soft conditions or in soils near saturation, volume changes may
occur in the excavated hole.
16-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
Apparatus
attachable jar, or other sand container having a volume capacity in excess of that
required to fill the test hole and apparatus during the test
metal base plate or template with a flange center hole cast or machined to receive the
large funnel (cone) of the appliance described above
The base plate may be larger than the funnel (sand-cone).
The plate will be flat on the bottom and have sufficient thickness or stiffness to be
rigid.
Plates with raised edges, ridges, ribs, or other stiffeners or approximately 10 to 13

mm (.375 to 0.5 in.) high may be used.
detachable appliance consisting of a cylindrical valve with an orifice approximately 13

mm (0.5 in.) in diameter, attached to a metal funnel and sand container on one end, and
a large metal funnel and sand container on the other end
The valve will have stops to prevent rotating past the completely open or
completely closed position.
The appliance will be constructed of metal sufficiently rigid to prevent distortion or

volume changes in the cone.
The walls of the cone will form an angle of approximately 60 with the base to
allow uniform filling with sand.
balance, with a minimum capacity of 20 kg (50 lb.) and a readability of 1 g, accurate to

5 g or 1% of the test load, whichever is greater
drying equipment, as specified in Test Method "Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture

Content in Soil Materials"
calibration container of known volume, approximately the same size and allowing sand
to fall approximately the same distance as the hole excavated during a field test
miscellaneous equipment, including:
a knife
small pick
chisel
small trowel
screwdriver or spoons
large nails or spike
metal straightedge about 51 mm (2 in.) wide and 1.5 times the length of the
calibration container
buckets with lids
plastic-lined cloth sacks, or other suitable containers
16-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
small paint brush
calculator
notebook or test forms, etc.
Materials
Sand that must be clean, dry, and uniform in density and grading, uncemented, durable,
and free-flowing.
Any gradation may be used that has a coefficient of uniformity (CU = D60 / D10)
less than 2.0, a maximum particle size passing the 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve and less
than 3% by mass passing the 250 m (No. 60) sieve.
Uniformly graded sand is needed to prevent segregation during handling, storage,

and use.
Sand free of fines and fine sand particles is required to prevent significant bulkdensity changes with normal daily changes in atmospheric humidity.
Sand comprised of durable, natural sub-rounded, or rounded particles may not be

free-flowing, a condition that can cause bridging resulting in inaccurate density
determinations.
In selecting sand from a potential source, make a gradation and five separate bulkdensity determinations according to the procedure in
'Calibrating Density Sand Apparatus' on each container or bag of sand.
The bulk-density variation between any one determination must not be greater than
1% of the average.
Before using sand in density determinations, it should be dried, then allowed to

reach an air-dried state in the general location where it is to be used.
Sand shall not be re-used without removing contaminants (see NOTE 3).
Make bulk-density tests of the sand at least every 14 days, after any significant changes
in atmospheric conditions, before reusing, and before use of a new batch from a
previously proven supplier (see NOTE 4).
NOTE 1: Some manufactured (crushed) sands, such as blasting sand, have been successfully
used with good reproducibility. The reproducibility of test results using singular sand
should be checked under laboratory-controlled testing situations before selecting an
angular sand.
NOTE 2: Many organizations have found it beneficial to store sands in moisture-resistant
containers. Sand should be stored in dry areas protected from weather. The use of a
lighted bulb or other heat source in, or adjacent to, the storage containers has also been
found to be beneficial in areas of high humidity.
NOTE 3: As a general rule, reclaiming sand after testing is not desirable.
16-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
NOTE 4: Most sands have a tendency to absorb moisture from the atmosphere. A very small
amount of absorbed moisture can make a substantial difference in bulk-density. In areas
of high humidity, or where the humidity changes frequently, the bulk-density may need
to be determined more often than the 14 day maximum interval indicated. The need for
more frequent checks can be determined by comparing the results of different bulkdensity tests on the same sand made in the same conditions of use over a period of time.
Calibrating Sand-Cone Apparatus
Method A
Since the mass of the sand contained in the apparatus funnel and base plate is dependent on
the bulk density of the sand, if Method A is used, it must be repeated whenever the bulkdensity of the sand changes.
The following table lists the steps necessary to calibrate the sand-cone apparatus according
to Method A.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Calibrating Sand-Cone Apparatus (Method A)

Action
Fill the apparatus with sand that is dried and conditioned to the state anticipated during use
in testing.
Determine the mass of the apparatus filled with sand, kg (lb.)
Place the base plate on a clean, level, plane surface.
Invert the container/apparatus and seat the funnel in the flange center hole in the base plate.
Mark and identify the apparatus and base plate so that the same apparatus and plate can be
matched and reseated in the same position during testing.
Open the valve fully until the sand flow stops, making sure the apparatus, base plate, or
plane surface are not jarred or vibrated before the valve is closed.
Close the valve sharply, remove the apparatus and determine the mass of the apparatus and
remaining sand.
Calculate the mass of sand used to fill the funnel and base plate as the difference between
initial and final mass.
Repeat the procedure a minimum of three times. The maximum variation between any one
determination and the average may not exceed 1%.
Use the average of the three determinations for this value in the test calculations.
Method B (Optional)
The following table lists the steps necessary to calibrate the sand-cone apparatus according
to Method B.
Step
1
2
Calibrating Sand-Cone Apparatus (Method B)

Action
Determine the mass of sand required to fill the apparatus funnel and base plate according to
steps 1 through 6 of 'Calibrating Sand-Cone Apparatus (Method A).'
Calculate the volume of the funnel and base plate by dividing the bulk-density of the sand
(as determined in 'Calibrating Density Sand Apparatus' ) by the mass of sand found in Step
6 of 'Calibrating Sand-Cone Apparatus (Method A).'
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
3
4
Perform a minimum of three determinations and calculate an average value.

The maximum volume variation between any one determination and the average may not
exceed 1%.
Use the average of the values when performing test calculations.
Calibrating Density Sand Apparatus
Method A
The following table lists the steps necessary to calibrate the density sand apparatus
according to Method A.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Calibrating Density Sand Apparatus (Method A)

Action
Fill the apparatus with sand conditioned to the same state anticipated during use.
Determine and record the mass of the calibration container when empty.
When calibration container has the same diameter as the flange hole in the base plate, invert
and center the sand filled apparatus and base plate on the calibration container.
Fully open the valve and allow the sand to fill the container.
When the sand flow stops, close the valve.
Determine the mass of the apparatus and remaining sand.
Calculate the net mass of sand in the calibration container by subtracting the mass of sand
contained in the cone and base plate (as determined in 'Calibrating Sand Cone Apparatus')
and record.
Method B
The following table lists the steps necessary to calibrate the density sand apparatus
according to Method B.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Calibrating Density Sand Apparatus (Method B)

Action
Fill the apparatus with sand conditioned to the same state anticipated during use.
Determine and record the mass of the calibration container when empty.
Invert and support the apparatus over the calibration container so that the sand falls
approximately the same distance and location as in a field test, and fully open valve.
Fill the container until it just overflows and close the valve.
Clean any sand from outside of the container.
Determine the mass of container and sand.
Record the net mass of the sand by subtracting the mass of the empty container.
Perform at least three bulk-density determinations.
Any one determination and the average will not exceed 1% in difference.
Repeated determinations not meeting these requirements indicate non-uniform sand density,
and the sand source should be re-evaluated for suitability.
The average value obtained is to be used in the test calculations.
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
Calculations
Use the following calculation to determine the bulk-density of the sand:
1 = M 5 / V1
Where:
M5 = mass of the sand to fill the calibration container, kg (lb.)
V1 = volume of the calibration container, m3 (ft3).
Procedure
The following steps determine Sand Cone in-place density.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Determining Sand Cone In-Place Density

Action
Select a location/elevation that is representative of the area to be tested.
Inspect cone apparatus for damage, free rotation of valve, and properly matched baseplate.
Fill the cone container with conditioned sand for which the bulk-density has been determined
according to 'Calibrating Density Sand Apparatus.'
Determine the total mass, M2 as shown under 'Calculations.'
Prepare the surface of the location to be tested so that it is a level plane.
The base plate may be used as a tool for striking off the surface to a smooth level plane.
Seat the base plate on the plane surface, making sure there is contact with the ground surface around
the edge of the flange center hole.
In soils where leveling is not successful, or surface voids remain, the volume horizontally bounded by
the funnel, plate and ground surface must be determined by a preliminary test.
Fill the space with sand from the apparatus.
Determine the mass of sand used to fill the space.
Refill the apparatus.
Determine a new initial mass of apparatus and sand before proceeding with the test.
After this measurement is completed, carefully brush the sand from the prepared surface.
Dig the test hole through the center hole in the base plate, being careful to avoid disturbing or
deforming the soil that will bound the hole.
Test hole volumes are to be as large as practical to minimize errors and will in no case be smaller than
the volumes indicated in the 'Minimum Test Hole Volumes and Minimum Moisture Content Samples
Based on Maximum Size of Particle' table for the maximum size of soil particle removed from the test
hole.
The sides of the hole should slope slightly inward and the bottom should be reasonably flat or
concave.
The hole should be kept as free as possible of pockets, overhangs, and sharp obtrusions since these
effect the accuracy of the test.
Soils that are essentially granular require extreme care and may require digging a conical shaped test
hole.
Place all excavated soil, and any soil loosened during digging, in a moisture tight container that is
marked to identify the test number.
Take care to avoid losing any materials.
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
Step
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Determining Sand Cone In-Place Density

Action
Protect this material from any loss of moisture until the mass has been determined and a specimen has
been obtained for a water content determination.
Clean flange of base plate hole, invert sand-cone apparatus and seat sand-cone funnel into flange hole
at the same position as marked during calibration (see 'Calibrating Sand Cone Apparatus' ).
Eliminate or minimize vibrations in test area by personnel or equipment.
Open valve and allow sand to fill hole, funnel, and base plate.
Take care to avoid jarring or vibrating apparatus while sand is running.
When sand stops flowing, close valve.
Determine mass of apparatus with remaining sand, record, and calculate mass of sand used.
Determine and record the mass of the moist material that was removed from the test hole.
When oversized material corrections are required, determine the mass of the oversized material on the
appropriate sieve and record, taking care to avoid moisture losses.
Mix the material thoroughly, and either obtain a representative specimen for determining water
content or use the entire sample.
Determine the water content according to 'Calculations' of Test Method "Tex-103-E, Determining
Moisture Content in Soil Materials."
NOTE: Water content specimens must be selected to represent all material obtained from the
test hole, and their minimum mass must provide water content values accurate to 1.0%.
Minimum Test Hole Volumes and Minimum Moisture Content Samples Based on Maximum
Size of Particle
Maximum Particle Size
Minimum Test Hole Minimum Test Hole Minimum Moisture
Volume, m3
Volume, ft3
Content Sample, g
No. 4 Sieve (4.75 mm)
0.0007
0.025
100
1/2 in. (12.5 mm)
0.0014
0.050
300
1 in. (25 mm)
0.0021
0.075
500
2 in. (50 mm)
0.0028
0.100
1000
Calculations
Use the following equations to determine the volume of the test hole, the dry mass of the
material, in-place wet density, in-place dry density, and dry unit weight.
Calculate the volume of the test hole (V):
V = ( M 1 M 2 ) / 1 , m 3 ( ft 3 )
Where:
M1 = mass of the sand used to fill the test hole, funnel and base plate, kg (lb.)
M2 = mass of the sand used to fill the funnel and base plate (from calibration of
sand-cone apparatus), kg (lb.)
1 = bulk density of the sand, kg/m3 (lb/ft3).
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
Calculate the dry mass of the material (M4) removed from the test hole:
M 4 = 10 [ M 3 / ( w + 100 )], kg ( lb. )
Where:
w = water content of the material removed from the test hole, %
M3 = moist mass of the material removed from the test hole, kg (lb.).
Calculate the in-place wet density (m)of the tested material removed from the hole:
m = M 3 / V , kg / m 3 ( lb / ft 3 )
Calculate the in-place dry density (D) of the tested material removed from the hole:
D = M 4 / V , kg / m 3 ( lb / ft 3 )
It may be desired to express the in-place density as a percentage of some other density, for
example, the laboratory densities. This relationship can be determined by dividing the inplace density by the laboratory density and multiplying by 100.
Report density to nearest 1 kg/m3 (0.1 lb/ft3) and moisture content to the nearest 0.1%.
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
Section 5 Part III, Volumeter Method
Section 5
Part III, Volumeter Method
Apparatus
volumeter, a calibrated metal chamber mounted between a top and bottom assembly
The base plate has an opening designed to accept a rubber membrane which fits
over the base insert.
The base is fastened to the bottom assembly by means of thumbscrews.
A pump provides pressure to fill the rubber membrane or vacuum to remove the
water.
These operations are controlled by a four-way valve.
The compound gauge indicates the kilopascals (pounds) of pressure (or inches of
mercury) applied.
A transparent gauge tube and graduated metal tape connected through the upper
and lower base assembly measures the quantity of water used, which is the volume
of the material removed.
A level is attached to the upper assembly.
equipment for digging holes, such as post hole auger, soil auger, density-in-place
digging tools
buckets, 4 L (1 gal.), with lids, or plastic bags
drying pans
drying oven, with temperature maintained at 110 5 C (230 2 F)
balance, with a minimum capacity of 15 kg (33 lbs.), and an accuracy of at least 0.5 g or
0.1% of the test load, whichever is greatest.
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
Preparing the Volumeter

Use the operating manual furnished with each volumeter for complete description of parts,
how to disassemble and reassemble the device, and general information about the care and
use of the instrument.
The following table lists the steps necessary to prepare the volumeter for use.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Preparing the Volumeter

Action
Depress the pump handle into "hold" position to interlock the control valve and to prevent the water
from entering the pump or escaping from the volumeter.
Invert volumeter and set on top six legs.
Loosen thumbscrews and remove base plate.
Carefully center base insert.
Use clean tap or deionized water and fill the metal chamber to within 6.5 mm (0.25 in.) of the top
of the inverted lower base.
Remove the protective talc from a rubber membrane and fold the open end inside itself to obtain a
length approximately 25 mm (1 in.) longer than the depth of hole to measure.
Examine base quad ring for twists and check surfaces of base and base plate for grit.
Place base on volumeter with flat side out; align holes and finger tighten all thumbscrews.
Invert and tilt volumeter so the pump cylinder is on top of the water chamber.
Lift pump handle from interlock and shift control valve to vacuum position.
Use short and slow strokes of pump handle to apply vacuum, while using the other hand to assist
the rubber membrane to retract and flatten out over base insert.
Place control valve in "hold" position and lower pump handle into curved notch.
Procedure
The following table lists the steps necessary to determine in-place density of soils and base
materials using the volumeter.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Determining In-Place Density Using Volumeter

Action
Select a density test location that is reasonably smooth and free from loose soil or pebbles.
Place matching tray flat side down on test site.
Fasten to surface of compacted soil with spikes through boss holes.
Zero the volumeter tape before excavating the test hole. This compensates for any irregularity in
surface of test site, the temperature of water, the volume of the rubber membrane and the tray
thickness.
Place the volumeter upright on the tray between the three bosses.
Rotate entire volumeter until the bubble level centers.
Open memory valve at the bottom of the gauge tube.
Lift the pump handle, turn the control valve to "open" for a few seconds and then shift to
"pressure."
Place one knee on center of the top of volumeter, hold volumeter firmly down against tray and
apply 20.7 kPa (3 psi) pressure.
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
While maintaining this pressure, reach down and close memory valve.
Retract membrane by turning valve to "vacuum."
Pump with short, slow strokes of handle until 25 mm (1 in.) of vacuum registers on gauge.
Turn control valve to hold position and depress knob on pump handle into curved notch.
Remove knee.
Rotate the upper or lower tape spool until the 76.2 lineal mm (0.4 lineal ft.) mark coincides with
the top of the meniscus of the water in the adjacent gauge tube.
This will automatically compensate for the 0.00113 m3 (0.04 ft.3) in the bulged upper
chamber of the 220 model volumeter.
While holding lower tape spool, securely tighten tape lock nut. Set volumeter aside in upright
position.
Use the various tools available and excavate the soil inside the limit of the hole in center of tray.
To insure accuracy of the density determination, dig the hole as large as possible but be sure not to
exceed the capacity of the volumeter.
The walls should be as smooth as possible and round into the bottom surface.
Use caution in digging holes in freshly compacted materials so as not to enlarge the hole due
to excessive effort being applied with digging tools.
Avoid having cavities so deep that the membrane might not fill them, or cave-ins directly
under the tray, or considerable variation in diameter of the hole.
Recover all of the material removed from the hole and seal in a gallon bucket or plastic bag to
prevent loss of moisture.
Measure the volume of the test hole by repeating the operations outlined in Steps 4 through 17,
and record as V under 'Calculations.'
Weigh the material excavated from the test hole to determine the wet mass.
Dry the soil at 110 C (230 F), obtain the dry mass, and record as WD, under 'Calculations.'
Calculations
Use the following equations to determine moisture and in-place density.
Calculate moisture content according to Test Method "Tex-103-E, Determining

Moisture Content in Soil Materials," or as percent moisture.
Calculate the mass of the water (WW):
WW = W1 W2
Calculate the mass of the solid particles (WS):
WS = W2 WC
Calculate the water content (%) (WC):
WC = ( 100 WW / WS )
Where:
WC = mass of container and lid, g
W1 = mass of container, lid, and moist specimen, g
TxDOT 11/2004

Materials
W2 = mass of container, lid, and oven-dried specimen, g.
Calculate in-place density = dry mass of excavated soil / Volume of test hole, in kg/m3
(lb./ft.3):
In Place Density = WD / V
Where:
WD = mass of oven-dried soil, kg (lb.)
V = volume of test hole, kg/m3 (lb./ft.3).
Notes
Carefully read operating manual for the volumeter.
Use only clean, pure water in volumeter and change often to prevent corrosion. Add
only antifreeze selected from manufacturer's recommended list.
When retracting the rubber membrane with the volumeter in a tilted position, always
have the cylinder of the pump on top of the metal chamber.
To obtain accuracy in measuring the volume of the hole, the volumeter must be held
solidly against the tray and not be allowed to rise when pressure is applied to rubber
membrane.
Other methods of in-place density tests which correlate satisfactorily with this method
for the soil material in question will be satisfactory for use.
Test Report
Report density to the nearest 1 kg/m3 (0.1 lb/ft3) and moisture to the nearest 0.1%.
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 17
Tex-116-E, Ball Mill Method for Determining the
Disintegration of Flexible Base Material
Contents:
Section 3 Test Record Form .......................................................................................... 17-4
Section 4 Part I, Determining Disintegration ................................................................ 17-5
Section 5 Part II, Determining Increase of Minus (-) 425 m (No. 40) Material.......... 17-6
Section 6 Archived Versions ......................................................................................... 17-8
17-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 17 Tex-116-E, Ball Mill Method for

Determining the Disintegration of Flexible
Base Material
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
Effective Date: June 2000 (refer to 'Archived Versions' for previous versions).
This method determines the resistance of aggregate in flexible base material to
disintegration in the presence of water. The test provides a measure of the ability of the
material to withstand degradation in the road base and detects soft aggregate that is subject
to weathering. The result of this test is known as the Wet Ball Mill (WBM) value.
17-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Base Material
Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
Wet Ball Mill machine, consisting of a watertight steel cylinder, closed at one end, with
inside dimensions of 258.8 3 mm (10.188 1/8 in.) in diameter and 273.1 3 mm
(10.75 1/8 in.) in length.
The cylinder is fitted with a removable lid with watertight gasket attached.
The cylinder is mounted in a rigid support in such a manner that it is rotated about
the central axis in a horizontal position.
A steel baffle, projecting radially 82.6 3 mm (3.25 1/8 in.) into the cylinder and
273.1 3 mm (10.75 1/8 in.) in length, is welded along one element of the
interior surface of the cylinder.
The baffle shall be of such thickness and so mounted as to be rigid.
The machine should be operated at a uniform speed of 58-62 rpm.
metal spheres, used as the abrasive charge, consisting of six steel spheres approximately
47.6 mm (1 7/8 in.) in diameter, weighing between 390 and 445 g
a balance with a minimum capacity of 15 kg (33 lbs.) with a readability of no greater

than 1 g and accuracy of at least 1 g or 0.1% of the test load, whichever is greater
set of standard U.S. sieves, meeting the requirements of Test Method "Tex-907-K,
Verifying the Accuracy of Wire Cloth Sieves" containing the following sizes:
45 mm (1 3/4 in.)
31.5 mm (1 1/4 in.)
22.4 mm (7/8 in.)
16.0 mm (5/8 in.)
9.5 mm (3/8 in.)
4.75 mm (No. 4)
2.00 mm (No. 10)
425 m (No. 40)
oven, air-dryer, with temperature set to 60 5 C (140 9 F)
crusher (optional)
miscellaneous equipment, includes large pans, wash bottles, etc.
container, 2 L (0.5 gal.).
17-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Base Material
Section 3 Test Record Form
Section 3
Test Record Form
Each sample shall be given an identification number and a card bearing the number should
be placed with each portion of the sample throughout the processing and testing of the
material.
17-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Base Material
Section 4 Part I, Determining Disintegration
Section 4
Part I, Determining Disintegration
Procedure
The following table lists the steps necessary to determine the disintegration of flexible base
material.
Step
1
2
3
Determining Disintegration of Flexible Base Material

Action
Secure a representative sample of the total material of approximately 12,000 g.
Air-dry the sample at 60 C (140 F).
Prepare sample according to 'Part II, Preparing Samples for Compaction and Triaxial Tests' of
Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing."
Recombine a 5000 g sample for soil constants testing as shown in the governing specifications
if needed.
Replace oversized particles retained on the 45 mm (1 3/4 in.) sieve with particles passing the
45 mm (1 3/4 in.) and retained on the 31.5 mm (1 1/4 in.) sieve.
Recombine a 3500 g 50 g air dried sample, weigh to the nearest whole gram and record
as A under 'Calculation.'
Place sample in pan and cover with 2 L (0.5 gal.) water for one hour. If 2 L (0.5 gal.) of
water do not fully cover the sample, use the smallest amount of water possible to do so.
NOTE: Use the dry sieve analysis as a rough check for specification compliance for gradation
prior to testing for soil constants and Wet Ball Mill.
Decant all free water from sample into a 2 L (0.5 gal.) container, finish filling container with
clear water and use to wash sample into the mill.
Place the six steel spheres in the mill, fasten the watertight lid securely and rotate 600
revolutions at the uniform speed of 58-62 rpm.
When the 600 revolutions are completed, remove cover and empty cylinder contents into a pan.
Remove the steel spheres and separate the sample by washing over the 425 m (No. 40) sieve.
Dry the aggregate portion retained on the 425 m (No. 40) sieve to a constant mass at 60
C (140 F).
Rescreen over the 425 m (No. 40) sieve.
Weigh the mass to the nearest whole gram and record as B under 'Calculation.'
NOTE: Additional sieves may be utilized to determine particle size degradation during the test.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Calculation
Calculate the percentage of the soil binder from the Wet Ball Mill test
Wet Ball Mill Value, WBM = 100 ( A B ) / A
Where:
A = dry weight of total sample
B = weight of retained material.
17-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Base Material
Section 5 Part II, Determining Increase of Minus

(-) 425 (m (No. 40) Material
Section 5
Part II, Determining Increase of Minus (-) 425 m (No. 40) Material
Procedure
The following table lists the steps necessary to determine the increase of minus (-) 425 m
(No. 40) material.
Step
1
2
3
4
Determining Increase of Minus (-) 425 m (No. 40) Material

Action
Recombine approximately 3000 g of the original prepared sample from Step 3, Part I, of the
'Determining Disintegration of Flexible Base Material' procedure.
Weigh to the nearest whole gram and record the mass as C under 'Calculations.'
Wash the sample over a 425 m (No. 40) sieve.
Dry the aggregate portion retained on the 425 m (No. 40) sieve to a constant weight at 60
C (140 F).
Rescreen over the 425 m (No. 40) sieve and weigh the amount retained to the nearest
whole gram.
Record the mass as D under 'Calculations.'
Calculations
Calculate the original percentage of material passing the 425 m (No. 40) sieve:
Original percentage of min us ( ) 425 m ( No. 40 ) material = 100 ( C D ) / C
Where:
C = original mass of sample
D = mass of material retained on the 425 m (No. 40) sieve.
Calculate the percent increase of material passing the 425 m (No. 40) sieve:
Percent Increase = WBM Original % of min us No. 40
Precautions
Follow these precautions.
always use dry material in performing test.
avoid the loss of portions of sample in transferring into or out of cylinder.
use only 2 L (0.5 gal.) of water to wash the decanted sample into the cylinder.
check mass of steel spheres periodically for loss due to wear.
17-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Base Material
Section 5 Part II, Determining Increase of Minus

(-) 425 (m (No. 40) Material

Report the Wet Ball Mill value to the nearest whole number.
NOTE: This test furnishes valuable supplementary data pertaining to the quality of the
aggregate portion of flexible base material. The Wet Ball Mill test is more reliable than
the Los Angeles abrasion test in evaluating the quality of base materials.
17-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Base Material
Section 6
Archived Versions
Archived versions of Test Method "Tex-116-E, Ball Mill Method for Determining the
Disintegration of Flexible Base Material" are available through the following links:
Click on 116-0899 for the test procedure effective August 1999 through May 2000.
17-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Base Material
Figure 17-1. Relation between percent soil binder from Texas Ball Machine and percent
soil binder before and after rolling.
17-9
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 18
Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression for Disturbed Soils and
Base Materials
Contents:
Section 4 Test Record Forms......................................................................................... 18-5
Section 5 Part I, Standard Triaxial Compression Test................................................... 18-6
Section 6 Part II, Accelerated Method for Triaxial Compression of Soils.................. 18-17
Section 7 Pavement Design Notes............................................................................... 18-22
Section 8 Limitations................................................................................................... 18-25
Section 9 General Notes .............................................................................................. 18-26
Section 10 Archived Versions ..................................................................................... 18-27
18-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 18 Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression for

Disturbed Soils and Base Materials
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
Effective date: August 2002 (refer to 'Archived Versions' for previous versions).
This method determines the shearing resistance, water absorption and expansion of soils
and/or soil-aggregate mixtures.
18-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2
Definitions
triaxial test - The triaxial test is one in which stresses are measured in three mutually
perpendicular directions.
axial load - Axial load is the sum of the applied load and the dead load (including the
weight of the top porous stone, metal block and bell housing) applied along the vertical
axis of the test specimen.
lateral pressure (minor principal stress) - Lateral pressure is the pressure supplied by air
in the triaxial cell, applied in a radial or horizontal direction.
axial (major principal stress) - The axial load divided by the average area of the
cylindrical specimen.
strain - Strain is the vertical deformation of the specimen divided by the original height,
often expressed as a percentage.
Mohr's diagram - Mohr's diagram is a graphical construction of combined principal

stresses in static equilibrium.
Mohr's failure circle - Mohr's failure circle is a stress circle constructed from major and
minor principal stresses of the specimen at failure.
Mohr's failure envelope. - Mohr's failure envelope is the common tangent to a series of
failure circles constructed from different pairs of principal stresses required to fail the
material. The envelope is generally curved, its curvature depending on the factors
related to the characteristics of the material.
18-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
apparatus used in test methods "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials
for Testing; Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density
Relationship of Base Materials," and "Tex-114-E, Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Subgrade & Embankment Soils"
triaxial cells, lightweight stainless steel cylinders
Base Material 171.5 mm (6.75 in.) inside diameter (I.D.) and 304.8 mm (12 in.)
in height;
Subgrade 114.3 mm (4 1/2 in.) I.D. and 228.6 mm (9 in.) in height; fitted with
standard air valve and tubular rubber membrane 152.4 mm (6 in.) in diameter
aspirator or other vacuum pump
air compressor
load frame and assembly
pressure regulator, gauges and valves to produce lateral pressure in curing and testing
equipment to measure deformation of specimen, accurate to 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)
axial load measuring device, calibrated according to Test Method "Tex-902-K,

Calibrating Force Measuring Devices"
circumference measuring device, accurate to 1.0 mm (0.05 in.)
lead weights, for surcharge loads
pans, curing, at least 51 mm (2 in.) deep, with porous plates.
18-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Test Record Forms
Section 4
Test Record Forms
Record test data on:
Form 1964, Triaxial Compression Test Capillary Wetting Data
Form 1176, M/D Triaxial Test Worksheet
Form 1062, Triaxial Test Data Sheet.
After tests and calculations are completed, summarize results on:
Form 1963, Triaxial Test Summary Sheet.
18-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5 Part I, Standard Triaxial Compression

Test
Section 5
Part I, Standard Triaxial Compression Test
Part I applies to laboratory compacted specimens of base materials and sub-grade soils.
Procedure
The following procedure performs the Standard Triaxial Compression Test.
Standard Triaxial Compression Test
Step
Action
Use the following test methods to determine optimum water content and maximum dry density of the
material and molding of the triaxial test specimens:
Test Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density
Relationship of Base Materials"
Test Method "Tex-114-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density
Relationship of Sub-grade & Embankment Soils."
Mold a total of seven specimens at optimum moisture and maximum dry density for base and sub-base
materials.
For fine-grained sub-grade soils, mold a total of six specimens at optimum moisture and maximum
dry density.
These specimens should be 152.4 mm (6 in.) in diameter and 203.2 mm (8 in.) in height 6.4 mm
(0.25 in.) or 101.6 mm (4 in.) in diameter and 152.4 mm (6 in.) in height using a straight edge to
strike off the top and bottom.
These specimens should be wetted, mixed, molded and finished as nearly identical as possible.
Identify each test specimen by laboratory number and specimen number.
Immediately after extruding the specimens from the molds:
enclose the specimens in triaxial cells, with top and bottom porous stones in place and allow all the
specimens to remain undisturbed at room temperature until the entire set of test specimens has been
molded
record data on the 'M/D Triaxial Worksheet,' Form 1176.
NOTE: When a different compactive effort is desired, a complete new M/D Curve and test specimens
must be molded.
18-6
TxDOT 11/2004


Test

Step
Action
After the entire test set has been completed, remove the triaxial cells.
Described below are the appropriate dry curing procedures for various material types.
Dry cure the specimens according to the type of material to avoid excessive cracking which will
damage the specimen.
For flexible base materials and select granular soils with little or no tendency to shrink:
Place specimens in the oven air dryer and remove 1/3 to 1/2 of the molding moisture content at a
temperature of 60 C (140 F). (This will require 3 to 6 hours depending on the material, the
optimum moisture content and the load of other wet material in the oven).
Allow the specimens to return to room temperature before preparation for and subjection to
capillarity.
Very plastic clay sub-grade soils crack badly if subjected to large volume changes during shrinkage.
Air dry these soils at room temperature, inspecting specimens frequently by looking at the sides of
the specimens and raising the top porous stones to examine the extent of cracking at the top edges
of the specimens.
When these cracks have formed to a depth of approximately 6.4 mm (1/4 in.), replace the triaxial
cell and prepare the specimens for capillary wetting.
For moderately active soils that might crack badly if placed in an air dryer for the full curing time.
Dry at 60 C (140 F) and check frequently for the appearance of shrinkage cracks.
If cracks appear, examine the extent of cracking as described above, and allow some air drying at
room temperature during the cooling period before enclosing specimens in cells.
The specimens are now ready to be prepared for capillary wetting:
Do not change the porous stones or remove them until the specimens have been tested.
Weigh each specimen and its accompanying stones and record the mass.
Cut a piece of filter paper to 254 x 508 mm (10 x 20 in.), fold into 127 x 508 mm (5 x 20 in.) and
make several cuts with scissors (Jack-o-lantern fashion). These cuts will prevent any restriction by
the paper.
Unfold the filter paper and wrap it around the specimen and stones so the cuts are parallel with the
length of the specimen, allowing the bottom of the paper to be near the bottom of the bottom
porous stone, and fasten with a piece of tape.
Replace cell by applying a partial vacuum to the cell, deflating the rubber membrane, then place
the cell over the specimen and release the vacuum.
Transfer the specimens to the damp room or temperature controlled environment and place them
into the rectangular pans provided for capillary wetting.
Adjust the water level on the lower porous stones to approximately 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) below the
bottom of the specimens.
Add water later to the pans, as necessary, to maintain this level.
NOTE: See the 'Schematic Arrangement for Capillary Wetting.'
Connect each cell to an air manifold and open the valve to apply a constant lateral pressure of 6.9
kPa (1 psi).
Maintain this constant pressure throughout the period of absorption.
Next, place a suitable vertical surcharge load (which will depend upon the proposed use or location
of the material in the roadway) on the top porous stone (see 'Vertical Surchange Load' table).
When determining the mass for the surcharge, include the mass of the top porous stone as part of
the surcharge mass.
18-7
TxDOT 11/2004


Test

Step
Action
Subject all flexible base materials and soils with plasticity index of 15 or less to capillary
absorption for 10 days.
Use a period of time in days equal to the plasticity index of the material for sub-grade soils with PI
above 15.
Keep the specimens at 25 5 C (77 9 F) during the period of capillary absorption.
Disconnect air hose from cell, remove surcharge weight and return specimens to laboratory for
testing.
Use a vacuum and deflate the rubber membrane to aid in removing the cell from specimens and
discard filter paper.
If any appreciable material clings to paper, carefully press it back into the available holes along the
side of the specimen.
Weigh the specimens and record as total mass after capillary absorption.
Note that the wet mass of the stones is obtained after the specimens are tested.
Record on the 'Triaxial Compression Test Capillary Wetting Data Sheet,' Form 1964.
Measure the circumference of each specimen by means of the metal measuring tape.
Measure the height of the specimen including the stones, and enter on the data sheet as height
in/out capillarity.
Record the height of each stone.
Ready the specimen to be tested by replacing the triaxial cell to eliminate any moisture loss from the
specimen and then releasing the vacuum.
When a specimen is designated to be tested at zero lateral pressure, remove the cell just before
testing.
It is important to keep the correct identification on the specimens at all times because weights,
measurements, test values and calculations are determined for each individual specimen.
Test the specimens in compression while they are being subjected to their assigned constant lateral
pressure. (See 'Press Assembly for Triaxial Test.' )
The motorized press should compress the sample at a rate of 2.0 0.3% strain per minute.
Take simultaneous readings of load and deformation at intervals of 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) deformation
until specimen fails.
Lower the load frame platen far enough to have room to place the specimen, loading blocks and
deformation measuring equipment in the press.
Center the specimen with upper and lower loading blocks in place in the load frame.
Determine if the deformation gauge will compress or extend during testing and set the dial stem
accordingly.
Set the dial of the strain gauge to read zero.
Next, set the bell housing, if used, over the deformation gauge and adjust so that it does not touch the
gauge or its mounting.
NOTE: The compressive stress will necessarily be applied along a vertical line through the center of
the ball that is mounted in the top of the bell housing.
Shift the bell housing laterally to bring the ball directly over the axis of the specimen, since it is
desirable to apply the compressive force along the vertical axis of the test specimen.
Raise the platen by means of the motor, align and seat the ball on the bell housing into the socket in
the proving ring. Then apply just enough pressure to obtain a perceptible reading on the proving
ring gauge (not to exceed 5 lbs.).
Read the deformation gauge and record as deformation under dead load.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18-8
TxDOT 11/2004


Test

Step
Action
18
Connect the air line to the triaxial cell and apply lateral pressure to the specimen. The usual lateral
pressures used for a series of tests are 0 kPa (0 psi), 20.7 kPa (3 psi), 34.5 kPa (5 psi), 69.0 (10 psi),
103.5 kPa (15 psi) and 138.0 kPa (20 psi).
In cases where the load or stress is high, 1207 - 1241 kPa (175 -180 psi), for the specimen tested at
103.5 kPa (15 psi) lateral pressure, use 48.3 kPa (7 psi) instead of 138.0 kPa (20 psi) for the last
specimen.
The lateral pressure applied by the air will tend to change the initial reading of the gauge. As the
air pressure is adjusted, start the motor momentarily to compress the specimen until the
deformation gauge reads the same as recorded in Step 17.
Read the proving ring gauge and enter in load column opposite the initial deformation reading on
the 'Triaxial Test Data Sheet,' Form 1176.
The test is ready to be started:
Turn on the motor and read the proving ring dial at each 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) deformation of the
specimen.
Continue readings until 15.2 mm (0.60 in.) of deformation is reached or failure has occurred.
Failure is reached when the proving ring dial readings remain constant or decrease with further
increments of deformation.
In testing specimens with aggregates, the slipping and shearing of aggregates will cause
temporary decreases in proving ring readings.
Continue the test until true failure is reached.
After 15.2 mm (0.60 in.) of deformation the cross sectional area of the specimen has increased so
that the subsequent small increase in load readings is little more than the increase in tension of the
membrane acting as lateral pressure.
The above procedure also applies to an unconfined specimen except that no air or axial cell is used.
For materials which contain a large amount of aggregate, test two specimens at zero lateral
pressure.
Use average of test results unless large rocks appear to have created point bearing; in this case use
highest value.
Remove the cell and stones from the specimen over a flat tared drying pan.
Use a spatula to clean the material from the inside of cell and stones.
Break up the specimen taking care to lose none of the material and place the identification tag in
the tray.
Dry material to constant mass at a temperature of 110 C (230 F) and determine the dry mass.
Weigh the damp stones, then dry them at 60 C (140 F) and to constant mass.
Weigh the dry stones.
Record both the damp and dry masses on the 'Triaxial Test Data Sheet,' Form 1062
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
18-9
TxDOT 11/2004


Test
Figure 18-1. Schematic Arrangement for Capillary Wetting.
TxDOT 11/2004


Test
Figure 18-2. Press Assembly for Triaxial Press.

The following table indicates vertical surcharge load.
Mold Diameter
152 mm (6 in.)
102 mm (4 in.)
Vertical Surcharge Load

Flexible Base
6.4 kg (14.1 lb.)
N/A
Sub-grade Soil
12.8 kg (28.3 lb.)
5.7 kg (12.6 lb.)
TxDOT 11/2004


Test
Calculations
Calculate dry density (DD) in kg/m3 (pcf):
DD = WD / V
Where:
V = volume of compacted specimen, m3 (ft3)
WD = dry mass of specimen, kg (lbs.).
Calculate the percent molding moisture (MM):
M M = [ 100( WW WD ) / WD ]
Where:
WW = wet mass of specimen, kg (lbs.).
Calculate the percent of volumetric swell (VS):
VS = 100 (V A V ) / V
Where:
VA = volume of specimen after capillary absorption, m3 (ft3).
Calculate the % moisture in the specimen after capillarity (MC):
M C = 100( WA WB WD ) / W
Where:
WA = wet mass of specimen and stones after absorption, kg (lbs.)
WB = wet mass of stones, kg (lbs.)
WD = correct oven-dry mass of specimen, kg (lbs.).
Calculate the % moisture in the specimen before capillarity (MB):
M B = 100 ( WC WS WD ) / WD
Where:
WS = dry mass of stones, kg (lbs.)
WC = mass of specimen and stones before capillarity, kg (lbs.).
Calculate the corrected vertical unit stress in kPa (psi). A correction is necessary
because the area of the cross-section increases as the specimen is reduced in height.
Assume that the specimen deforms at constant volume.
S = 100 ( d / h ) = percent strain
TxDOT 11/2004


Test
Where:
d = total vertical deformation at a given instant, mm (in.), by deformation gauge
h = the height of the specimen, mm (in.), measured after specimen is removed from
capillarity.
Calculate the corrected vertical unit stress (p):
p = 9 .81 [ P( 1 S / 100 ) / A ], in kPa or
p = P [( 1 S / 100 ) / A ], in psi
Where:
A = the end area of the cylindrical specimen at the beginning of test, mm2 (in2)
P = the total vertical load on the specimen at any given deformation expressed in g
(lbs.). It is the sum of the applied load measured by the proving ring plus the dead
mass of the upper stone, loading block and dial housing.
Graphs and Diagrams
Plot the moisture-density curve shown in 'Plot of Sample Moisture-Density Curve' of

Test Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and MoistureDensity Relationship of Base Materials."
Plot the stress-strain diagram as shown in the 'Stress-Strain Diagram' when requested.
Construct the 'Mohr's Diagram' of stress upon coordinate axes in which ordinates
represent shear stress and abscissas represent normal stress, both expressed as kPa (psi)
to the same scale.
L = Minor principal stress which is the constant lateral pressure applied to the
specimen during an individual test.
V = The major principal stress which is the ultimate compressive strength or the
highest value of p determined at the given lateral pressure.
Show each individual test by one stress circle:
Plot L and V on the base line of normal stress.
Locate the center of each circle a distance of (V + L)/2 from the origin and construct a
semi-circle with its radius equal to (V - L)/2 intersecting the base line at V and L.
Repeat these steps for each specimen tested at different lateral pressures to provide
enough stress circles to define the failure envelope on the Mohr's diagram.
Draw the failure envelope tangent to all of the stress circles. Since it is practically
impossible to avoid compacting an occasional specimen that is not identical with the other
specimens in the same set, disregard any stress circle that is obviously out of line when
drawing the tangent line.
TxDOT 11/2004


Test
Figure 18-3. Stress-Strain Diagram.
TxDOT 11/2004


Test
Figure 18-4. Mohr's Diagram.

Classification of Material
Transfer the envelope of failure onto the chart, 'Chart for Classification of Sub-grade
and Flexible Base Material,' and classify the material to the nearest one-tenth of a class.
When the envelope of failure falls between class limits, select the critical point or
weakest condition on the failure envelope.
Measure the vertical distance down from a boundary line to the point to obtain the exact
classification (3.7) as shown in the 'Chart for Classification of Sub-grade and Flexible
Base Material.'
TxDOT 11/2004


Test
Figure 18-5. Chart for Classification of Sub-grade and Flexible Base Material.
Test Report
Report the soil constants, grading and wet ball mill value for the base material. Summarize
test results on the 'Triaxial Test Summary Sheet,' Form 1963, and strength classification
plotted as given in the 'Chart For Classification Of Sub-grade And Flexible Base Material.'
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6 Part II, Accelerated Method for

Triaxial Compression of Soils
Section 6
Part II, Accelerated Method for Triaxial Compression of Soils
This accelerated procedure is based on a correlation with 'Part I, Standard Triaxial
Compression Test,' performed on a large number of different types of soils. Generally, use
the accelerated test to control the quality of base materials with low absorption in group (d)
during stockpiling. In such cases, roadway samples will not be considered to be
representative.
Procedure
The following table lists the steps necessary to perform the accelerated procedure to control
the quality of base materials with low absorption.
Accelerated Procedure to Control the Quality of Base Materials With Low Absorption
Step
Action
1
Prepare all materials according to 'Part II, Preparing Samples for Compaction and Triaxial Tests'
of Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing."
2
Determine the optimum moisture and maximum density as outlined in:
Test Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics And Moisture-Density
Relationship Of Base Materials," for base materials, or
Test Method "Tex-114-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics And Moisture-Density
Relationship Of Sub-grade And Embankment Soils," for sub-grade soils.
3
Group the soils into five general types of materials:
A. Fine granular materials with plasticity index less than 5.
B. Very low swelling soils with plasticity index of 5 through 11.
C. Swelling sub-grade soils, plasticity index of 12 or more.
D. Flexible base and sub-base materials with considerable amounts of aggregate.
E. Combination soil types.
Follow the correct procedure for the specimen soil type, as shown below
Group A Fine Granular Materials with Plasticity Index Less Than 5.

Accelerated Triaxial Compression Test for Fine Granular Materials With Plasticity Index < 5
Step
Action
1
Mold 6 specimens 152.4 mm (6 in.) in diameter and 203.2 mm (8 in.) in height at the optimum
moisture and density according to Test Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics And Moisture-Density Relationship Of Base Materials."
2
Cover the specimen (with stones in place) with a triaxial cell immediately after removing from
mold and allow to set overnight undisturbed at room temperature.
NOTE: Do not dry cure or subject specimens to capillary absorption.
3
Test the specimens at the usual lateral pressures.
4
Calculate unit stress, plot diagrams and classify material.
TxDOT 11/2004


Group B Very Low Swelling Soils with Plasticity Index of 5 through 11

Accelerated Triaxial Compression Test for Very Low Swelling Soils With Plasticity Index of 5
through 11
Step
Action
1
Compact a set of 6 identical specimens at the optimum moisture and density condition
according to Test Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics And MoistureDensity Relationship Of Base Materials."
2
Use filter paper, lead surcharge weight and air pressure for lateral support and subject the
specimens to capillary absorption overnight as described in steps 8 through 12 of 'Part I,
Standard Triaxial Compression Test.'
3
The next morning, remove filter paper and test the specimens at the usual lateral pressure
shown above.
Calculate unit stress, plot diagrams and classify material.
Group C Swelling Sub-grade Soils, Plasticity Index of 12 or More

Accelerated Triaxial Compression Test for Swelling Sub-grade Soils With Plasticity Index of 12 or
More
Step
Action
1
Obtain the plasticity index and hygroscopic moisture of these soils in advance of molding
specimens.
2
Determine the optimum moisture and dry density of the materials as outlined in Test Method
Base Materials."
3
Calculate the Percent Molding Moisture = (1.4 x optimum moisture) - 22
4
Obtain the desired molding density from the following expression:
Molded Dry Density = Optimum dry density (from Step 2) / [1 + (% volumetric swell /
100)]
To determine the percent volumetric swell to be expected, use average condition in chart
shown in 'Interrelationship of PI and Volume Change.'
It is important to modify the percent volumetric swell by multiplying by percent soil binder
divided by 100 to obtain the percent volumetric swell to be expected.
5
Use the moisture content (Step 3), adjusted if necessary, and adjust the blows per layer to
obtain the desired density (Step 4).
Where this moisture content is too great to permit the desired density, reduce the molding
water slightly (usually about 1%) and continue molding.
Mold 6 specimens, according to Test Method "Tex-114-E, Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Sub-grade & Embankment Soils," at
the water content established for the desired density. The specimens, being in capillarity
overnight, will pick up this moisture that was left out.
6
When the 6 specimens have been molded, put them to capillary absorption (as in Part I )
overnight. Test at the usual lateral pressures and classify.
TxDOT 11/2004


Figure 18-6. Interrelationship of PI and Volume Change.
TxDOT 11/2004


Group D Flexible Base and Sub-base Materials with Aggregate

Accelerated Triaxial Compression Test for Flexible Base and Sub-base Materials with Aggregate
Step
Action
1
When classification is required, weigh out enough material to mold 7 or more specimens,
in individual pans.
Sprinkle all the soaking water on the material in the mixing pan and allow to soak for a
minimum of 12 hours.
The soaking water is the optimum moisture as determined in Test Method "Tex-113-E,
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base
Materials" except where a flat top curve exists, then the soaking water would be the
amount of the left side or dry side of the flat portion.
2
In testing base and sub-base materials with aggregates, the following procedure may be used
where strengths are required.
Weigh out material for 7 specimens in individual pans and sprinkle the water as estimated
to be just below optimum moisture on each specimen by adding water in increments while
mixing.
Weigh the contents to obtain the mass of the pan, soil and water, and record upon
completion of mixing each sample.
Cover the specimens for strength or classification, with a lid or suitable cover to reduce
moisture loss and let soak overnight with the material weighed out for the M-D curve.
Begin the M-D curve as outlined in Test Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials." Continue molding
until the optimum moisture and density are determined.
The difference between optimum moisture and the water the specimens were sprinkled
with must be added to the material in the pans. This amount should not exceed 2%. Let
soak for at least one hour.
If, in the event the specimens have been wet with slightly more than optimum, not to
exceed 1%, they may be dried back at room temperature, by constant stirring, to desired
mass.
3
Replace any evaporated water, mix and compact.
Mold materials, which can be compacted to the desired density without the addition of
more water, at optimum moisture 0.1%.
Many materials require the addition of small amounts of moisture to obtain the desired
density.
If needed, add in the required amounts of additional water (by trial and error method)
until the desired density is obtained, then compact a set of seven specimens using 1100
kN-m/m3 (13.26 ft-lbs/in3) effort.
The intent of this technique is to use the minimum amount of moisture equal to or
above optimum moisture that will produce a set of accelerated test specimens whose
average density is within 8.0 kg/m3 (1/2 pcf) of the maximum unit dry density of the
original moisture density curve.
NOTE: Excessive densities can sometimes be obtained in the accelerated set but these are
almost always very wet specimens and their resultant strengths can be misleading.
4
Subject specimens to overnight capillarity.
5
Test, and if required, classify according to 'Part I, Standard Triaxial Compression Test.'
If strengths at zero and 103.4 kPa (0 and 15 psi) lateral pressures are specified, test four
specimens at zero lateral confinement and three of 103.4 kPa (15 psi) lateral confinement
and average the three highest values for each state of confinement of the control values.
NOTE: When Grade 1 or 2 strength is specified, classification is not required.
TxDOT 11/2004


NOTE: When strengths at zero and 103.4 kPa (15 psi) lateral pressures are specified, it is
permitted to run correlation tests on a given source of material. The correlation should
be as follows:
As soon as three satisfactory accelerated test specimens have been molded

according to Step 2 of the 'Accelerated Triaxial Compression Test for Flexible
Base and Sub-base Materials with Aggregate' procedure for Group D, test two of
them at zero lateral pressure and average the results as one test.
Test the third specimen at 103.4 kPa (15 psi) lateral pressure.
If these specimens pass, it is safe to assume the set to be tested the next day will
pass.
Group E Combination Soil Types
This group includes all materials with enough soil binder to separate the aggregate particles
or overfill the voids of the compacted specimen.
For example, if the material is a clayey gravel with high plasticity:
Treat the material as a swelling soil.
Allow the material to soak a minimum of 12 hours as in the case of aggregate

materials.
Note that the total swelling is figured only for that part passing the 425 m (No. 40) sieve.
Other combinations must be recognized and tested in the proper group.
Subject all specimens to overnight capillarity, test and classify.
When testing aggregate materials under Part II where classification is required:
Test two specimens at 0 kPa (0 psi).
Test the others at 20.7 kPa (3 psi), 34.5 kPa (5 psi), 69.0 kPa (10 psi) and 103.4 kPa
(15 psi).
Average the result of the zero lateral pressure tests as one value.
Classify fine grain soils using lateral pressures of 0 kPa (0 psi), 20.7 kPa (3 psi),
34.5 kPa (5 psi), 69.0 kPa (10 psi), 103.4 kPa (15 psi).

The reports and forms are the same as given in 'Part I, Standard Triaxial Compression Test,'
of this procedure.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 7 Pavement Design Notes
Section 7
Pavement Design Notes
After materials have been classified according to 'Part I, Standard Triaxial Compression
Test' or 'Part II, Accelerated Method for Triaxial Compression of Soils,' and cohesiometer
values for stabilized layers and surfacing have been determined, follow these steps for
thickness design:
1.
Obtain the current and projected traffic from the Transportation Planning and
Programming Division of TxDOT.
2.
Select a design wheel load from the traffic data and known local conditions. Use the
Flexible Base Design Chart (flexchrt) to calculate total depth of pavement to protect
the sub-grade.
3.
Reduce total depth of pavement by using the Thickness Reduction Chart for Stabilized
Layers, whenever stabilized layers are used in the pavement structure.
Enter above depth (from 2 above) on ordinate of Thickness Reduction Chart for
Stabilized Layers, and follow across page until intersection of cohesiometer value
selected for use is reached, then project to abscissa to read reduction in depth due to
bridging effects.
Standard cohesiometer values (corrected to represent values from 76 mm [3 in.] height

specimens) are used on the 'Thickness Reduction Chart for Stabilized Layers' regardless
of thickness of stabilized layer except in the following cases:
Consideration should be given to increasing the design wheel load by 30% if traffic
is anticipated to have over 50% tandem axles where asphaltic mixtures are used.
The modification of cohesiometer values for 76.2 mm (3 in.) high specimens for
application to other thickness' of asphaltic mixtures is obtained by the equation:
C M = Ct 2 / 9
Where:
CM = Modified cohesiometer value
C = Standard cohesiometer value for a 76.2 mm (3 in.) height specimen
t = Proposed thickness of bituminous mixtures, mm (in.).
4.
The load frequency design factor can be obtained from the tabulation in the 'Criteria for
Obtaining the Load-Frequency Design Factor' table. The depth obtained from the
'Thickness Reduction Chart for Stabilized Layers' is then multiplied by this factor and
used with the 'Flexible Base Design Chart' to design each course of the pavement
structure.
5.
'Suggested Minimum Thickness of Surface Course' presents data which was interpreted
from good engineering practice supplemented by utilizing the AASHTO Road Test
data and is a suggested method for determining the thickness of surface courses.
Criteria for Obtaining the Load - Frequency Design Factor Table
TxDOT 11/2004

Criteria for Obtaining the Load - Frequency Design Factor

Total Equivalent 8.172 mgm (18 Kip) Design Wheel Load in Pounds *Load Frequency Design
Single Axle Load Applications
(ADTHWL)
Factor
14,000
6,000
0.65
25,000
6,200
0.70
38,000
6,300
0.75
61,000
6,500
0.80
100,000
6,800
0.85
150,000
7,200
0.90
250,000
7,900
0.95
400,000
8,700
1.00
600,000
9,500
1.05
1,000,000
10,900
1.10
1,500,000
12,000
1.15
2,500,000
13,500
1.20
4,000,000
14,900
1.25
10,000,000
17,300
1.35
*A load-frequency design factor less than 1.0 is not recommended for the design of the main
lanes of a controlled access highway.
Suggested Minimum Thickness of Surface Course Table
Suggested Minimum Thickness of Surface Course
Total Equivalent 8.172 mgm (18
When Tests Show Materials to be Specifications Grades* of
Kip) Single Axle Load
Base Materials (Item 248)
Applications
Grade 1
Grade 2
Grade 3
14,000
ST
ST
ST
25,000
ST
ST
ST
38,000
ST
ST
ST
61,000
ST
ST
38 mm (1-1/2 in.)
100,000
ST
38 mm (1-1/2 in.)
50 mm (2 in.)
150,000
ST
44 mm (3/4 in.)
64 mm (2-1/2 in.)
250,000
32 mm (1-1/14 in.)
50 mm (2 in.)
76 mm (3 in.)
400,000
38 mm (1-1/2 in.)
57 mm (2-1/4 in.)
89 mm (3-1/2 in.)
600,000
44 mm (1-3/4 in.)
64 mm (2-1/2 in.)
102 mm (4 in.)
1,000,000
50 mm (2 in.)
76 mm (3 in.)
114 mm (4-1/2 in.)
1,500,000
64 mm (2-1/2 in.)
89 mm (3-1/2 in.)
127 mm (5 in.)
2,500,000
76 mm (3 in.)
102 mm (4 in.)
140 mm (5-1/2 in.)
4,000,000
89 mm (3-1/2 in.)
114 mm (4-1/2 in.)
152 mm (6 in.)
10,000,000
114 mm (4-1/2 in.)
140 mm (5-1/2 in.)
178 mm (7 in.)
*It is assumed that the material in question is no better than the grade shown.
**Exclusive of Cohesionless Materials
TxDOT 11/2004

Notes:
ST denotes surface treatments.
Stage construction of surfacing permitted if traffic studies indicate slow development of

axle load equivalencies.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 8 Limitations
Section 8
Limitations
For a 152.6 mm (6 in.) or greater layer thickness, use a value of 152.6 mm (6 in.) in the
formula for t.
When adjacent layers of stabilization and asphaltic concrete are used, the cohesiometer
value to be used with the 'Thickness Reduction Chart for Stabilized Layers' should be equal
to the sum of the standard cohesiometer value for the stabilized layer and the modified
cohesiometer value of the asphaltic concrete.
When two adjacent layers of stabilization are used, or if a layer of untreated flexible
base material exists between asphaltic concrete and a stabilized layer, only the greater
of the two cohesiometer values in theThickness Reduction Chart for Stabilized Layers
should be used.
Considerable caution and good engineering judgment should be used in selecting

cohesiometer values for use in reduction of base depths. This is especially true in cases
where hot mix-cold laid asphaltic concrete is bid as an alternate to hot mix asphaltic
concrete laid hot.
In the case of stabilized bases, sub-bases and sub-grades, average values rather than
highest values should be selected for use in 'Thickness Reduction Chart for Stabilized
Layers.'
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 9
General Notes
Wetted stabilized materials taken from the roadway during construction should be screened
over a 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) sieve at the field moisture content without drying.
Each of these two sizes is mixed for uniformity and weighed.
Specimens are then weighed and recombined to produce multiple identical specimens
with the received gradation.
Moisture can be adjusted in each specimen by adding water to the material or removing
from the material by a fan, as needed.
See the appropriate test method (listed below) for testing wetted stabilized materials taken
form the roadway during construction.
Cement Stabilization: Test Method "Tex-120-E, Soil Cement Testing"
Lime Stabilization: Test Method "Tex-121-E, Soil-Lime Testing"
Fly Ash Stabilization: Test Method "Tex-127-E, Lime-Fly Ash Compressive Strength
Test Methods."
In any event, the stabilized material should not be completely air dried.
When molding a set of preliminary specimens for testing lime stabilized sub-grades and base
materials, refer to Recommended Amounts of Lime for Stabilization of Sub-grades and
Bases' in Test Method Tex-121-E, Soil-Lime Testing," for the recommended amounts of
lime to be used.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 10
Archived Versions
Archived versions of Test Method "Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression for Disturbed Soils
and Base Materials" are available through the following links:
Click on 117-0899 for the test procedure effective August 1999 through July 2002.
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 19
Tex-118-E, Triaxial Compression Test for Undisturbed Soils
Contents:
Section 3 Significance and Use ..................................................................................... 19-4
Section 5 Test Specimens .............................................................................................. 19-8
Section 8 Report .......................................................................................................... 19-14
19-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 19 Tex-118-E, Triaxial Compression

Test for Undisturbed Soils
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the unconsolidated, undrained, compressive strength of cylindrical
specimens of cohesive soils in an undisturbed condition, using a strain-controlled
application of the axial compression-test load where the specimen is subjected to a confining
fluid pressure in a triaxial chamber.
The method provides for the measurement of the total stresses applied to the specimen,
uncorrected for pore pressure.
The test provides data for determining strength properties and stress-strain relations for soils.
19-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2
Definitions
triaxial compression test - The triaxial compression test a test in which a cylindrical
specimen of soil or rock encased in an impervious membrane is subjected to a confining
pressure and then loaded axially to failure in compression.
deviator stress (principal stress difference) - Deviator stress is the difference between
the major and minor principal stresses in a triaxial test which is equal to the axial load
applied to the specimen divided by the cross-sectional area of the specimen, as
prescribed in the section on calculations. The major principal stress in the specimen is
equal to the deviator stress plus the chamber pressure, and the minor principal stress in
the specimen is equal to the chamber pressure.
failure stress - Failure stress is the stress in the specimen corresponding to the
maximum deviator stress (principal stress difference) attained or by the deviator stress
(principal stress difference) at 15% axial strain, whichever is obtained first during the
performance of a test.
unconsolidated, undrained compressive strength. - Unconsolidated, undrained

compressive strength is the value of the maximum deviator stress (principal stress
difference) during the test.
19-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Significance and Use
Section 3
Significance and Use
Since the shear strength of a soil is determined in terms of the total stress in this test (the
total stress being equal to the effective stress plus the pore pressure), the strength depends on
the pressure developed in the pore fluid during loading.
This method does not permit fluid flow from or into the soil specimen as the load is
applied; therefore, the resulting pore pressure, and hence strength, differs from that
developed in the case where drainage can occur.
Since this method does not permit drainage across the boundaries of the specimen, the
strength measured in terms of total stress will not generally be applicable to field
conditions where drainage occurs.
Further, the strengths determined using triaxial compression tests may not apply in
cases where the strain conditions in the field differ significantly from those in the test.
19-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Apparatus
Section 4
Apparatus
axial-loading (compression) device, driven by either a screw jack or an electric motor

through a geared transmission, plus:
a platform weighing scale equipped with a screw-jack activated-load yoke
a deadweight load apparatus
a hydraulic or pneumatic loading device, or
any other compression device with sufficient capacity and control to provide the
rate of loading prescribed in the procedure for
'Triaxial Compression Test for Undisturbed Soils' procedure.
axial-load measuring device, either load ring, electronic load cell, hydraulic load cell, or
any other load measuring device capable of the accuracy prescribed in this paragraph,
and may be a part of the axial loading device.
For soil with a deviator stress at failure of less than 96 kPa (1 ton/sq. ft.), device
must be capable of measuring the unit axial load to an accuracy of 1 kPa (0.01
ton/sq. ft.) or 1% of the axial load at failure for soil with a deviator stress at failure
of 96 kPa (1 ton/sq. ft.) or greater.
chamber pressure maintaining and measurement device, capable of applying and

controlling the chamber pressure to within 1 kPa (0.01 ton/sq. ft.) for chamber pressures
less than 192 kPa (2 ton/sq. ft.) and to within 1% for chamber pressures greater than
192 kPa (2 ton/sq. ft.).
This device may consist of a reservoir connected to the triaxial chamber and
partially filled with the chamber fluid (usually water), with the upper part of the
reservoir connected to a compressed gas supply, the gas pressure being controlled
by a pressure regulator and measured by a pressure gauge, electronic pressure
transducer, or any other device capable of measuring to the prescribed tolerance.
However, a hydraulic system pressurized by deadweight acting on a piston or any

other pressure maintaining and measurement device capable of applying and
controlling the chamber pressure to the tolerance prescribed in this paragraph may
be used.
triaxial compression chamber, in which the cylindrical specimen, enclosed by a

membrane sealed to the specimen cap and base, may be placed and subjected to a
constant hydrostatic fluid pressure.
The apparatus shall include a bushing and piston, aligned with the axis of the
loading device.
The load from the bushing and piston is transmitted to the specimen, causing the
specimen to be compressed axially between the specimen cap and base.
The bushing and piston must be designed to minimize friction.
19-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Apparatus
impermeable rigid specimen cap and base, to prevent drainage of the specimen,
constructed of a noncorrosive, impermeable material.
Each device shall have a circular plane surface of contact with the specimen and a
circular cross section.
The weight of the specimen cap must be less than 0.5% of the applied axial load at
failure.
The diameter of the cap and base must equal the initial diameter of the specimen.
The specimen base should be coupled to the triaxial compression chamber to

prevent lateral motion or tilting.
The specimen cap should receive the piston so that the piston-to-cap contact area is
concentric with the cap.
The cylindrical surface of the specimen base and cap that contacts the membrane to
form a seal must be smooth and free of scratches.
deformation indicator: a dial indicator able to measure to within 0.03% of the specimen
height, with a travel range of at least 20% of the initial height of the test specimen, or
other measuring device meeting these requirements for precision and range.
rubber membrane, to encase the specimen; should provide reliable protection against
leakage.
Discard the membrane if flaws or pin-holes are evident.
To offer minimum restraint to the specimen, the unstretched membrane diameter

should be between 75% and 90% of that of the specimen, and the thickness should
not exceed 1% of the diameter.
The membrane must be sealed to the specimen and cap with rubber O-rings whose
unstressed inside diameter is less than 75% of the diameter of the base and cap, or
by other methods that will produce a positive seal.
An equation for correcting the deviator stress (principal stress difference) for the
effect of the strength of the membrane is given in the 'Calculations' section.
sample extruder, capable of pushing the soil core from the sampling tube with minimum
disturbance. If the soil core is not extruded vertically, take care to avoid any bending
devices to measure the height and diameter of the specimen, capable of measuring to
the nearest 0.3 mm (0.01 in.), constructed so their use will not disturb the specimen
timing device, indicating the elapsed testing time to the nearest 1 second, to establish
the rate of strain application prescribed in the
'Triaxial Compression Test for Undisturbed Soils' procedure
weighing device, able to weigh soil specimens of less than 100 g to the nearest 0.01 g,
and specimens of 100 g or heavier to the nearest 0.1 g
miscellaneous apparatus, including:
specimen trimming and carving tools
a membrane expander
19-6
TxDOT 11/2004

remolding apparatus
moisture (water) content cans
data sheets.
Section 4 Apparatus
19-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5 Test Specimens
Section 5
Test Specimens
Specimens should have a minimum diameter of 70 mm (2.8 in.).
The largest particle contained within the test specimen must be smaller than one sixth of
the specimen diameter.
If oversize particles are present, indicate this information in the test data report, under
remarks.
The height to diameter ratio should be between 2 and 3, measured to the nearest 0.3 mm
(0.01 in.).
Prepare undisturbed specimens from samples obtained from thin walled sampling tubes or
other acceptable undisturbed tube sampling procedures.
Specimens obtained by tube sampling may be tested without trimming, except for
squaring ends, provided soil characteristics are such that no significant disturbance
results from sampling.
Handle specimens carefully to minimize disturbance, changes in cross section, or loss of

moisture content.
If compression or any type of noticeable disturbance would be caused by the extrusion

device, split the sample length-wise, or cut it off in small sections to facilitate removal
of the specimen with minimum disturbance.
Specimens should be of uniform circular cross section, with ends perpendicular to the
axis.
If pebbles or crumbling result in excessive irregularity at the ends, pack soil from the
trimmings in the irregularities to produce the desired surface, or cap the specimens with
a thin layer of plaster of Paris, hydrostone or similar material.
Determine weight and dimensions of specimen, enclose in the rubber membrane, and
immediately seal it to the specimen base and cap.
19-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6 Procedure
Section 6
Procedure
This procedure details the steps necessary to test the triaxial compression of undisturbed
soils.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
Triaxial Compression Test for Undisturbed Soils

Action
Position the specimen in the chamber and assemble the triaxial chamber.
Bring the axial load piston into contact with the specimen cap several times to permit proper
seating and alignment of the piston with the cap.
During this procedure, take care not to apply a deviator stress to the specimen exceeding 0.5%
of the estimated compressive strength.
If the weight of the piston is sufficient to apply a deviator stress to the specimen exceeding
0.5% of the estimated compressive strength
The piston should be locked in place above the specimen cap after checking the seating
and alignment and
Left locked until application of the chamber pressure.
Place the chamber in position in the axial loading device.
Carefully align the axial loading device, the axial load-measuring device, and the triaxial chamber
to prevent the application of a lateral force to the piston during testing.
Attach the pressure-maintaining and measurement device.
Fill the chamber with the confining fluid to a predetermined level.
Adjust the pressure-maintaining and measurement device to the desired chamber pressure and
apply pressure to the chamber fluid.
If the axial load-measuring device is located outside the triaxial chamber, the chamber will
produce an upward force on the piston that will react against the axial loading device.
In this case start the test with piston slightly above the specimen cap, and before the piston
comes in contact with the specimen cap, either
Measure and record the initial piston friction and upward thrust of the piston produced by
the chamber pressure and later correct the measured axial load, or
Adjust the axial load-measuring device to compensate for the friction and thrust.
If the axial load-measuring device is located inside the chamber, it will not be necessary to
correct or compensate for the uplift force acting on the axial loading device or for piston
friction.
In either case, record the initial reading on the deformation indicator when the piston contacts
the specimen cap.
Using Controlled Strain
Approximately 10 minutes after the application of chamber pressure (see NOTE) begin to
apply the axial load so as to produce axial strain at a rate of approximately
1%/minute for plastic materials
0.3%/minute for brittle materials that achieve maximum deviator stress at approximately 3
to 6% strain.
At these rates, the elapsed time to reach maximum deviator stress will be approximately 15 to
20 minutes.
NOTE: The purpose of this time interval is to allow the specimen to stabilize under the chamber
pressure prior to application of the load.
Record load and deformation values at approximately 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, and 0.5% strain, and at
increments of about 0.5% strain, then to 3%; and thereafter at every 1%, except that the load
and deformation may be recorded at 2% increments of strain for strains greater than 10%.
19-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Step
11
Section 6 Procedure
Triaxial Compression Test for Undisturbed Soils

Action
Take sufficient readings to define the stress-strain curve; hence: more frequent readings may
be required in the early stages of the test and as failure is approached.
Continue the loading to 15% strain except:
Loading may be stopped when the deviator stress has peaked and dropped 20%; or
When 5% axial strain occurs after a peak in deviator stress.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 7
Calculations
Use the following equations to determine axial strain, average cross-sectional area, and
deviator stress.
Calculate Axial Strain ():
= L / L0
Where:
L = change in length of specimen as read from deformation indicator, mm (in.)
L0 = initial length of specimen minus any change in length prior to loading, mm

(in.).
Calculate the average cross-sectional area for a given applied axial load (Ap):
Ap = A0 / ( 1 )
Determine the principal stresses at failure:
minor principal stress (3):
3 = Chamber Pr essure
and
major principle stress (1):
1 = Deviator Stress at Failure plus Chamber Pr essure
Calculate the deviator stress for a given applied load:
( 1 3 ) = P / A p
Where:
A0 = initial average cross-sectional area of the specimen, m2 (in.2)
P = given applied axial load (corrected for uplift and piston friction, if required),
kPa (psi.).
NOTE: If the ratio of height to diameter of the specimen is less than two (2), make
allowance for the ratio of height to diameter by multiplying the compressive strength by
the applicable correction factor listed in the
'Interpolated Specimen Strength Correction Factors' table.
TxDOT 11/2004

NOTE: Correction of Strength Due to Stiffness of Rubber Membrane For most soils tested
using membranes as prescribed in 'Apparatus,' the correction is insignificant and can be
ignored; however, for the very soft soils, the membrane effect may be significant and
corrections may be necessary. If the correction needs to be made, follow the procedure
described in ASTM D 2850, 8.5, 'Correction for Rubber Membrane,' and 8.5.1, 'The
Young's Modulus.'
Graph the relationship between deviator stress (principal stress difference) and axial
strain, plotting deviator stress as ordinate and axial strain as abscissa. When testing a
large number of samples, failure occurs when the same stresses are obtained for 3 or
more consecutive strain readings.
Graph the circle of stress as shown in ' "Mohr's Diagram,'
Interpolated Specimen Strength Correction Factors Table

H/D
1.00
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
Factor
0.910
0.911
0.912
0.914
0.915
0.916
0.917
0.918
0.920
0.921
0.922
0.923
0.924
0.926
0.927
0.928
0.929
0.930
0.932
0.933
0.934
0.935
0.936
0.938
0.939
Interpolated Specimen Strength Correction Factors

H/D
Factor
H/D
Factor
1.25
1.26
1.27
1.28
1.29
1.30
1.31
1.32
1.33
1.34
1.35
1.36
1.37
1.38
1.39
1.40
1.41
1.42
1.43
1.44
1.45
1.46
1.47
1.48
1.49
0.940
0.941
0.942
0.944
0.945
.0945
0.947
0.948
0.950
0.951
0.952
0.953
0.954
0.956
0.957
0.958
0.959
0.960
0.962
0.963
0.964
0.965
0.966
0.968
0.969
1.50
1.51
1.52
1.53
1.54
1.55
1.56
1.57
1.58
1.59
1.60
1.61
1.62
1.63
1.64
1.65
1.66
1.67
1.68
1.69
1.70
1.71
1.72
1.73
1.74
0.970
0.971
0.972
0.974
0.975
0.975
0.976
0.977
0.978
0.979
0.979
0.980
0.981
0.982
0.983
0.983
0.984
0.985
0.986
0.986
0.987
0.988
0.988
0.989
0.989
H/D
Factor
1.75
1.76
1.77
1.78
1.79
1.80
1.81
1.82
1.83
1.84
1.85
1.86
1.87
1.88
1.89
1.90
1.91
1.92
1.93
1.94
1.95
1.96
1.97
1.98
1.99
2.00
0.990
0.991
0.991
0.992
0.992
0.993
0.993
0.994
0.994
0.995
0.995
0.996
0.996
0.996
0.997
0.997
0.997
0.998
0.998
0.998
0.999
0.999
0.999
0.999
1.000
1.000
TxDOT 11/2004

Figure 19-1. Mohr's Diagram.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 8 Report
Section 8
Report
Report the following information.
Sample identification
Moisture content, wet unit weight and degree of saturation (if soaked, note degree of
saturation attained)
The value of the compressive strength
Remarks: note any unusual conditions or other information that would be considered
necessary to properly interpret the results obtained.
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 20
Tex-120-E, Soil-Cement Testing
Contents:
Section 5 Part I, Compressive Strength Test Methods (Laboratory Mixed) ................. 20-6
Section 6 Part II, Compaction Testing of Road Mixed Material................................... 20-8
20-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 20 Tex-120-E, Soil-Cement Testing
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method consists of two parts.
'Part I, Compressive Strength Test Methods (Laboratory Mixed)' determines the

unconfined compressive strength of compacted soil-cement specimens after seven days
curing (10 lb. hammer, 18 inch drop, 25 blows/layer using 6 x 8 in. mold).
'Part II, Compaction Testing of Road Mixed Material' applies to cement treated
materials sampled from the roadway during construction.
20-2
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
as outlined in test methods:
"Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing"
"Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density

"Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression for Disturbed Soils and Base Materials"
compression testing machine with capacity of 267 kN (60,000 lb.), meeting

requirements of ASTM D 1633
triaxial screw jack press (Test Method "Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression for Disturbed
Soils and Base Materials") used when anticipated strengths are not in excess of 2758
kPa (400 psi).
20-3
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 3 Materials
Section 3
Materials
The following materials are necessary:
hydraulic (Portland) cement
tap water.
20-4
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 4
Preparing Sample
Select approximately 90 kg (200 lb.) of material to be treated with cement according to
'Part II, Preparing Samples for Compaction and Triaxial Tests' of Test Method "Tex-101-E,
Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing."
20-5
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 5 Part I, Compressive Strength Test

Methods (Laboratory Mixed)
Section 5
Part I, Compressive Strength Test Methods (Laboratory Mixed)
This part determines the unconfined compressive strength of compacted soil-cement
specimens after seven days curing.
Procedure
This procedure describes the steps necessary to measure compressive strength of laboratory
mixed soil-cement.
Step
1
2a
2b
2c
3
3a
3b
4
4a
4b
Compressive Strength Tests of Laboratory Mixed Soil-Cement

Action
Determine the optimum moisture content and maximum density for a soil-cement mixture
containing 6% cement, using Test Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction
The amount of cement added is a percentage based on the dry mass of the soil.
Recombine the sizes prepared according to 'Part II, Preparing Samples for Compaction and
Triaxial Tests' of Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base for Testing" to
make 3 individual samples and add the optimum moisture content, from Test Method
Tex-113-E, to each sample.
Mix thoroughly.
Cover the mixture to prevent loss of moisture by evaporation.
Allow the wetted samples to stand for at least 12 hours before compaction.
Prior to compaction, replace any evaporated water and thoroughly mix each specimen.
Add cement uniformly and mix thoroughly.
Compact the specimen in four layers using Test Method Tex-113, Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials" compactive effort.
Alter the percent molding water slightly as the percent cement is increased or decreased. Do this in
order to mold nearer optimum moisture without running a new M/D curve for each percentage of
cement.
NOTE: A new M/D curve for each percentage of cement may be performed, if desired.
Use the following rule to vary the molding water:
% molding water = % optimum moisture from M/D curve + 0.25 (% cement increase), where
% cement increase = difference in cement content between curve and other cement contents.
Using the moisture contents outlined above, mold 3 specimens for each cement content using 4, 8,
and 10% cement to complete the full set.
After the top surface of each specimen has been leveled and the specimen measured, carefully
center over porous stone and remove specimen from mold by means of small press.
Place a card on each specimen showing the laboratory identification number and the percent of
cement.
NOTE: In calculating the actual dry density of laboratory mix soil-cement specimens, the dry mass
of material is the total mass of oven dry soil in the specimen plus the mass of cement. The
amount of moisture should be the mass of hygroscopic moisture in the soil plus the amount of
water added based on the dry mass of the soil plus cement. Road mixed and wetted materials
20-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Step
5
Compressive Strength Tests of Laboratory Mixed Soil-Cement

Action
and soil-cement cores shall have moisture and density determined from the oven dry masses.
Store test specimens the same day they are molded, with top and bottom porous stones, in the
damp room for 7 days.
Do not subject specimen to capillary wetting or a surcharge. A triaxial cell is not used.
A pan may be placed on top of the top porous stone to protect the specimen from dripping
water.
Remove test specimens from the damp room and use a cloth to remove any free water on
surface of specimen.
The specimens are now ready for compressive strength test.
Test Report
Include the following items in the report:
Molding moisture to the nearest 0.1%
Dry density to the nearest 1 kg/m3 (0.1 pcf)
Unconfined compressive strength to the nearest whole kPa (psi) for each cement content
tested
Recommended cement content to the nearest 0.5 percent.
NOTE 1: Store cement in airtight container or use fresh supply.

NOTE 2: When comparing laboratory strengths with roadway strength, use the H/D
correction factors in the 'Interpolated Specimen Strength Correction Factors' table of
Test Method "Tex-118-E, Triaxial Compression Test for Undisturbed Soils," on both
laboratory and roadway specimens.
20-7
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 6 Part II, Compaction Testing of Road

Mixed Material
Section 6
Part II, Compaction Testing of Road Mixed Material
This part applies to cement treated materials sampled from the roadway during construction.
Procedure
The following procedure describes the steps necessary to perform compaction testing of
road mixed material.
Step
1
2
2a
2b
3
3a
3b
Compaction Testing of Road Mixed Material

Action
Samples for moisture/density curve should be obtained just prior to the start of compaction
operations on the roadway.
Cement stabilized materials taken from the roadway during construction should be screened over a
6.3 mm (1/4 in.) sieve at field moisture content, without drying.
Mix each of these two sizes, plus 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) and minus 6.3 mm (1/4 in.), for uniformity and
weigh.
Cover each size fraction to maintain field moisture.
Recombine and mold one specimen at the field moisture condition and estimated mass to
produce specimen compacted using Test Method
Base Materials" compactive effort.
Molding should be accomplished using the same equipment and compactive effort as in 'Part I,
Compressive Strength Test Methods (Laboratory Mixed).'
Adjust mass, if necessary, and weigh out not less than two additional specimens at the field
moisture content for compaction.
Molding moisture can be adjusted in each specimen by adding or removing moisture uniformly
as needed.
Compact cement stabilized material in the laboratory in approximately the same time frame as
on the road.
Compaction sample of cement stabilized material from the road mix should not be prepared by
oven drying.
NOTE 3: To determine moisture-density relationship of fine-grained materials with less than

20% retained on the 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) sieve and 100% passing the 9.5 mm (3/8 in.)
sieve, the engineer may elect to use a mold with approximate dimensions of 101.6 mm
(4.0 in.) in diameter by 152.4 mm (6.0 in.) in height. The number of blows must be
calculated when changing mold size to maintain a compactive effort of 1100 kN-m /m3
(13.26 ft-lb/in3).
NOTE 4: The contractor should be provided an initial optimum moisture based on
preliminary laboratory tests.
Test Report
Include the following items in the report:
20-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Mixed Material
Report density to nearest 1 k/m3 (0.1 pcf)
Report moisture content to nearest 0.1 %.
20-9
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 21
Tex-121-E, Soil-Lime Testing
Contents:
Section 5 Part I, Compressive Strength Test Methods (Laboratory Mixed) ................. 21-6
Section 6 Part II, Compaction Testing of Road Mixed Material................................... 21-9
Section 7 Part III, Determining Stabilization Ability of Lime by Soil pH .................. 21-10
Section 8 Archived Versions ....................................................................................... 21-13
21-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 21 Tex-121-E, Soil-Lime Testing
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
Effective date: August 2002 (refer to 'Archived Versions' for previous versions).
This method consists of two parts.
'Part I, Compressive Strength Test Methods (Laboratory Mixed)' determines the

unconfined compressive strength as an index of the effectiveness of hydrated lime
treatment in improving desirable properties in flexible base and subgrade materials (10
lb. hammer, 18 inch drop, 50 blows/layer using 6 x 8 in. mold).
'Part II, Compaction Testing of Road Mixed Material' applies to lime treated materials
sampled from the roadway during construction.
21-2
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
apparatus outlined in test methods:

"Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression Tests for Disturbed Soils and Base Materials"
compression testing machine with capacity of 267 kN (60,000 lb.), meeting the
triaxial screw jack press, if anticipated strengths do not exceed 2758 kPa (400 psi.).
21-3
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 3 Materials
Section 3
Materials
hydrated lime
tap water.
21-4
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 4
Preparing Sample
Select approximately 91 kg (200 lb.) of material and prepare according to 'Part II, Preparing
Samples for Compaction and Triaxial Tests' of Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and
Flexible Base Materials for Testing."
21-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5
Part I, Compressive Strength Test Methods (Laboratory Mixed)
This part determines the unconfined compressive strength as an index of the effectiveness of
hydrated lime treatment in improving desirable properties in flexible base and subgrade
materials.
Procedure
The following procedure describes the steps necessary to determine the compressive
strength of laboratory mixed soil-lime.
Step
1
2
3
3a
3b
3c
3d
4
4a
4b
5
5a
6
Compressive Strength Tests for Laboratory Mixed Soil-Lime

Action
Determine the optimum water content and maximum dry density for the soil-lime mixture using Test
Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of
Base Materials."
Determine the amount of lime needed based on the dry mass of the soil.
NOTE: Store lime in an air-tight container or use a fresh supply.
Triaxial Tests' of Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for
Testing" to make 3 individual samples and add the optimum moisture content.
Mix thoroughly and cover the mixture to prevent loss of moisture by evaporation.
A standing time of at least 12 hours is required for materials with a PI greater than or equal to12.
When the PI is less than 12, the standing time may be reduced to not less than 3 hours. Split or
referee samples should stand the full term.
Prior to compaction, replace any evaporated water and thoroughly mix each specimen.
Add the desired amount of lime uniformly to a specimen and mix thoroughly.
Following Test Method Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and MoistureDensity Relationship of Base Materials" compact three specimens, 152.4 mm (6 in.) in diameter
and 203.2 mm (8 in.) in height, at the optimum moisture content found in Step 1.
May use a 101.6 mm (4 in.) diameter mold 152.4 mm (6 in.) high when the material meets the
requirements of NOTE 1.
Lime-treated subgrade soil specimens should be compacted as nearly identical as possible and three
specimens cured and tested for unconfined compression.
If the material to be improved by lime treatment is a flexible base material, the unconfined
compression test is used to evaluate the strength.
Compact three identical specimens for each percentage of hydrated lime, cure and test for
unconfined compression.
Cover specimens with top and bottom porous stones and place in triaxial cells immediately after
extrusion from molds.
Store specimens at room temperature for 7 days of moist curing at room temperature on the counter
top.
After curing, remove cells and place the specimens in an air dryer oven at a temperature not to
exceed 60 C (140 F) for about 6 hours or until one-third to one-half of the molding moisture
has been removed.
All lime-treated soils are dried as given above even though a considerable amount of cracking
21-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Step
Compressive Strength Tests for Laboratory Mixed Soil-Lime

Action
may occur.
Allow the specimens to cool to room temperature before continuing the test.
Weigh, measure and enclose the specimens in triaxial cells and subject them to capillarity for ten
days.
Use a constant lateral pressure of 6.9 kPa (1 psi), and a surcharge pressure of 3.4 kPa (1/2 psi) for
base to 6.9 kPa (1 psi) for subgrade depending upon the use of the material being tested. (A wet
room is not required for this curing.)
Test the specimens for unconfined compression without a cell.
A compression testing machine of adequate range and sensitivity may be used.
NOTE 1: To determine moisture-density relationship of fine-grained materials with less than

20 % retained on the 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) sieve and 100 % passing the 9.5 mm (3/8 in.)
sieve, the engineer may elect to use a mold with approximate dimensions of 101.6 mm
(4.0 in.) in diameter by 152.4 mm (6.0 in.) in height. The number of blows must be
calculated when changing mold size to maintain a compactive effort of 1100 kN-m /m3
(13.26 ft-lb/in3).
Calculations and Graphs
Calculate, plot and interpret test data for the unconfined compression test. Lime stabilized
clay soils are not recommended for top course of base, regardless of strength.
Test Report
Include the following data on the test report:
Strength value, reported to the nearest whole kPa (psi) for each lime content tested
Density, reported to the nearest 1 kg/m3 (0.1 pcf)
Optimum moisture content, reported to the nearest 0.1 %
Recommended lime content, reported to the nearest 0.5 %.
NOTE: This test determines the quality of soils treated with lime to be used for subbase or
base protected with a wearing surface. Flexible base materials and granular soils can
usually be stabilized with about 3% lime. A larger amount of lime may be required to
improve the strength of a very plastic clay subgrade. Unconfined compressive strength
of 1035 kPa (150 psi) is satisfactory for final course of base construction and it is
desirable that materials for such courses contain a minimum of 50 percent plus 425 m
(No. 40) before treatment.
21-7
TxDOT 11/2004

The amounts of lime from 'Recommended Amounts of Lime for Stabilization of Subgrades
and Bases') are recommended amounts for stabilization of sub-grade soils and base
materials. These percentages of lime should be substantiated by these methods to insure
adequate strengths. Unconfined compressive strengths of at least 345 kPa (50 psi) are
suggested as adequate for subbase soils treated with lime. It is possible for short term tests of
soil-lime mixes, using smaller percentages of lime, to give misleading results due to field
variations in materials, mixing, lower densities and so forth.
21-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Mixed Material
Section 6
Part II, Compaction Testing of Road Mixed Material
This part applies to lime treated materials sampled from the roadway during construction.
Procedure
This procedure lists the steps to test the compaction of road mixed material.
Step
1
1a
2
2a
2b
2c
2d
2e
2f
2g
Compaction Testing of Road Mixed Material

Action
Obtain samples for the moisture/density curve just prior to the start of compaction operations on
the roadway.
If the material on the roadway is reworked and re-compacted for any reason, it will be necessary to
obtain samples just prior to re-compaction of the reworked material for a new curve representing
the reworked material.
Lime stabilized materials taken from the roadway during construction for density and/or strength
testing should be screened over a 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) sieve at field moisture content, without drying.
Mix each size for uniformity and record the weight.
Cover each size material, plus 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) and minus 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) to maintain field
moisture.
Recombine one representative specimen and mold at the field moisture condition.
Adjust mass, if necessary, and weigh out specimens for compaction and strength testing, if desired.
Molding moisture can be adjusted in each specimen by adding or removing moisture in the total
specimen uniformly as needed.
Lime stabilized material should be sampled, prepared and molded during the same day compaction
operations begin on the project.
Molding should be accomplished using the same equipment and compactive effort as in 'Part I,
Compressive Strength Test Methods (Laboratory Mixed).'
NOTE: Compaction sample of lime-stabilized material from the road mix should not be prepared
by oven drying.
NOTE: The contractor should be provided an initial optimum moisture based on preliminary
tests.
Test Report
Include the following information on the test report:
Density, reported to the nearest 1 kg/m3 (0.1 pcf)
Optimum water content, reported to the nearest to 0.1 %.
21-9
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 7 Part III, Determining Stabilization

Ability of Lime by Soil pH
Section 7
Part III, Determining Stabilization Ability of Lime by Soil pH
Use this part to determine the stabilization ability of lime by soil pH.
Apparatus
The following apparatus required:
same as for Test Method "Tex-128-E, Determining Soil pH."
Materials
The following materials are necessary:
Same as for Test Method "Tex-128-E, Determining Soil pH."
Preparing Sample
Use the same sample preparation as described in Test Method "Tex-128-E, Determining in
Soil pH."
TxDOT 11/2004

Procedure
The following table describes the steps necessary to determine the stabilization ability of
lime by soil pH.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Determining the Stabilization Ability of Lime by Soil pH

Action
Heat sample and approximately 1400 mL (47.5 fl. oz.) of distilled water to 45 - 60 C (112 - 140
F) in separate containers.
Weigh to the nearest 0.01 g a series of 30 g samples of soil and place in separate containers.
Weigh to the nearest 0.01 a series of quantities of lime equivalent to 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10% of the
total dry soil sample.
Add one of the lime percentages to each of the soil samples, add 150 mL (5 fl. oz.) of distilled
water to each combination and stir vigorously.
Stir the samples every 15 minutes for one hour to disperse the soil and make sure all soluble
material is in solution.
At the end of an hour, record the temperature of the mixture and adjust the pH meter to that
temperature.
Standardize the meter (buffer solution of pH 7.0) according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
(If the meter allows multiple standardizations, standardize the meter to buffer solutions of pH 7.0
and 10.0).
Clean electrode with distilled water.
NOTE: If scratches are noticed on glass bulb of electrode, replace with new electrode.
Check the pH of each sample as described in steps 7-9 of
'Determining the pH of Soils in an Aqueous Solution' in Test Method "Tex-128-E, Determining
Soil pH" and record.
Plot the pH of the samples versus the percent lime (pH on the y-axis, %lime on the x-axis.) see
'pH versus Percent Lime.'
If the pH readings are 12.4 or higher, the lowest percentage of lime that gives a pH of 12.4 is the
% required to stabilize the soil.
If the pH readings do not go beyond pH of 12.3 and two percentages give this reading, the
lowest % of lime to give a pH of 12.3 is the % required to stabilize the soil.
If the highest pH reading is a pH of 12.3 and only the highest percentage of lime used gives a
pH of 12.3, additional testing is required using higher percentages of lime.
TxDOT 11/2004

Figure 21-1. pH versus Percent Lime.

Report
Report the recommended percent lime to the nearest 0.1%.
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 8
Archived Versions
Archived versions of Test Method "Tex-121-E, Soil-Lime Testing" are available through the
following links:
Click on 121-0899 for the test procedure effective August 1999 through July 2002.
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 22
Tex-123-E, Determining the Drainage Factor of Soil
Materials
Contents:
Section 6 Precautions..................................................................................................... 22-8
Section 8 Reporting Test Results................................................................................. 22-10
Section 9 Interpretation of Results .............................................................................. 22-11
22-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 22 Tex-123-E, Determining the Drainage

Factor of Soil Materials
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the drainage factor, DF, of soil materials. A study of the drainage
factor of soils is valuable in the placement of a base or subbase on a clay subgrade. It should
be recognized that a soil may have as many drainage factors as densities and moisture
contents.
22-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2
Definitions
drainage factor (of a soil) - Drainage factor of a soil is the number of cubic centimeters
of water per hour that will drain through a standard size 152 x 203 mm (6 x 8 in.)
triaxial specimen, when molded according to Test Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory
Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials," and
subjected to drainage water under the following conditions: Drainage factor apparatus
shall be the falling head type with an initial head of water equivalent to 762 mm (30 in.)
above the top of the specimen; the water reservoir shall be 127 mm (5 in.) in diameter
by 254 mm (10 in.) tall. A pressure of at least 13.8 kPa (2 psi) lateral and vertical shall
be maintained on the specimen during the test.
drainage factor (of undisturbed soils). - Drainage factor of a soil is the number of cubic
centimeters of water per hour that will drain through a standard size 152 x 203 mm (6 x
8 in.) triaxial specimen, when molded according to Test Method "Tex-113-E,
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base
Materials," and subjected to drainage water under the following conditions: Drainage
factor apparatus shall be the falling head type with an initial head of water equivalent to
762 mm (30 in.) above the top of the specimen; the water reservoir shall be 127 mm (5
in.) in diameter by 254 mm (10 in.) tall. A pressure of at least 13.8 kPa (2 psi) lateral
and vertical shall be maintained on the specimen during the test.
22-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
apparatus used in Test Method "Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression Tests for Disturbed
Soils and Base Materials"
circular loading plate, 152 mm (6 in.) in diameter and drilled for free passage of water
(see 'Drainage Factor Apparatus' )
upper and lower cylindrical loading heads with fittings 152 mm (6 in.) in diameter (see
'Drainage Factor Apparatus')
triaxial test cells
small proving ring
loading press assembly
water reservoir bottle, 127 mm (5 in.) diameter by 254 mm (10 in.) height
drilled loading plate, 152 mm (6 in.) size (see 'Drainage Factor Apparatus').
Figure 22-1. Drainage Factor Apparatus.
22-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4
Preparing Sample
Tests' of Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing."
22-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5 Procedure
Section 5
Procedure
The table below lists the steps to determine the drainage factor of soil materials.
Step
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Determining the Drainage Factor of Soil Materials

Action
Determine the optimum moisture and wet or dry density as outlined in test methods "Tex-113-E,
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials," or
Subgrade & Embankment Soils," whichever is appropriate for the material being tested.
Mold two specimens at optimum moisture and density for testing.
During the removal of the last layer from the mixing pan, a trowel, wide putty knife or other
convenient tool should be used to scrape out the pan.
No attempt should be made to brush out the small fraction of clay that clings to the pan as this
material usually has the highest plasticity index and when placed on top of the specimen
leaves an impervious or nearly impervious cap or spot when the specimen is completely
finished on top.
These spots or cap could seriously affect the drainage characteristics.
Weigh and measure the specimen to obtain the moisture-density relations and extrude from the
mold, using bottom stone.
Cap the specimen with a top stone, deflate a regular triaxial cell and place around the specimenstone assembly.
Allow unstabilized soils and bases to cure overnight in cells before testing.
Allow lime or cement specimens to cure 7 days in cells before testing.
After curing, as in Step 5 or 6 above, the specimens are ready to test.
Deflate the triaxial cell and remove cell from specimen.
Remove the top stone and replace with the drilled loading plate.
Place specimen, with lower stone, on the bottom loading head.
Deflate the triaxial cell and place it around the specimen.
Place the top loading head on top of the loading plate making sure head and plate are
centered.
Examine top and bottom heads to insure good contact and spacing of cell membrane and
rubber "O" rings on top and bottom heads. This helps prevent leakage of water.
Using the sheet metal funnel around the bottom stone (see detail in
'Drainage Factor Apparatus' ) permits the use of the regular 305 mm (12 in.) triaxial cell and
allows the bottom "O" rings to be left off.
Remove the vacuum from the cell and allow the cell membrane to return to normal. The specimen
is now ready to be tested.
Place cell-specimen assembly in testing press.
Place the dial housing in position and make contact, but no load, with the proving ring.
Connect the water supply line, with water inlet valve closed, to the upper head.
Open the air relief valve (see 'Assembly for Drainage Factor Test' ).
Connect the air supply to the test cell and apply 13.8 kPa (2 psi) of air pressure.
With the loading press, apply a vertical load of 13.8 kPa (2 psi) to the specimen (see 'Assembly
for Drainage Factor Test').
NOTE: If a loading press and proving ring are not available, dead loads may be used.
Fill water reservoir with top siphon working and open valve to fill apparatus.
Close air relief valve as soon as water begins to stream out.
22-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Step
19
20
21
22
23
24
Section 5 Procedure
Determining the Drainage Factor of Soil Materials

Action
Observe specimen until water begins to drain through the specimen at a uniform rate into the
graduated cylinder or catchment bottle.
Check top and bottom seals on heads for leaks.
When the rate looks uniform, even though slow in some soils, fill the water reservoir to the
762 mm (30 in.) mark above the top of the specimen.
Note or record the time and begin test.
Stop test, observe time, weigh or measure water drained through and calculate DF in cc/hr.
The length of this test will vary with the DF, some soils will drain 500 to 1000 cc in a few
minutes while others will take several hours to drain a few cc's of water.
The test should be continued to a point where DF is reliable from a time-water drained
standpoint.
DF is considered as zero if no water appears in 48 hours.
Remove specimen from machine and from cell.
Examine specimen for signs of piping.
Break specimen open and thoroughly inspect it for evidence of wetting due to drainage.
If specimen appears dry, but water drained though during test, then piping is likely.
Test the second specimen to see if piping has occurred or if there is reason to suspect the
results.
Figure 22-2. Assembly for Drainage Factor Test.
22-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6 Precautions
Section 6
Precautions
Specimens that have excessive water leakage when tested at 13.8 kPa (2 psi) should be tried
at 34.5 kPa (5 psi) lateral and vertical pressures. When these difficulties continue it usually
denotes very rough sides on the specimen. The sides should be painted with two or three
coats of rubber cement.
All asphalt, cement and lime cores should be painted with three coats of rubber cement on
the sides before testing. Cores shall be 152.4 mm (6 in.) in diameter and at least 152.4 mm
(6 in.) in length.
The rubber membrane in the test cell should be thin, about 1.524 mm (0.060 in.), flexible,
and elastic to be effective. Thicker membranes tend to be stiff, and low lateral pressures (of
the order used in this test), often allow piping on rougher-sided specimens.
Specimens of sandy or low P.I. soil with large amounts of fines should not be tested over
and over. Fine sizes in these materials tend to migrate or block the drainage of water and
subsequent tests on the same specimen tend to have smaller and smaller DFs. Only the first
or greatest value for DF should be used.
22-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 7
Calculations
Use the following equation to determine the drainage factor over the test period:
DF = V D / LT
Where:
VD = Volume of water drained through during test in cubic centimeters
LT = Length of test in hrs.
22-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 8
Report the following information:
Soil constants and gradation
Moisture-density relations and DF on form similar to 'Form for Reporting Drainage

Factor Test,'
DF results to nearest whole number.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 9 Interpretation of Results
Section 9
Interpretation of Results
In considering the results of the drainage factor tests of soils making up the various layers of
a roadway structure, it is usually far better to keep out gravity or surface water altogether.
Values of DF should be zero or as low as they can be made.
Usually it will be better to have values for DF lowest in the base and increasing in value
for each subsequent layer in the road being designed. This should insure good drainage
of the system.
At the present time, the DF test should be used to determine the relative values of the
materials being tested and allow the recommendation of one material over another when DF
values are different. For example, a base material which had a high DF would be unsuitable
over a heavy clay sub-grade but may serve very well on a sandy sub-grade with a high DF
also.
When stabilized sub-layers are used, the increasing DF for sub-layers probably will not
remain stable because most stabilized layers have low (if not zero) values for DF. In cases
like this, it is recommended that values of DF in the layers above the stabilized layers be
kept low also, but it is not as essential as if the layers were not stabilized.
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 23
Tex-124-E, Determining Potential Vertical Rise
Contents:
Section 4 Sampling ........................................................................................................ 23-5
Section 6 Test Report................................................................................................... 23-12
Section 7 Notes ............................................................................................................ 23-13
23-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 23 Tex-124-E, Determining Potential

Vertical Rise
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This procedure determines the potential vertical rise (PVR) in soil strata, such as may be
encountered in the placement of a roadway, bridge, or building foundation.
23-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Vertical Rise
Section 2
Definitions
potential vertical rise - Potential Vertical Rise is expressed in millimeters (inches), is

the latent or potential ability of a soil material to swell, at a given density, moisture, and
loading condition, when exposed to capillary or surface water, and thereby increase the
elevation of its upper surface, along with anything resting on it.
liquid limit - A liquid limit (LL) is the moisture content expressed as a percentage of
the weight of oven-dried soil, at which soil changes from a plastic to a liquid state. It is
the moisture content of a soil at which two halves of a soil part, separated by a grove of
standard dimension (1 cm deep) will join at the length of 1/2 inch under impact of 25
blows using the Mechanical Liquid Limit Device, and Test Method "Tex-104-E,
Determining Liquid Limits of Soils." The percent of moisture in a soil sample where a
decrease in moisture changes from a viscous or liquid state to a plastic state.
plasticity index - Plasticity index is a test conducted on soil samples as set out in Test
Method "Tex-106-E, Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils." The plasticity index is a
range of moisture in which a soil remains in a plastic state while passing from a
semisolid state to liquid state. Numerical difference between Liquid Limit and Plastic
Limit of a soil (PI = LL - PL) using Test Method "Tex-106-E, Calculating the Plasticity
Index of Soils."
overburden - The overburden is the soil above the layer or layers being investigated.
Example: A clay layer covered with 3.1 m (10 ft.) of sand would have 3.1 m (10 ft.) of
overburden on it.
layer - Layer is a horizontal soil structure of uniform or nearly uniform material. When
the material changes due to moisture, density, or composition, a new layer is considered
to have been created.
loading - Loading is the load (vertical pressure) per unit area in kPa (lb/ft2) from both
the structure and overburden of each layer of soil involved.
moisture preservation. - Moisture preservation is the use of "Blanket Sections" with

wide shoulders consisting of granular materials, stabilized soils, or where asphalt
membranes are applied for this purpose.
23-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Vertical Rise
Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
apparatus as listed in test methods:
'Part I, Preparing Samples for Soil Constants and Particle Size Analysis ' of
"Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials"
"Tex-105-E, Determining Plastic Limit of Soils"
supply of paraffin, small cutting knives, etc.
sampling device, core-drilling rig equipped to take disturbed or undisturbed core

samples of the material in place.
NOTE: Undisturbed cores are not absolutely necessary if an approximation of the wet
density is known.
23-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Vertical Rise
Section 4 Sampling
Section 4
Sampling
Perform exploration and sampling according to the Bridge Division's Geotechnical Manual
except that greater emphasis must be placed on sampling of top strata layering to a depth of
4.5 m (15 ft.) in most cases, and as much as 6.0 m (20 ft.) when very highly expansive clays
are encountered.
In some instances, the presence of rock, gravel, or sand substrata will eliminate the
necessity for drilling a large number of deep exploration holes.
Thickness' of soil layers, especially clay layers, existing below the proposed structure
should be determined.
In the case of massive clay layers, the maximum depth to investigate will depend on the
position and amount of load proposed and the expansive characteristics of the clay.
Secure cores or cuttings to represent these layers as shown in the 'Drilling Log.'
In sampling, all holes should be logged and moisture contents determined.
Figure 23-1 Drilling Log.
23-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Vertical Rise
Section 5 Procedure
Section 5
Procedure
The following steps are necessary to determine potential vertical rise.
If only cuttings were taken during sampling, determine the moisture content of each
layer according to Test Method "Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil
Materials."
If core samples were paraffined for moisture preservation, use those samples in this
procedure.
It is preferable to take moisture samples for each layer at the time of sampling,
regardless of whether cores or cuttings were taken.
For core sampling, select cores representative of each swelling layer.
Trim cores into right circular cylinders using knives or other convenient hand tools.
Measure the height, h, and diameter, D, and calculate the volume of the core in
cubic meters (cubic feet).
Determine the mass of the wet core to the nearest 0.5 g.
Calculate the wet density by dividing the wet mass by the volume of the core and
record to the nearest 0.02 kg/m3 (0.001 lb./ft.3).
NOTE: If only cuttings are taken during sampling, use a wet density of 2002.5 kg/m3 (125
lb./ft.3), which is usually a reasonable value. Other accepted methods for determining
density of cores, such as set forth by paraffin coatings in Test Method "Tex-207-F,
Determining Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures," may be used, if desired.
From representative portions of the cuttings or cores, determine the Liquid Limit (LL),
Plasticity Index (PI), and percent soil binder in the soil layers according to test methods:
'Part I, Preparing Samples for Soil Constants and Particle Size Analysis' of
"Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing," respectively.
Record the test results.
In calculating the PVR, it is convenient or preferable to use 0.6 m (2 ft.) elements or

layers, provided the moisture contents and the log of the hole will permit.
The use of 0.6 m (2 ft.) layers and the assumption of 2002.5 kg/m3 (125 lb./ft.3)
wet density, which is usually a reasonable wet density, makes the tabulation
simpler.
The modification caused by using 2002.5 kg/m3 (125 lb./ft.3) rather than 2307
kg/m3 (144 lb./ft.3), for 22.6 kPa/m (1 psi/ft.), has already been incorporated into
the curves on 'Relation of Load to Potential Vertical Rise (No. 1),' and
'Relation of Load to Potential Vertical Rise (No. 2).'
23-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Vertical Rise
Section 5 Procedure
Where wet densities vary from 2002.5 kg/m3 (125 lb./ft.3), and greater accuracy is
desired, a modification factor should be applied to that layer equivalent to 2002.5
kg/m3 (125 pcf) divided by the actual wet density.
NOTE: In the 0.6 m (2 ft.) layer at the surface, the "average" load in the layer is 6.9 kPa (1
psi); likewise, in the 0.6 to 1.2 m (2 to 4 ft.) layer, the load is 13.8 kPa (2 psi) for the top
0.6 m (2 ft.) plus one half of the 0.6 to 1.2 m (2 to 4 ft.) layer or 20.7 kPa (3 psi) total.
Therefore, the average load in any 0.6 m (2 ft.) layer is the average depth of the layer
(subject to the correction factor as described above).
Beginning with the logging data for the top layer at the surface of the ground, start
compilation of the Example Calculation).
Determine average load in each layer (column 2).
Record the liquid limit for each layer (column 3).
The value of 0.2 LL + 9, in the 'Example Calculation,' represents the "dry" condition
from which little shrinkage is experienced, but where volumetric swell potential is
greatest.
It is the minimum moisture content swelling clays usually dry to.
Record this value in column 4.
The "wet" condition (0.47 LL + 2), in the 'Example Calculation,' corresponds to the
maximum capillary absorption by laboratory tests on specimens molded at optimum
moisture and surcharged with 6.9 kPa (1 psi) load.
This is also analogous to moisture contents found beneath old pavements or other
lightweight structures.
This is the "optimum" condition.
Record this value in column 5.
Determine whether the layers are "wet," "dry," or "average" by comparing actual
moisture content with "dry" (column 4) and "wet" (column 5) values.
The layer is considered "average" if the moisture content is closer to the average of
the "wet" and "dry" conditions.
The percent moisture values from the samples are recorded in column 6.
Examine the test record forms and enter the percent soil binder (% minus 425 m [No.
40] material) and the P.I. of the layers in column 8 and 9, respectively.
Locate the P.I. of the first soil layer on the abscissa in

'Interrelationship of P.I. and Volume Change.'
Move upward to the appropriate swell line (dry, average or wet) and read the
percent volumetric change on the ordinate.
This percent volumetric change is for 6.9 kPa (1 psi) surcharge.
Record this as "% Vol. Swell" in column 10.
23-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Vertical Rise
Section 5 Procedure
The PVR vs. Load Curves in 'Relation of Load to Potential Vertical Rise (No. 1),' and
'Relation of Load to Potential Vertical Rise (No. 2),' are for free swelling clays under
no load and are based on a wet density of soil of 2002.5 kg/m3 (125 lb./ft.3).
In order to use these curves, the swelling determined from 'Interrelationship of P.I.
and Volume Change' needs to be converted to the swelling under no load by % Free
Swell = (% Vol. Swell @ 6.895 kPa) (1.07) + 2.6.
Record as "% Free Swell" in column 11.
Determine the PVRs from 'Relation of Load to Potential Vertical Rise (No. 1)' or
'Relation of Load to Potential Vertical Rise (No. 2),' as follows:
In the first layer, 0 - 0.6 m (0 - 2 ft.), read the ordinate (PVR) at 6.9 kPa (1 psi) load
and the corresponding percent free swell curve and record on the Example
Calculation as "Bottom of Layer."
From the same curve, read the PVR at the "Top of Layer" with corresponding load,
zero in the case of this layer. Record on 'Example Calculation' as "Top of Layer."
The difference in the two readings is the PVR in the first layer. Record this in
column 14.
The PVR value in column 14 is modified when % minus 425 m (No. 40) (column
8) is greater than or equal to 25 %.
The correction factor is equal to the % minus 425 m (No. 40) material divided by
100.
Correction factors for density are obtained as described in Step 4 and recorded in
column 16.
Multiply the difference in PVR (column 14) by the two correction factors (column
15 & 16) and record the results in column 17.
Next, take the second layer and determine the percent volumetric swell by modifying
the value determined from 'Interrelationship of P.I. and Volume Change.'
On this percent volumetric swell curve, or a sketched in penciled curve where the
line is not actually on 'Relation of Load Potential Vertical Rise (No. 1)' or
'Relation of Load Potential Vertical Rise (No. 2)' read the PVR on the ordinate
corresponding to 20.7 kPa (3 psi) (bottom of layer) and record on the 'Example
Calculation' table. Read the ordinate corresponding to 6.9 kPa (1 psi) (top of layer)
from the same curve and record.
The difference in the two readings is the swelling in the second layer, subject to
any density or soil binder minus 425 m (No.40) modifications.
Continue determining PVR in each layer until each swelling layer has been loaded out
as determined by the curves on 'Relation of Load to Potential Vertical Rise (No. 1)' and
'Relation of Load to Potential Vertical Rise (No. 2)' leveling out horizontally and
indicated by no difference when PVR is read from that curve.
Actually, the swell is negligible or zero anywhere beyond the end of any given
curve as shown on these two figures.
23-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Vertical Rise
Section 5 Procedure
Thicker layers may be used in this calculation where they consist of uniform soil
having similar P.I. and moisture contents.
Check each layer for modifications for density factor and soil binder.
Add the PVR in all layers to obtain the total PVR for the site.
NOTE: The Example Calculation table has been calculated for no loading due to the
structure. When loads due to the structures are known, then simply add it in "Average
Load, kPa (psi)" and increase each figure in the column by the amount of structure load,
but note that the swell will be reduced because of increased loading.
Figure 23-2. Relation of Load to Potential Vertical Rise (No. 1).
23-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Vertical Rise
Section 5 Procedure
Figure 23-3. Relation of Load to Potential Vertical Rise (No. 2).
TxDOT 11/2004

Vertical Rise
Section 5 Procedure
Figure 23-4. Interrelationship of P.I. and Volume Change.
TxDOT 11/2004

Vertical Rise
Section 6 Test Report
Section 6
Test Report
To report the test results, submit a copy of the 'Example Calculation,' with appropriate job
and site identifications.
TxDOT 11/2004

Vertical Rise
Section 7 Notes
Section 7
Notes
Often, during design, it is necessary to estimate PVR without knowing moisture contents
anticipated at time of construction. In cases of this kind, the design and planning of the job
should influence the choice of line on 'Interrelationship of P.I. and Volume Change' to be
selected for use.
If the project exists in an arid to semiarid climate and the plans and specifications do not
provide for moisture-density control or preservation of moisture, use the line for 0.2 LL
+ 9.
If the plans and specifications require moisture-density control and moisture

preservation, use the average line.
In the high rainfall areas, use the average line where moisture preservation is provided
for, but if moisture-density control and moisture preservation are provided for, use the
lower line (0.47 LL + 2) on 'Interrelationship of P.I. and Volume Change.'
The determination of PVR in deep cut sections or deep side hill cuts presents a special case
of this test method.
In the case of these two conditions, the material is surcharged in such a manner that the
movement from swell is mostly in one direction
in some high rainfall areas could be greater than that obtained by use of these
procedures.
When layers of expansive clays of less than 0.6 m (2 ft.) exist, (Example: 1.2 to 1.4 m [4 to
4.6 ft.]) it is preferable to enter the abscissa of the proper swell curve at 1.2 and 1.4 m (4 and
4.6 ft.), respectively; and use the difference in the respective ordinate readings as the
unmodified swell in the 0.2 m (0.6 ft.) thick layer.
At optimum conditions the following relationships are valid from 'Interrelationship of P.I.
and Volume Change':
Percent Volumetric swell at 6.9 kPa (1 psi) surcharge = 0.217 (PI) - 2.9.
Percent free swell = 0.232 (PI) - 0.5.
For average conditions up to Plasticity Indexes of about 60, the following relationships are
valid from 'Interrelationship of P.I. and Volume Change':
Percent Volumetric swell at 6.9 kPa (1 psi) surcharge = 0.294 (P.I.) - 2.9.
Percent free swell = 0.314 (P.I.) - 0.5.
'Relation of Load to the Volume Change of Swelling Clay Soil' giving Family Member
Curves, will be useful in determining equivalent swell, such as where a cut is made through
a swelling clay hillside.
For example, assume that in cutting through a clayey hillside, a soil representing 41.4
kPa (6 psi) load is removed.
TxDOT 11/2004

Vertical Rise
Section 7 Notes
The 54 P.I. Soil is found to have a moisture content near 0.2 LL + 9 (dry condition).
The percent volumetric swell, at 1 psi surcharge, from 'Interrelationship of P.I. and
Volume Change,' (top curve) is 16%.
On 'Relation of Load to the Volume Change of Swelling Clay Soil,' plot the point, 6.9
kPa (1 psi) abscissa and 16% volumetric swell. This point is on, or slightly below, the
20% swell member curve.
Now add 41.4 kPa (6 psi) by moving parallel to the abscissa to the point 48.3 kPa (7
psi) abscissa and 16% volumetric swell. This point is on or about the 29.5% family
member curve.
If necessary, sketch in this curve in pencil similar to the 30% curve and follow this
curve upwards to where it crosses the 6.9 kPa (1 psi) load and then read 23.7%
volumetric swell on the ordinate.
Using the formula, the % free swell (no load) = 1.07 (23.7) + 2.6 = 28.0%.
Conversely, if we load the 28% volumetric swell curve with 7 psi load, then the
ordinate is 15.5% swell which compares to the original 16%.
Figure 23-5. Relation of Load to the Volume Change of Swelling Clay Soil.
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 24
Tex-125-E, Determining Modulus of Sub-grade Reaction (K
Value)
Contents:
Section 4 Test Record.................................................................................................... 24-5
Section 5 Calculation and Plotting of Load-Settlement Relationships.......................... 24-6
Section 6 Modulus of Subgrade Reaction ..................................................................... 24-7
24-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 24 Tex-125-E, Determining Modulus of

Sub-grade Reaction (K Value)
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method evaluates the stiffness of subgrade soils in either the compacted condition or
the natural state.
The data developed in the static load test is used in the calculation of the modulus of
subgrade reaction in 'Method 1: On-Site Static Load Test,' which is a modification of
ASTM D 1196 for 'Use in Evaluation and Design of Airport and Highway Pavements.'
Data from the triaxial compression test on compacted specimens and the estimated Potential
Vertical Rise (PVR) are used in estimating a modulus of subgrade reaction from 'A Graphic
Presentation of K Values for All Compactable Subgrades' as outlined in 'Laboratory Static
Load Test' of 'Modulus of Subgrade Reaction.'
Figure 24-1. A Graphic Presentation of K Values for all Compactable Sub-grades.

24-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
loading device, such as a truck, trailer, tractor-trailer, an anchored frame, or other

structures loaded with sufficient weight to produce the desired reaction on the surface
under test. The supporting points (wheels in the case of a truck or trailer) shall be at
least 2.4 m (8 ft.) from the circumference of the largest diameter bearing plate being
used.
hydraulic jack assembly, with a spherical bearing attachment, capable of applying and
releasing the load in increments. The jack shall have sufficient capacity for applying the
maximum load required and shall be equipped with an accurately calibrated gauge that
will indicate the magnitude of the applied load.
two or more dial gauges, graduated in units of 0.03 mm (0.001 in.), capable of recording
a maximum settlement of 25.4 mm (1 in.).
deflection beam, upon which dial gauges shall be mounted, a 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) standard
black pipe, a 76 x 76 x 6 mm (3 x 3 x 1/4 in.) steel angle, or equivalent, at least 4.9 m
(16 ft.) long, and resting upon supports located at least 2.4 m (8 ft.) from the bearing
plate or the nearest wheel or supporting leg.
miscellaneous tools, including a thermometer and spirit level
set of circular steel bearing plates, not less than 25.4 mm (1 in.) in thickness, machined
so they can be arranged in pyramid fashion to ensure rigidity, with diameters ranging
from 152.4 to 762.0 mm (6 to 30 in.).
NOTE: A minimum of four different plate sizes is recommended for pavement design or
evaluation purposes. For evaluation purposes alone, a single plate may be used,
provided its area is equal to the tire contact area corresponding to what may be
considered as the most critical combination of conditions of wheel load and tire
pressure. For the purpose of providing data indicative of bearing index (for example, the
determination of relative subgrade support throughout a period of a year), a single plate
of any selected size may be used.
24-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Procedure
Section 3
Procedure
The following table lists the steps necessary to perform an on-site static load test used in
calculating the modulus of subgrade reaction.
Step
1
1a
1b
2
3
4
4a
4b
5
5a
5b
5c
5d
5e
6
Method 1: On-Site Static Load Test

Action
Carefully center a bearing plate of the selected diameter under the jack assembly.
Set the remaining plates of smaller diameter concentric with, and on top of the bearing plate.
Set the bearing plate level in a thin bed of a mixture of sand and plaster of Paris, of plaster of Paris
alone, or of fine sand, using the least quantity of materials required for uniform bearing.
Where unconfined load tests are to be made at a depth below the surface, remove the
surrounding material to provide a clearance equal to one and one-half bearing plate diameters
from the edge of the bearing plate.
For confined tests, the diameter of the excavated circular area shall be just sufficient to
accommodate the selected bearing plate.
Place a sufficient number of dial gauges, located and fixed in position to indicate the average
settlement of the bearing plate.
After the equipment has been properly arranged with all of the dead load (jack, plates, etc.) in
place, quickly seat the bearing plate and assembly and release a load sufficient to produce a
settlement of not less than 0.3 mm (0.01 in.) or more than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.), as indicated by the
dials.
When the dial needles come to rest following release of the load, reseat the plate by applying one
half of the recorded load, which produced the 0.3 to 0.5 mm (0.01 to 0.02 in.) settlement.
When the dial needles have again come to rest, set each dial accurately at its zero mark.
Apply loads at a moderately rapid rate in uniform increments. The magnitude of each increment
should be small enough to permit the recording of a sufficient number of load-settlement points
(not less than six) to produce an accurate load-settlement curve.
After each increment of load, wait until a rate of settlement of not more than 0.03 mm (0.001 in.)
per minute has been maintained for three consecutive minutes.
Record load and settlement readings for each load increment.
Continue this procedure until the selected total settlement has been obtained, or until the load
capacity of the apparatus has been reached, whichever occurs first.
At this point, maintain the load until an increased settlement of not more than 0.03 mm (0.001
in.) per minute for three consecutive minutes occurs.
Record the total settlement.
Release the load to the load at which the dial gauges were set at zero.
Maintain this zero-setting load until the rate of recovery does not exceed 0.03 mm (0.001 in.)
per minute for three consecutive minutes.
Record settlement at the zero-setting load.
From a thermometer suspended near the bearing plate, read and record the air temperature at halfhour intervals.
24-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Test Record
Section 4
Test Record
In addition to the continuous listing of all load, settlement and temperature data as
prescribed under 'Procedure,' a record shall also be made of all associated conditions and
observations pertaining to the test, including the following:
Date
List of personnel
Weather conditions
Time of beginning and completion of test
Any irregularity in routine procedure
Any unusual observations made during the test
Any unusual conditions observed at the test site.
24-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5 Calculation and Plotting of LoadSettlement Relationships
Section 5
Calculation and Plotting of Load-Settlement Relationships
Plot the load intensity in kPa (psi) for each increment against the corresponding settlement
in mm (in.), see 'Field Loading Bearing Test.'
Plot the recovery after full release of load.
Correction should be made for the zero settlement point, taking into account the dead weight
of the equipment and the seating load.
From this graph, the relation of load and total settlement for that load and the relation of
elastic and permanent settlement for the maximum load used may be obtained.
Figure 24-2. Field Loading Bearing Test.
24-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6 Modulus of Subgrade Reaction
Section 6
Modulus of Subgrade Reaction
Method 1: On-site Static Load Test
The as-tested modulus of subgrade reaction is calculated from the load settlement curve at a
convenient point, usually 1.3 mm (0.05 in) deflection from the relation.
The load intensity in kPa (psi) is divided by mm (in.) of settlement (deflection). This
modulus of subgrade reaction K is in kPa per mm (psi per in.), usually designated kg/m3
(pcf).
Method 2: Laboratory Static Load Test
To determine the subgrade reaction when triaxial class (Test Method "Tex-117-E, Triaxial
Compression Tests for Disturbed Soils and Base Materials") and PVR (Test Method
"Tex-124-E, Determining Potential Vertical Rise") are known:
first, enter subgrade strength class at the bottom of the graph,

'A Graphic Presentation of K Values for All Compactable Sub-Grades,'
then, go up to the curve of PVR, and go along the horizontal line to the thickness of
subbase, then go up to the slanting "K" value of the first horizontal line.
Read the subgrade reaction ("K" value) on the horizontal line at the left axis.
24-7
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 25
Tex-126-E, Molding, Testing, and Evaluating Bituminous
Black Base Materials
Contents:
Section 4 Test Report Forms ......................................................................................... 25-6
Section 8 General Notes .............................................................................................. 25-18
Section 9 Gauge Check Valve ..................................................................................... 25-19
25-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 25 Tex-126-E, Molding, Testing, and

Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Materials
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
Use this method to mold an asphalt stabilized (black base) material, and determine the
relationship between the percent compacted density and percent asphalt in the material. The
method is also the means to test specimens unconfined in slow and fast deformation rates.
25-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2
Definitions
maximum density - Maximum density is the highest density calculated on the basis of
dry weight of material per cubic foot.
minimum allowable percent density - Minimum allowable percent density is the density
allowed on a given black base material based on a sample of freshly gyrated road mix.
actual percent density - Actual percent density is the quotient obtained from the nuclear
gauge density of a roadway core divided by the density of the same roadway mix
compacted in the gyratory press times 100.
optimum asphalt content - Optimum asphalt content is the recommended percent

asphalt taken as the percent asphalt that will produce the maximum density under a
fixed compacted effort, and the compacted specimens must satisfy the specified
unconfined compressive strength requirements.
25-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
apparatus required to perform 'Part II, Preparing Samples for Compaction and Triaxial
Tests' of Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for
Testing"
motorized gyratory press, calibrated according to Test Method "Tex-916-K, Calibrating

Motorized Gyratory Soils Press"
compaction mold, a 152.4 1 mm (6 0.030 in.) I.D. and 305 2 mm (12 1/16 in.)
high forming mold with gyratory flange collar and mold base plate. It is preferable, but
not necessary, that the mold be chromium plated.
spacer block, approximately 200 mm (8 in.) high
press, to eject specimen from the mold
mechanical mixer
ovens, able to heat to 143 C (290 F), 121 C (250 F), and 60 C (140 F), and
maintain those temperatures to within 3 C ( 5 F)
electric hot plate
dolly, caster mounted, made to same height as compactor platen and extrusion press
platen
metal pans, approximately 530 x 38 x 100 mm (21 x 15 x 4 in.)
circular porous stones, slightly less than 152.4 mm (6 in.) in diameter and 51 mm (2 in.)
high
metal disks, 152.4 mm (6 in.) in diameter by approximately 1 mm (0.030 in.) thick (No.
18 gauge sheet metal)
filter paper, 152.4 mm (6 in.) in diameter
supply of small tools, trowels, plastic mallet, etc.
asphalt, sufficient for molding specimens
fine soil pans, round pans approximately 200 mm (8 in.) in diameter
gloves, heat-resistant
set of standard U.S. sieves meeting the requirements of Test Method "Tex-907-K,
Verifying the Accuracy of Wire Cloth Sieves" and containing the following sizes:
50 mm (2 in.)
45 mm (1 3/4 in.)
31.5 mm (1 1/4 in.)
22.4 mm (7/8 in.)
25-4
TxDOT 11/2004

16.0 mm (5/8 in.)
12.5 mm (1/2 in.)
9.5 mm (3/8 in.)
4.75 mm (No. 4)
2.00 mm (No. 10)
4.25 m (No. 40)
Section 3 Apparatus
sample pans
screw jack press, from Test Method "Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression Tests for
Disturbed Soils and Base Materials," unless gyratory compactor is equipped for
compression testing.
25-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Test Report Forms
Section 4
Test Report Forms
Gyratory Worksheet
Black Base Testing Data Worksheet.
25-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5
Compact specimens approximately 152.4 mm (6 in.) in diameter and 203.2 mm (8 in.) in
height in the 152.4 mm (6 in.) mold. Since some of the compacted specimens do not
completely fill the mold, it is necessary to determine the volume per linear millimeter (inch)
of the height of the mold.
Follow these steps to calibrate apparatus.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Action
Measure the diameter of the mold, by means of the micrometer dial, at the ends and several
intermediate points to obtain an average value for the diameter.
Use the average diameter to calculate a mean cross sectional area of the mold.
Use the equation under 'Calculations' following this table, then:
Using the micrometer dial assembly and an appropriate 200 mm (8 in.) spacer block
Place the mold base plate in position on the gyratory platen.
Bring the top gyratory head down on the spacer and determine the dial setting for a specimen of
200 mm (8 in.) height.
Set the dial face to read zero.
Specimens taller than 200 mm (8 in.) will read greater than the 'zero' reading; shorter
specimens, less.
Calculations
Calculate the volume per unit of height of the mold:
( Area mm 2 )
volume of mold ( m / mm ) =
( 1 mm )
1,000 ,000
3
or:
2
( Area, in ) ( 1 in.)
Volume of mold( ft 3 / in.) =
1,728
25-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6
Preparing Sample
Follow these steps to prepare the sample.
Step
1
2
Preparing Sample
Action
Select a 130 kg (300 lb.) representative sample.
Check specifications for maximum size aggregate.
The material must be prepared according to 'Part II, Preparing Samples for Compaction and
Testing."
When recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) material is used, the percent asphalt content must be
determined according to Test Method "Tex-210-F, Determining Asphalt Content of Bituminous
Mixtures by Extraction."
25-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 7
Procedures
Weight Batching Materials to be Mixed
Follow these steps for weight batching of materials to be mixed.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Weight Batching Materials to be Mixed

Action
Place a supply of asphalt to be used in the oven and heat to 140 3 C (290 5 F).
Estimate the weight of material that, when heated, mixed with the intended asphalt and
gyratory molded, will fill the gyratory mold to a specimen height of 200 6 mm (8 0.25
in.).
In case the estimated weight for the first specimen is not in keeping with this tolerance after
molding, adjust weight to meet height tolerance before weighing out other specimens.
Using this weight and the percentages of the various sizes of particles obtained in preparation of
the large sample, calculate the cumulative weights of each size to combine to make a specimen.
Weigh the specimen as calculated in Step 3, separating the virgin aggregate on a 2.00 mm (No.
10) sieve. All RAP material must be kept separate from the virgin material.
Place the plus 2.00 mm (No. 10) fraction of the virgin aggregate in a tared mixing pan and the
passing 2.00 mm (No. 10) portion of the virgin aggregate in a smaller tared pan.
Place both pans in the oven for heating.
If all the material is passing 2.00 mm (No. 10), the larger mixing pan only must be used.
Heat the virgin material and RAP to 140 3 C (290 5 F).
25-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Mixing and Molding Black Base Specimens

Follow these steps for mixing and molding black base specimens.
NOTE: The mold and base plate must be preheated in the 121 C (250 F) oven to help
retain the heat of the mixture during loading and gyration. Proceed to mix and mold the
first specimen on the Asphalt-Density curve.
Step
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Action
Remove the pans of material from the oven and weigh.
Perform this step when the material reaches approximately 143 C (290 F), and is ready
for mixing.
Subtract the sum of the tares of the pans and obtain the dry weight of aggregates.
Place the pan containing the virgin passing 2.00 mm (No. 10) portion back in the hot oven,
and place the mixing pan and its contents on the preheated hot plate for temperature
retention.
Calculate the weight of asphalt required in the specimen, then place the mixing pan back on
the scales and accurately weigh in the hot asphalt from the oven.
Return the mixing pan to the hot plate.
Using a trowel or other convenient mixing tool, mix and turn the hot mixture of asphalt
and retained on 2.00 mm (No. 10) virgin material until it appears to be as well coated as it
can be using that particular percentage of asphalt.
This may require several minutes.
When the mixing of the aggregate particles is completed, add in the passing 2.00 mm (No.
10) portion from the oven and continue mixing.
When dealing with RAP, add the RAP last and complete the mixing.
When a mechanical mixer is used, the material must be placed and mixed in the mixer
following the same sequence as described in Steps 4, 5 and 6 above.
Put the mixed materials in a large pan and place it in the oven at 121 3 C (250 5 F) for
two hours prior to molding.
Remove the base plate from the oven and place it on the loading dolly.
Place the hot mold on the base plate and insert one of the thin 152.4 mm (6 in.) metal disks in
the mold on top of the base plate.
Place one piece of the round 152.4 mm (6 in.) filter paper on the metal disk.
Load the hot mixture into the mold according to the 'Loading Hot Mixture into the Mold'
table following this procedure.
When the mold has been loaded, level the fines on top with a hand tool.
Place another filter paper on top of the mix, then a thin metal disk and move the dolly, with
the mold on it, to the gyratory press.
Slide the mold, with base plate, onto the platen of the compactor.
The platen must have a generous coat of good lubricant or the platen and base plate can
be damaged.
Center the mold, lower the compactor head on the specimen, and turn the lift cam down to
give the mold its 5 lift angle.
Using the machine controls, place a load of 241 kPa (35 psi) gauge 138 kPa (20 psi)
specimen with the loading ram on the specimen, and turn on the machine.
Gyrate the specimen for 2 minutes at 241 kPa (35 psi) gauge loading.
At the end of 2 minutes, increase the load to 476 kPa (69 psi) gauge 276 kPa (40 psi)
TxDOT 11/2004

Step
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

Action
specimen and continue gyrating 2 minutes.
Increase the load on the ram to 717 kPa (104 psi) gauge 414 kPa (60 psi) specimen and
continue gyration until the gauge needle will stand steady for five revolutions of the
platen.
This means that there has been no appreciable shortening or densification in the five
revolutions.
Turn the gyratory press off.
Slightly release the pressure from the top of the specimen, and, using the handle
provided, return the cam lift to its original position.
Reduce the angle of lift to zero.
Place 241 kPa (35 psi) gauge pressure on the specimen, and turn the machine on for a few
revolutions.
This tends to square up the specimen.
Turn the machine off.
Wipe off any oil on the platen, and place 5964 kPa (865 psi) gauge pressure on the
specimen.
This is 3447 kPa (500 psi) on the cross-section of the specimen.
Place the pre-set measuring stand in position to measure the height of specimen.
Hold the load on the specimen until the rate of consolidation is 0.13 mm (0.005 in.) or
less in 5 minutes.
The consolidation rate must be measured in 5-minute increments.
Observe the dial reading, and record the net height of specimen only, making allowance for
thickness of the metal disks.
Remove the measuring device, and then the load on the specimen.
Raise the ram out of the mold and remove the mold from the machine platen to the dolly.
Slide the mold with base plate on the platen of the ejection press and eject the specimen up
and out of the mold.
Remove the top and bottom metal disks and weigh the specimen to the nearest 0.5 g.
Clean any material adhering to the disks that was included in the measured height, and
weigh this with the specimen.
Put the specimen with a 152.4 mm (6 in.) porous stone on the bottom and place in the 60
C (140 F) oven for storage if further testing for strengths is desired.
Use two or more molds to minimize time lost for heating the molds, using one and then
the other. However, use only one base plate, unless they are identical in height.
Calculate the volume and the density of specimen according to the equation under
'Calculations.'
Begin to construct the Asphalt-Density Curve by plotting the first point for this specimen on
the 'Percent Asphalt in Mix vs. Total Density Graph.'
Vary the percent asphalt in the mix, and mix, mold, and plot the results from enough
specimens to clearly define the Asphalt-Density Curve, especially in the break of the
curve.
Take the break of the curve as the optimum asphalt content, and use this as the starting
point for the field mix.
Mold duplicate specimens for each point.
Where points are made with extremely low asphalt content and several other percentages
of asphalt are molded prior to the break in the curve, then if possible, omit that
TxDOT 11/2004

Step
39

Action
duplication.
Store the fresh, hot molded specimen in the 60 C (140 F) oven to await further testing
or cooling in the case of just molded specimens.
A supply of top porous stones must be kept in the oven, but must not be placed on the
specimens because of a tendency to cause slumping.
Very rich specimens must be spaced about 51 mm (2 in.) away from other specimens to
prevent damage in the case of slumping.
Figure 25-1. Percent Asphalt in Mix vs. Total Density Graph.
TxDOT 11/2004

Loading Hot Mixture into Mold

Follow this procedure for loading hot mixture into the mold.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
Loading Hot Mixture into the Mold

Action
After mixing and the 2 hour curing in the 121 C (250 F) oven, but before removal of the
mold from the oven, separate the larger aggregates equally, as judged by eye, in the corners
of the mixing pan.
Bring the dolly and mold assembly to the mixing pan, placing the hot plate and mixing pan
near the mold.
Begin loading by placing about 13 mm (0.5 in.) loose thickness of the finer sizes of the
mixture on top of the filter paper.
With a spatula or any convenient tool, level these fines out in the mold.
Place one quadrant of the larger aggregates, from one of the corners, into the mold, and
level as above.
Place the remaining intermediate sizes and fines, from the same quadrant of the pan, on
top of the larger aggregates and spade well around the sides of the mold and in the layer
as well.
Do not allow the larger aggregates to come to the top of the loose layer.
Load in the second, third, and fourth quadrants of the mixture in the same manner except
that about 6 mm (0.25 in.) of loose fines at the beginning is sufficient.
Spade well around the sides after the addition of each quadrant of the mixture.
After loading the fourth quadrant, top off the layer with about 6 mm (1/4 in.) of fines.
Using a wide-blade putty knife or similar tool, scrape out the remaining contents of the
pan and place in the mold.
Place all the contents of the pan in the mold for gyration for one specimen.
The intent of this technique is to load the mold each time for maximum density. This
reduces time of gyration and produces more uniform, repeatable specimens.
In loading hot sand and asphalt mixes, or any fine-sized fluffy material, the amount of
mixture that will gyrate into a specimen may exceed the volume of a mold. In this case,
after the addition of each quadrant, push the material down using any convenient tool.
Use a finishing tool that covers the cross section of the mold.
Tamp the loose mixture, using a plastic or rawhide hammer.
Calculations
Calculate the volume and the density of specimen as follows:
Specimen Volume in m 3 ( ft 3 ) = ( Height of Specimen in mm [in.]) x (Calibration Factor of Mold )

Density of Specimen in kg / m3 (lbs./ ft 3 ) =
Weight of Specimen
Volume of Specimen
TxDOT 11/2004

Testing Black Base Specimens in Unconfined Compression

Test the compacted black base specimens made in duplicate for its unconfined compressive
strength at 60 C (140 F). Test one specimen at the slow deformation rate of 3.8 mm (0.15
in.) per minute, and the other at the fast rate of 250 mm (10 in.) per minute deformation. Use
the triaxial testing press to perform the slow test. The gyratory compactor has the capacity to
perform both the slow and fast tests. However, use any testing press meeting ASTM D 1663
(superseded by ASTM D 3515) and the deformation rate requirements.
Follow these steps for testing black base specimens in unconfined compression.
Testing Black Base Specimens in Unconfined Compression
Step
Action
1
When the triaxial press is used to determine the strength at the slow rate of deformation use the
procedure described in Test Method "Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression Tests for Disturbed Soils
and Base Materials" for the unconfined compression test.
2
Remove the specimen from the 60 C (140 F) oven, measure the circumference and calculate the
cross-section area of the test specimen.
3
Record these data on the data sheet 'Black Base Testing Data Worksheet.'
4
Set up the unconfined specimen for testing as described in Test Method "Tex-117-E, Triaxial
Compression Tests for Disturbed Soils and Base Materials," and test. It will not be necessary to
take any readings on the proving ring except the maximum readings. There is no need to make area
corrections.
5
When the test is completed, remove the specimen for the press and calculate the strength of the
material according to equation under calculations following this table.
6
Record this strength on the data sheet in Step 2 above, under slow strength.
Most large gyratory soil compactors have the capability of performing both the slow and fast tests.
When this machine is used for testing, proceed as follows:
1
Prepare the specimens for testing as described in Step 2 above.
2
Place one of the metal disks on the platen to protect the surface from abrasion.
3
Center the specimen, with top and bottom porous stones in place, on the disk in the machine.
4
Place thin metal disk on the top of the top stone.
5
Using the controls on the machine, bring the top head down to just make contact with the specimen.
6
Turn the machine off.
7
Set the controls on the machine for the speed desired.
8
Check the drag hands on the pressure gauge to see that they are at zero.
9
Start the machine and read the maximum reading on the gauge at failure.
Watch this reading to insure against overthrow of the follower by the gauge needle.
10
Record this value on the 'Black Base Testing Data worksheet.'
11
Since the ratio of the area of the specimen to the ram of the pump is 1.73 to 1 for a 150 mm (6 in.)
diameter specimen, calculate the strength of the specimen according to equation under
'Calculations.'
12
The specimens are tested at 60 C (140 F).
Record all data on the data sheet.
TxDOT 11/2004

Calculations
Use the following equations to determine the strength of the material and of the specimen.
Strength of the material:
Unconfined Compressive Strength =
Total Load
Cross Section Area
Strength of the specimen:
Strength , kPa = Strength , psi 6 .895
Strength , psi =
Gauge Re ading , psi

173
.
TxDOT 11/2004

Determining Field Density, Minimum Percent Density and Actual Percent Density for Field
Control
Follow these steps to determine field density, minimum percent density and actual percent
density for field control.
Determining Field Density, Minimum Percent Density and Actual Percent Density for Field Control
Step
Action
1
Field densities may be determined from core samples or nuclear gauge readings according to Test
Method "Tex-207-F, Determining Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures."
When cores are taken from a mixture containing maximum aggregate size of 22.2 mm (7/8 in.) or
larger, the cores must be 150 mm (6 in.) in diameter.
2
Use the nuclear density gauge or other methods, which are well correlated with the core densities,
on the roadway during rolling as a rapid check on field density and actual percent density, while
the mix is still hot and can be further densified as needed.
The method used must be verified by coring once per lane mile.
3
The minimum percent density must be obtained from the density-unconfined compressive strength
curve which must be obtained as follows:
Obtain a sufficient amount of fresh field mix to make at least four specimens.
4
Place the material in heat retention containers during transit and in a 121 C (250 F) oven after
arrival at the laboratory.
5
Using a sample splitter or other accepted methods, cut out enough fresh mix for one specimen in a
mixing pan and place the pan in the small electric drying oven and raise the temperature to 121 3
C (250 5 F).
6
Using the procedures described in Steps 9 through 33 of the
'Mixing and Molding Black Base Specimens' procedure, compact the material into a specimen and
obtain the maximum gyrated density.
7
Repeat the same procedures and obtain a duplicate specimen.
8
Repeat Steps 5-7 above, mold one more pair of duplicate specimens, mold the specimens by gyrating
the specimens at 241 to 476 kPa (35 to 69 psi) gauge pressure only.
9
Skip the step that requires gyrating the specimen at 717 kPa (104 psi) gauge pressure. This exception
is intended to mold specimens with lower densities and unconfined compressive strength.
10
Test the unconfined compressive strength on one of the duplicate specimens of each pair using a fast
deformation rate, and test the other using a slow deformation rate.
11
Plot the unconfined compressive strength against the molded densities as shown in
'Percent Asphalt in Mix vs. Total Density Graph.'
12
From the density-unconfined compressive strength relationship, linearly extrapolate the minimum
density that would satisfy the unconfined strength (both fast and slow) requirements called for in the
specification, and this must be taken as the minimum allowable density.
Calculate the minimum percent density according to the equation under 'Calculations.'
13
Calculate Percent Actual Density of a compacted field mix according to the equation under
'Calculations.'
TxDOT 11/2004

Calculations
Use the following equations to determine field density, minimum percent density and actual
percent density for field control.
Calculate minimum percent density:
Maximum Percent Density =
Minimum Allowable Density

100
Maximum Gyrated Density
EXAMPLE: From the 'Percent Asphalt in Mix vs. Total Density Graph,' the maximum
gyrated density of the field mix is 146 pcf and the field mix needs to be compacted to at
least 141.5 pcf to meet the Grade 1 unconfined compressive strength requirements.
With a minimum allowable density of 141.5 pcf, the minimum percent density can be
calculated as:
141.5 pcf
100 = 97%
146 pcf
Calculate percent actual density of a compacted field mix:
Percent Actual Density in Field =
Density of Core
100
Gyrated Maximum Density
or
Percent Actual Density in Field =
Nuclear Density
100
Gyrated Maximum Density
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 8
General Notes
Occasionally, when first beginning to gyrate some black base materials (usually made from
fine grain soils), the mold may turn instead of gyrating when 241 kPa (35 psi) gauge
pressure is applied. If this occurs, immediately increase the gauge pressure to 476 kPa (69
psi), rather than letting the mold turn for 2 minutes. If the mold continues to turn at 476 kPa
(69 psi) gauge pressure, increase the gauge pressure to 717 kPa (104 psi) and complete
gyration at this pressure. If the mold will not gyrate at 717 kPa (104 psi) gauge pressure, and
will only turn, the operator must discard the specimen and remake the mixture using a
greater amount of soil. This suggests that the amount of soil in the mold is so loose that it
will not gyrate at 717 kPa (104 psi) gauge pressure. Mold a specimen much shorter than 200
mm (8 in.) if gyration can be accomplished.
Some of the large gyratory compactors have been modified with a different heightmeasuring device. This device is front-mounted at the bottom of the cover bonnet and has a
steel strap mounted perpendicular to the machine platen to support the measuring dial. The
magnetic height measuring yoke is provided with a flat smooth surface to make contact with
the dial stem when the yoke is in position. The 'zero' setting for this new device is the same
as that described under 'Calibrating Equipment.' The advantage of the new device is that it
is placed in position as soon as the loose material has been shortened enough by gyration to
place the measuring yoke on top of the top gyrating head. This is usually no later than the
end of the first 2 minutes of gyration at 241 kPa (35 psi) gauge pressure.
Read the height of specimen directly at any desired time and, if desired, calculate and plot a
time-density curve. The procedure for gyration is the same except that the new measuring
device is placed in position as described above, and the end point is reached when the rate of
dial decrease is not greater than one division 0.025 mm (.001 in.) in five revolutions of the
platen. From the beginning, all dial readings are decreasing values until the end point is
reached. It must be noted that during gyration the needle will fluctuate some 5 to 10 points
on the dial during the latter stages of gyration but as the gyration nears the end (density
nearing the maximum) the minimum reading of the needle approaches the same reading.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 9 Gauge Check Valve
Section 9
Gauge Check Valve
A new accuracy feature, a gauge check valve, has been approved and recommended for use
on all large gyratory soil presses. This valve is particularly useful in that the follower hand is
not used, and, when the gauge check valve operates, it keeps the gauge needle at the
indicated pressure until released.
To operate:
For gyrating purposes, turn the gauge check valve all the way in (clockwise). This
allows a free flow of oil to and from the gauges.
For testing purposes, turn the gauge check valve all the way out (counterclockwise). This allows oil to enter the gauge, register the pressure, and hold it until
released by turning the valve all the way in.
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 26
Tex-127-E, Lime Fly-Ash Compressive Strength Test
Methods
Contents:
Section 6 Calculations and Graphs ................................................................................ 26-7
Section 7 Reporting Test Results................................................................................... 26-8
Section 8 General Notes ................................................................................................ 26-9
26-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 26 Tex-127-E, Lime Fly-Ash

Compressive Strength Test Methods
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines unconfined compressive strength as an index of the effectiveness of
lime-fly ash (LFA) treatment in imparting desirable properties to flexible base and sub-grade
materials (10 lb. hammer, 18 inch drop, 50 blows/layer using 6 x 8 in. mold).
26-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
apparatus outlined in test methods:

"Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression Tests for Disturbed Soils and Base Materials."
compression testing machine with a capacity of 267 kN (60,000 lbs.) or equal, meeting
the requirements of ASTM D 1633
triaxial screw jack press, as described in Test Method Tex-117-E, Triaxial

Compression Tests for Disturbed Soils and Base Materials," may be used when
anticipated strengths are not in excess of 2757 kPa (400 psi).
26-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Materials
Section 3
Materials
fresh supply of tested fly ash (FA) meeting the specification requirements
fresh supply of tested hydrated lime meeting the requirements of "Item 264, Lime and
Lime Slurry" of the TxDOT Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance
of Highways, Streets, and Bridges
flexible base or soil to be stabilized
good quality tap water.
26-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4
Preparing Sample
Select an adequate size representative sample of the material and prepare according to
'Part II, Preparing Samples for Compaction and Triaxial Tests' of Test Method "Tex-101-E,
Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing."
26-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5 Procedure
Section 5
Procedure
The following table lists the steps necessary to test the compressive strength of lime-fly ash.
Step
1
1a
1b
1c
1d
2
3
3a
4
4a
4b
5
6a
6b
Compressive Strength for Lime-Fly Ash

Action
Use the method described in Test Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials," to determine the
optimum moisture and maximum density for the LFA treated mixtures.
Each amount of lime selected for investigation is a percentage based on the selected dry mass
of the soil.
Blend sufficient FA with each selected lime content to form several dry LFA ratios.
Testing" to make 3 individual samples and add the optimum moisture content to each sample.
Mix thoroughly.
Cover the mixture to prevent loss of moisture by evaporation.
Prior to compaction, replace any evaporated water and thoroughly mix each specimen. Add LFA
uniformly and mix thoroughly.
Compact three specimens at the optimum moisture and density found by using four lifts and a
compactive effort of 1100 kN-m/m3 (13.26 ft-lb/in3).
Other LFA ratios may be investigated using the optimum moisture determined for each LFA
ratio.
These LFA treated materials should be compacted as nearly identical as possible.
Cover the test specimens with top and bottom porous stones and place in triaxial cells
immediately after extruding from the forming molds.
Then store the specimens at room temperature for a period of 7 days.
After the 7 day curing period, remove the cells and place the specimens in an oven and dry at a
temperature not to exceed 60 C (140 F) for about 6 hours or until 1/3 to 1/2 of the molding
moisture has been removed
Dry all LFA treated soils as given above even though a considerable amount of cracking may
occur.
Allow the specimens to cool to room temperature before continuing the test.
Weigh, measure, and enclose the specimens in triaxial cells and subject to capillarity for ten
days.
Use a constant lateral pressure of 6.9 kPa (1 psi) and surcharge of 3.5 kPa (0.5 psi) for base
and 6.9 kPa (1 psi) for subgrade.
Remove the specimens from the moist room and prepare for testing in unconfined compression
as outlined in Test Method "Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression Tests for Undisturbed Soils and
Base Materials."
A compression testing machine of adequate range and sensitivity will be used.
If the second specimen tests within 10 percent of the first, the engineer may elect to test the third
specimen in indirect tension.
26-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6 Calculations and Graphs
Section 6
Calculations and Graphs
The calculations are similar to those made for Test Method "Tex-117-E, Triaxial
Compression Tests for Undisturbed Soils and Base Materials."
A graph is normally prepared showing compressive strength versus percent stabilizer used.
26-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 7
The laboratory report should include, but is not necessarily limited to:
Soil constants
Molding, curing, swell, strain and strength test data
Plot strength graph if applicable.
26-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 8
General Notes
Testing Notes
Store hydrated lime in an airtight container to ensure a fresh supply.
Wetted stabilized materials taken from the roadway during construction should be prepared
for testing without drying back.
The engineer will select the method of sample preparation best suited for construction
control.
The desired intent is to have the capability of weighing identical samples for strength
and density control specifications.
The sample may have moisture added and remixed or removed with a fan while stirring
for developing compaction curves.
To determine the moisture-density relationship of fine-grained materials with less than 20%
retained on the 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) sieve and 100% passing the 9.5 mm (3/8 in.) sieve, the
engineer may elect to use a mold with approximate dimensions of 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) in
diameter by 152.4 mm (6.0 in.) in height. The number of blows must be calculated when
changing mold size to maintain a compactive effort of 1100 kN-m/mm3 (13.26 ft-lb/in3).
The engineer may select and specify other conditioning procedures for construction control
purposes.
The district laboratory should develop design strength data for these and other
conditioning procedures.
In any event, the curing and conditioning procedures shall be given in detail in the
report.
Follow 'Part II, Compaction Testing of Road Mixed Material' of Test Method "Tex-120-E,
Soil-Cement Testing" for testing FA stabilized materials in the roadway condition, to
determine DA for contractor.
Design Notes
When water, lime, FA, and material have been brought together during construction, the
mixture should receive final mixing and compaction during that same working day.
Lime contents less than 2.0% are not recommended due to difficulty in obtaining
distribution under construction conditions.
FA or LFA stabilized soils are not recommended at this time as final base courses in primary
highways because of limited performance records.
26-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Unconfined compressive strengths of at least 103.5 kPa (150 psi) are suggested as adequate
for FA or LFA stabilized subbase soils cured at room temperature and subjected to 10 days
capillarity.
Unconfined compressive strengths for FA or LFA base courses should approach the strength
requirements of soil cement.
LFA stabilized base courses will perform as semi-rigid pavement. The engineer should not
specify this type of pavement design on a soft foundation where relatively large deflections
are likely to occur.
Field density control shall be based on testing road mixed samples according to Test Method
Base Materials." A minimum of 95% of the maximum density should be obtained for both
subgrade and base course stabilized with FA or LFA.
A density control specification is recommended for this type of stabilization.
Provisions should be made in the contract to control dusting of FA and lime.
It is recommended that LFA base stabilization receive an asphaltic surface course from base
crown to base crown to reduce erosion along the pavement edge.
FA should not be used alone to stabilize stiff clays or materials that will not be free from
clods or lumps after pulverization without a stabilization additive being applied. FA has not
been observed to aid pulverization.
FA cementing characteristics vary widely with source. The engineer should perform strength
tests with the FA to be used on the project.
TxDOT will provide the contractor with an initial optimum moisture content based upon
preliminary laboratory tests.
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 27
Tex-128-E, Determining Soil pH
Contents:
Section 4 Preparing Samples ......................................................................................... 27-5
Section 6 Report ............................................................................................................ 27-7
27-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 27 Tex-128-E, Determining Soil pH
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method describes the procedure for determining the pH of soils in an aqueous solution.
27-2
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
pH meter with glass electrode, pH range 0 - 14 0.1
buffer solutions, such as pH 4.0, 7.0 and 9.0
glass stirring rod
glass beaker, 250 mL (8.5 fl. oz.)
balance, accurate within 0.1% of the test load at any point within the range of use,
graduated to at least 0.01 g
thermometer, 0 - 100 C (32 - 212 F)
stirring device, mechanical or magnetic.
27-3
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 3 Materials
Section 3
Materials
27-4
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 4 Preparing Samples
Section 4
Preparing Samples
Soil Sample
The pH test is performed on the soil binder, minus 425 m (No. 40) material prepared
according to 'Part I, Preparing Samples for Soil Constants and Particle Size Analysis' of
Test Method "Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing."
Compost Sample
The pH test is performed on minus 4.75 mm (No. 4) material prepared according to the
following:
Obtain a representative sample of approximately 200 g and dry to constant weight at 60

C (140 F)
Dry sieve material over a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve and test material passing.
27-5
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 5 Procedure
Section 5
Procedure
The following table describes the steps necessary to determine the pH of soils in an aqueous
solution.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Determining the pH of Soils in an Aqueous Solution

Action
Heat sample and approximately 200 mL (7 fl. oz.) of distilled water to 45 - 60 C (112 - 140 F) in
separate containers.
Add 30 g of the prepared dry soil binder to 150 mL (5 fl. oz.) of distilled water.
Stir the sample vigorously and disperse the soil well.
Stir the sample every 15 minutes for one hour to disperse the soil and make sure all soluble
material is in solution.
After the sample has been added to the water for a period of one hour, record the temperature of
the mixture and adjust the pH meter to that temperature.
Standardize the meter (buffer solution of pH 7.0) according to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Clean electrode with water.
NOTE: If scratches are noticed on glass bulb of electrode, replace with new electrode.
Immediately before immersing electrode into mixture, stir and remove glass stirring rod.
Place electrode into solution and use stirring bar to make good contact between the solution
and the electrode.
Place the tip of the electrode approximately 76 mm (3/4 in.) into the mixture. Allow reading to
stabilize.
Read and record the pH value to the nearest tenth of a whole number.
NOTE: If the pH reading appears unstable, leave the electrode immersed until the reading has
stabilized, approximately 5 minutes.
Remove electrode and rinse with water.
If the pH of sample is below 5 or above 9, standardize meter with appropriate buffer and repeat
Steps 4 through 9.
27-6
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 6 Report
Section 6
Report
Report the pH to the nearest 0.1.
27-7
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 28
Tex-129-E, Measuring the Resistivity of Soil Materials
Contents:
Section 4 Material.......................................................................................................... 28-5
28-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 28 Tex-129-E, Measuring the Resistivity

of Soil Materials
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the resistivity of soil and aggregate materials.
Resistivity is an important factor in considering the corrosion potential of soils and
aggregates to metal pipe, earth-reinforcing strips and other metal items in earthwork.
28-2
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soil Materials
Section 2
Definitions
resistivity - Resistivity decreases with an increase in moisture content of the material

until the minimum resistivity is obtained. This minimum resistivity value is defined as
the resistivity of the material.
28-3
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soil Materials
Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
portable resistivity meter, Vibroground Model 293 or equal
small box with inside dimensions of 102 mm x 152 mm x 45 mm (4 in. x 6 in. x 1-3/4
in.) (see 'Soil Box for Laboratory Resistivity Determination' )
straightedge
drying pans, mixing pans, trowel and small scoop
standard U.S. Sieve, 2.36 mm (No. 8), meeting requirements of Test Method
"Tex-907-K, Verifying the Accuracy of Wire Cloth Sieves"
graduated beaker, 200 mL (7 fl. oz.)
balance, minimum capacity of 1500 g, accurate and readable to 0.5 g, or 0.1% of the
test load, whichever is greater.
Figure 28-1. Soil Box for Laboratory Resistivity Determination.
28-4
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soil Materials
Section 4 Material
Section 4
Material
The following material is needed:
28-5
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soil Materials
Section 5 Procedure
Section 5
Procedure
The following table lists the steps required to measure the resistivity of soil materials.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Measuring the Resistivity of Soil Materials

Action
Follow Test Method "Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling Soils for Highways," to secure a
representative sample of sufficient size to yield approximately 1300 g of material passing the 2.36
mm (No. 8) sieve.
Dry the sample to constant mass in an oven at a temperature of 60 5 C (140 9 F) and allow it
to cool at room temperature.
Pass the sample over a 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve.
When there is 1300 g or more passing the sieve, proceed to Step 4.
When there is less than 1300 g passing the sieve, crush to pass the sieve, then proceed to Step
4.
Reduce the sample by sample splitter or quartering cloth to make a soil sample of approximately
1300 g.
Weigh sample to nearest 0.5 g.
Clip one set of wires on the left side of the soil box and plug into the left of the meter dial.
Clip the other set of wires on the right side of the soil box and plug into the right side of the
meter dial.
NOTE: The dial reads resistance in ohms, measured between electrodes separated by 102 mm (4
in.) of soil.
Add 100 mL of distilled or deionized water to dry soil at room temperature.
Mix until water is dispersed uniformly throughout soil.
Fill soil box by lightly hand-compacting wet soil, making sure soil completely fills box.
Level top with a straightedge.
Move power switch to the adjust position to make a preliminary adjustment.
NOTE: If dial is below 0.1 after adjustment, switch the multiplier to the next power down. If dial
is above 0.9 after adjustment, switch the multiplier to the next power up.
Next, place power switch in a read position, read and record the resistance, in ohms, on the data
sheet. (See 'Resistivity Worksheet). Resistivity varies with temperature; therefore, it is important
that the soil and added moisture be at uniform room temperature when mixed and tested.
NOTE: Click on ex1961 to see an example of a completed Resistivity worksheet.
Repeat above procedure, using the same sample, adding distilled or de-mineralized water in
increments of 50 mL for sandy soils and 100 mL for clay soils.
Insure that each addition of water is dispersed evenly throughout the sample.
The resistivity readings should decrease for several readings before an increase is noted.
The lowest resistivity reading before an increase will be the reading to use for calculating the
resistivity of the soil, as shown on the data sheet.
The resistivity for sandy soils is generally higher than for clay soils. The sandy soils may
contain higher levels of soluble salts and not always increase after decreasing readings.
For sandy soils the reading used to calculate the resistivity value will be the point at which
total saturation occurs. This happens when water is observed rising to the surface during
compaction of the sample.
28-6
TxDOT 11/2004

of Soil Materials
Section 6
Calculations
Use the following calculations to determine soil box factor and resistivity.
Calculate the Soil Box Factor (SBF):
SBF = A / D
Where:
A = Area of one electrode, cm2
D = Distance between electrodes, cm.
Calculate the Resistivity, in ohm-cm = SBF x Resistance using resistivity meter:
R = SBF ( ROHM )
28-7
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 29
Tex-130-E, Slurry Testing
Contents:
Section 2 Part I, Sampling Bentonite Slurry.................................................................. 29-3
Section 3 Part II, Measuring the Density of Drilling Slurries ....................................... 29-4
Section 4 Part III, Standard Test Method for Sand Content by Volume of Drilling Slurries29-6
Section 5 Part IV, Standard Test Method for Viscosity of Drilling Slurry ................... 29-8
29-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 29 Tex-130-E, Slurry Testing
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
Part I of this test method covers sampling bentonite slurry.
Part II determines the density of slurries used in slurry construction techniques, such as are
used for barriers to control the horizontal movement of liquids. This test method is modified
from the American Petroleum Institute (API) Recommended Practice 13B, Standard
Procedure for Field Testing Drilling Fluids.
Part III determines the sand content of slurries used in slurry construction techniques.
Part IV of this test method is used as an indication of viscosity of drilling fluids.
29-2
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 2 Part I, Sampling Bentonite Slurry
Section 2
Part I, Sampling Bentonite Slurry
This part details the steps for sampling bentonite slurry.
Apparatus
'Slurry Sampler,' or equal, approximately 76 mm (3 in.) inside diameter and 305 - 356
mm (12 - 14 in.) long.
Figure 29-1. Slurry Sampler.

Procedure
The table below lists the steps required to sample bentonite slurry.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Sampling Bentonite Slurry

Action
Hold the right circular cylinder with one hand.
With the other hand, let the bottom of the sampler slowly descend until it reaches the bottom of the
hole containing bentonite slurry.
While holding the rope above the cylinder, let the right circular cylinder drop into the slurry.
After the right circular cylinder reaches the bottom, pull up the sampler slowly.
Place the contents of the sampler in a container of approximately 3.8 to 7.6 L (1 to 2 gals.).
29-3
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 3 Part II, Measuring the Density of

Drilling Slurries
Section 3
Part II, Measuring the Density of Drilling Slurries
This part determines the density of slurries used in slurry construction techniques, such as
are used for barriers to control the horizontal movement of liquids.
Apparatus
'Mud Balance,' or any instrument of sufficient accuracy to permit measurement within

0.01 g/cc. However, the mud balance is the instrument generally used.
The mud balance consists of a mud cup attached to one end of a beam which is
balanced on the other end by a fixed counterweight and a rider free to move along a
graduated scale.
A level bubble is mounted on the beam.
Attachments for extending the range of the balance may be used.
Figure 29-2. Mud Balance.

Calibration
The mud balance should be calibrated annually. Calibration can be checked by:
filling the cup with water;
placing the lid in the cup, allowing excess water to overflow
the balance should level when the rider is placed on the specific gravity mark equal to
1.00.
29-4
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 3 Part II, Measuring the Density of

Drilling Slurries
Procedure
The table below lists the steps necessary to perform the standard test for density of drilling
slurries.
Measuring the Density of Drilling Slurries
Step
1
Action
Set up the instrument base approximately level.
Fill the clean, dry cup with slurry to be tested

place the cap on the cup
rotate the cap until firmly seated.
Make sure some of the slurry is expelled through the hole in the cap to free trapped air or gas.
Wash or wipe the excess slurry from the outside of the cup.
5
6
Place the beam on the support and balance it by moving the rider along the graduated scale.
The beam is horizontal when the leveling bubble is on the center line.
Read the density at the side of the rider toward the knife-edge.
Make appropriate corrections when a range extender is used.
Clean and dry the instrument thoroughly after each use.
Calculations
To convert the density to other units, use the following relationships.
specific gravity = read directly off balance
specific gravity (p) in kg/m3 (lb/ft3) = (specific gravity (p) in g/cc) (1000) (62.4)
specific gravity (p) in kg/L (lb/gal) = (specific gravity (p) in g/cc) (70.0) (8.35).
Reporting
Record the specific gravity to the nearest 0.01.
29-5
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 4 Part III, Standard Test Method for Sand

Content by Volume of Drilling Slurries
Section 4
Part III, Standard Test Method for Sand Content by Volume of Drilling
Slurries
Part III determines the sand content of slurries used in slurry construction techniques.
Apparatus
'Sand-Content Set' consisting of the following:
sieve, 75 m (No. 200), 50 mm (2 in.) in diameter
funnel, to fit screen and glass measuring tube
measuring tube, glass tube should be marked from 0 to 20% volume.
NOTE: Volume of sand, including void spaces, is measured and expressed as percent by
volume of slurry.
Figure 29-3. Sand Content Set.
29-6
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 4 Part III, Standard Test Method for Sand

Content by Volume of Drilling Slurries
Procedure
The following table lists the steps necessary for measuring sand content by volume of
drilling slurries.
Measuring Sand Content by Volume of Drilling Slurries
Step
Action
Fill the glass measuring tube to the designated mark with slurry.
Add water to the next designated mark.
Close the mouth of the tube and shake vigorously.
Pour the mixture into the clean, wet 75 m (No. 200) sieve.
Discard the liquid that passes through the sieve.
Add more water to the tube, shake, and pour into the sieve. Repeat until the water, which passes
through the sieve, is clear.
Wash the sand retained on the sieve to clean any remaining slurry.
Attach the funnel upside down over the top of the sieve.
Carefully invert assembly and insert tip of funnel into the mouth of glass measuring tube.
10
With a fine spray of water, wash the sand retained on the sieve back into the measuring tube.
11
Allow the sand to settle.
12
Read the volume of sand from the graduation on the glass tube as a percent of the volume of
slurry originally added in Step 1.
13
Wash and dry all equipment thoroughly after each test.
Report Test Results

Report volume of sand to nearest whole percent.
29-7
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 5 Part IV, Standard Test Method for

Viscosity of Drilling Slurry
Section 5
Part IV, Standard Test Method for Viscosity of Drilling Slurry
This part is used as an indication of viscosity of drilling fluids.
Apparatus
graduated cup, 1 L (1 qt.) with 500 cc graduation
stopwatch
'Marsh Funnel' calibrated to outflow 500 cc of fresh water at a temperature of 21 3 C

(70 5 F) in 19 0.5 seconds.
Specifications
Item
Funnel Core
Orifice*
Marsh Funnel Specifications

Measurement
Length
Diameter
Capacity to bottom of screen
Length
Inside Diameter
Screen
Requirement
305 mm (12.0 in.)
152 mm (6.0 in.)
1500 cc
50.8 mm (2.0 in.)
4.7 mm (3/16 in.)
1.70 mm (No. 12)
*Orifice fixed at a level 19.0 mm (3/4 in.) below top of funnel.
Figure 29-4. Marsh Funnel and Cup.
29-8
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 5 Part IV, Standard Test Method for

Viscosity of Drilling Slurry
Procedure
The table below lists the steps necessary to measure the viscosity of drilling slurry.
Step
1
2
3
Determining Viscosity of Drilling Slurry

Action
Cover the funnel orifice with a finger and pour 500 cc freshly sampled drilling fluid through the
screen into the clean, upright funnel.
Remove finger and start stopwatch.
Measure the time for the funnel to empty.
Report the time to nearest second as Marsh funnel viscosity.
29-9
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 30
Tex-131-E, Consolidated Undrained Triaxial Compression
Contents:
Section 3 Preparing Specimen ....................................................................................... 30-5
Section 6 Graphs.......................................................................................................... 30-11
Section 7 Reporting ..................................................................................................... 30-12
30-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 30 Tex-131-E, Consolidated Undrained

Triaxial Compression Test for Undisturbed
Soils
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the angle of internal friction () and cohesion (c) strength
parameters of soils by triaxial compression testing.
When pore pressures are measured, the effective values of internal friction and cohesion, (')
and (c') respectively, can be calculated.
30-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
loading device (see 'Schematic Diagram of a Typical Consolidated Undrained Triaxial

Apparatus'), a variable-speed, motor-driven, screw or other compression system that is
strain-controlled, having sufficient capacity and sensitivity
load measuring device, such as a proving ring, normally mounted on the outside of the
test chamber, capable of measuring axial loads to within 1.0% of the anticipated load at
failure. An electronic load cell may also be used to measure the axial loads applied to
the test specimen, mounted inside the test chamber. When a load cell is used, the
following accessory electronic equipment may be needed to indicate the loads:
amplifier, to increase the electrical signals from the load cell so they are sufficiently
large to be detected by a digital voltmeter or strip chart recorder
power source, constant voltage, to excite the load cell or pressure transducer
DC bridge balance, to balance the electrical circuits of the measuring system
data recording device, to indicate the load or pressure
deformation indicator, a dial extensiometer graduated to 0.03 mm (0.001 in.), with a

travel of about 10% of the length of the test specimen, or other comparable device
trimming equipment, including a frame, equipment capable of measuring the

dimensions of the specimen to the nearest 0.3 mm (0.01 in.), sample cutter, endtrimming device, trimming and carving tools
pore pressure device, a closed manometer, a null indicator, or a pressure transducer.

When a pressure transducer is used, the same data acquisition system used to monitor
loads may be used.
drying oven, thermostatically controlled, capable of maintaining a temperature of 110

5 C (230 9 F)
balance, with a minimum capacity of 4000 g, accurate and readable to least 0.1 g
pressure chamber, including sample base plate, porous stone, two lubricated end plates
(optional), O-rings or other seals, stopcock valve, sample header, tubing for drainage,
top cap, load piston, rubber membrane and filter paper
miscellaneous apparatus, including vacuum pump and pressure device with associated
regulators and gages, membrane expander, moisture content cans, and data sheets.
30-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Section 2 Apparatus
Figure 30-1. Schematic Diagram of a Typical Consolidated Undrained Triaxial Apparatus.
30-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Section 3 Preparing Specimen
Section 3
Preparing Specimen
The table below lists the steps necessary to prepare the specimen for analysis.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Preparing Specimen
Action
Specimens should have a minimum diameter of 33.0 mm (1.3 in.).
The largest particle in the test specimen should be smaller than one-tenth of the specimen
diameter.
For specimens that have a diameter of 71.1 mm (2.8 in.) or larger, the largest particle size
should be smaller than one-sixth of the specimen.
If larger particles are present after the completion of a test of an undisturbed specimen,
appropriate notations should be made in the report of the test data.
The height to diameter (H/D) ratio shall be between 2.0 and 3.0 with a recommended value of 2.0,
except that:
When lubricated end plates are used, the (H/D) ratio may be lowered to 1.25.
The height and diameter of the specimen shall be measured to the nearest 0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
using a vernier caliper or other suitable device.
NOTE: This method requires testing a minimum of three specimens.
Undisturbed specimens may be prepared from large undisturbed samples or from samples secured
according to AASHTO T 207 or the Bridge Division's Geotechnical Manual.
When tubes are received in the laboratory, extrude the samples using a jack or other methods that
will not disturb the sample.
When samples are not tested immediately, place in plastic bags to preserve moisture content.
Any method of trimming is acceptable which, for the material being tested, produces minimum
disturbance.
Place the specimen in the end-trimming device and trim so the ends are perpendicular to the
longitudinal axis of the uniform circular specimen.
Obtain diameter and height of the specimen and determine the initial mass.
If the entire test specimen is not to be used for determination of moisture content, secure and
immediately place a representative sample of cuttings for this purpose in a covered container,
according to Test Method "Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials."
30-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Section 4 Procedure
Section 4
Procedure
The following table lists the steps necessary to perform the consolidated undrained triaxial
compression test for undisturbed soils.
Step
1
Consolidated Undrained Triaxial Compression Test

Action
Prepare pedestal by placing a saturated porous stone on the pedestal, and a filter paper disk on
top.
Place the specimen on the porous stone and a filter paper strip cage alongside the specimen to
provide the desired drainage path, as shown in 'Filter Strip Cage.'
Using a vacuum membrane expander, place a thin, leak-proof membrane over the specimen.
Place O-rings or other pressure seals around the membrane at the baseplate or cap of the
pedestal to provide a positive seal.
Place an additional filter paper disk, porous stone, and header or top cap, on top of the
specimen.
Place O-rings or other pressure seals around the membrane at the cap to provide a positive
seal.
Place the hollow cylinder on the base and secure.
Place the loading piston into the chamber through the bushings and lower until it enters, but
does not touch, the recess in the top cap.
Secure the loading piston with the locking device.
Place the test chamber containing the specimen in the loading frame and fill with fluid.
Saturate the drainage line, header caps and filter paper surrounding the specimen, to remove
air from between the sample and membrane.
Apply a small back pressure and chamber pressure with chamber pressure approximately 1 to
13.8 kPa (2 psi) greater than back pressure, to cause water to flow slowly from the pore
pressure line.
Connect pore pressure line to pore pressure-measuring device. Increase back pressure and
chamber pressure increments whenever pore pressure readout indicates pressure equalization
has been achieved throughout the sample.
Maintain chamber pressure approximately 34.4 kPa (5 psi) greater than back pressure, to
prevent flow between the sample and membrane.
Check the degree of saturation by closing the drainage valve and increasing the confining pressure
34.4 kPa (5 psi) or more.
The ratio of pore pressure change to the change in confining pressure for a saturated sample is
U / 3 = 1.0 = B, Pore Pressure Coefficient.
Continue to increase back pressure and confining pressure until pore pressure response indicates a
B value of at least 0.95.
NOTE: If pore pressure measurements are not required, eliminate this step.
The consolidation phase of the test allows the specimen to reach equilibrium in a drained state
under the effective consolidation stress for which a strength determination is required.
During consolidation, data is obtained for use in determining when consolidation is complete, and
for computing a rate of strain to be used for the shear portion of the test.
The consolidation procedure is as follows:
When the saturation phase of the test is completed
30-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Step
10
11
12
13
14
Section 4 Procedure

Action
bring the axial load piston into contact with specimen cap and record the reading on
deformation indicator.
Take care not to apply an axial load to the specimen exceeding 0.5% of the estimated axial
load at failure.
After recording the reading, raise the piston a small distance above specimen cap and lock
in place.
With the specimen drainage valves closed, hold the back pressure constant and increase the
chamber pressure until the difference between the chamber pressure and the back pressure equals
the desired effective consolidation pressure.
Obtain an initial buret reading and then open appropriate drainage valves so specimen may drain
from both ends into the buret.
At increasing intervals of elapsed time (0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 15, and 30 min. and at 1, 2, 4,
and 8 hr, etc.) observe and record buret readings.
After the 15 min. reading, record the accompanying deformation indicator readings obtained
by carefully coupling the piston with the specimen cap.
Depending on soil type, intervals may be changed to convenient intervals that allow for
adequate definition of volume change versus time.
Plot buret and deformation indicator readings versus the logarithm of elapsed time.
Allow consolidation to continue for at least one log cycle or one overnight period, after 100%
primary consolidation has been achieved.
A marked deviation between the slopes of the buret and deformation indicator curves toward
the end of consolidation, based on deformation indicator readings, indicates fluid leakage from
the chamber into the specimen. Test should be terminated.
Determine the time for 50% primary consolidation, t50:
Plot the buret readings versus the log of time in minutes.
Find the buret reading representing 100% primary consolidation.
First draw a straight line through the points representing the final readings and that exhibit a
straight line trend and a flat slope.
Draw a second straight line tangent to the steepest part of the buret-log time curve.
The intersection represents the buret corresponding to 100% primary consolidation.
Compression that occurs subsequent to 100% primary consolidation is defined as secondary
compression.
Time required for 50% consolidation, t50, may be found graphically from buret-log time curve
by observing the time that corresponds to 50% of primary consolidation of the curve.
Before axial load is applied, close the valve between the chamber and the buret so that the
specimen is sheared in an undrained condition.
Any volume change that occurs during consolidation is measured.
Start loading device and slow it to run a few minutes at desired testing speed to compensate
for piston friction or upward thrust on the piston due to chamber pressure or both.
Record zero reading of load and deformation measuring devices when piston makes contact
with top header.
NOTE: Remove the piston lock before starting the loading device. If the chamber pressure is
insufficient to restrain the loading piston from falling onto the top cap, then the additional load
applied to the sample by the loading piston will have to be added to the deviator load.
In the triaxial test
30-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Step
15
16
Section 4 Procedure

Action
the rate of strain should allow for equalization of pore pressures (if measured) in the test
specimen.
Assuming failure will occur after 4%, a suitable rate strain may be obtained by dividing 4% by
ten times the value of t50.
This rate of strain will allow determination of accurate stress paths in the range necessary to
define effective strength envelopes.
If however, it is estimated that failure will occur at a strain value lower than 4%, obtain a
suitable strain rate by dividing the estimated failure strain by ten times the value of t50.
Record load and deformation readings at sufficiently small intervals to accurately define the
stress-strain curve.
The criterion of failure shall be the maximum value of the deviator stress, provided a maximum
does occur.
If no definite maximum occurs and the deviator stress continued to increase with strain, failure
will be taken as the deviator stress at 15% strain.
If pore pressures are measured, the maximum effective principal stress ratio may be used as
the failure criterion.
After failure, release all pressures and drain the confining fluid from the test chamber.
Disassemble the testing apparatus, examine the specimen, and sketch the mode of failure.
Obtain the specimen weight, height, and diameter for density and determine final moisture
content.
Figure 30-2. Filter Strip Cage.
30-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Section 5
Calculations
Use the following calculations to determine triaxial compression.
Calculate the volume strain (EV):
V = V / V
V = Ld 2 / 4
V = Ld 2 / 4
Where:
V = original volume of specimen
V = volume change as measured by buret
L = length of specimen as determined by physical measurements, mm (in.)
L = change in length of specimen during consolidation, mm (in.)
d = average of a minimum of three physical diameter measurements, mm (in.).
Assuming that the specimen strains equally in all directions during consolidation, the length
of the specimen after consolidation may be determined by 1 = v / 3. Alternately, the
change in length of the specimen may be measured directly.
Calculate the axial strain for a given applied load:
V = l / ls
Where:
l = change in length of the specimen as determined from the deformation

indicator, mm(in)
ls = length of specimen after consolidation, mm(in.).
Calculate the average cross-sectional area for a given applied load (A) or from
dimensions obtained by direct measurement:
A = A0 / ( 1 )
Calculate the deviator load per unit area for a given applied load:
d = P / A = 1
Where:
P = applied deviator load, kg (lbs.)
A = corresponding average cross-sectional area, mm2 (in.2)
30-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
d = deviator load per unit area
A0 = initial average cross-sectional area of the specimen, m2 (in.2).
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Section 6 Graphs
Section 6
Graphs
The maximum value of the deviator stress (d = 1 - 3), or the maximum effective
principal stress ratio 1/ 3, is selected and used to construct the Mohr's circles.
If pore pressure, U, was measured, subtract U from principal stresses.
When all Mohr's circles have been plotted, draw a line that is most nearly tangent to all
the circles.
The construction of a Mohr Stress Circle is shown in 'Construction of Mohr Stress

Circle.'
The intersection of this line with the ordinate axis is the cohesion (effective U is
measured) value, c (c') and the angle between this line and the horizontal is the angle of
internal friction, (effective is U is measured) (').
Figure 30-3. Construction of Mohr Stress Circle.
TxDOT 11/2004

Soils
Section 7 Reporting
Section 7
Reporting
Include the following in the report:
Project information and location of sample
Type of test performed that is, consolidated undrained triaxial test with pore pressure
measurements, or consolidated undrained triaxial test without pore pressure
measurements
Type and shape of specimen that is, undisturbed, remolded, cylindrical, or prismatic
Initial density and moisture content
Remarks note any unusual conditions or other data that would be considered
necessary to properly interpret the results obtained
Plot of Mohr circles and envelope with cohesion and angle of internal friction.
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 31
Tex-132-E, Texas Cone Penetration
Contents:
31-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 31 Tex-132-E, Texas Cone Penetration
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the relative density or consistency and load bearing capacity of
materials encountered in foundation exploration work.
Correlation between the cone penetrometer measurements and the load bearing capacity of
subsurface materials can be found in the Bridge Division's Geotechnical Manual.
31-2
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
hammer, 77 1 kg (170 2 lb.), with a 0.6 0.01 m (24 0.5 in.) drop
drill stem, sufficient to accomplish boring to the desired depth
anvil, threaded to fit the drill stem, and slotted to accept the hammer
'Conical Driving Point,' 76 mm (3 in.) diameter, with 63.5 mm (2.50 in.) long point.
NOTE: Form driving point from AISI 4142 steel, heat in an electric oven for 1 hour at 843.3
to 871.1 C (1550 to 1600 F), plunge point-first into approximately 95 L (25 gal.) of
tempering oil, and move continuously until cool.
Figure 31-1. Conical Driving Point for the Cone Penetrometer Test.
31-3
TxDOT 11/2004
Section 3 Procedure
Section 3
Procedure
The following table lists the steps necessary to perform the Texas Cone Penetration test.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Performing Texas Cone Penetration Test

Action
Attach a 76 mm (3 in.) diameter penetrometer cone on the bottom of the drill stem and lower it to
the bottom of the cored hole.
Attach the anvil to the top of the drill stem, and position the 77 kg (170 lb.) hammer above it.
Drive the penetrometer cone 12 blows, or approximately 152 mm (6 in.), whichever comes first, to
seat it in the soil or rock.
Make two reference marks on the drill stem at 152 mm (6 in.) increments of penetration.
In relatively soft materials, drive the penetrometer point 305 mm (12 in.), and note the number
of blows required for each 152 mm (6 in.) increment on the Drilling Log, as found in the
Bridge Division's Geotechnical Manual.
In hard materials, including rock, drive point for 100 blows, recording the depth of penetration
for the first and second 50 blows.
NOTE: The number of hammer blows for the first 152 mm (6 in.) increment of penetration and the
second should be recorded separately, as these indicate the general type of material.
If the soil is granular, the number of blows for the second increment is significantly greater than
for the first.
If it is clay, the number of blows required for both are generally about the same.
31-4
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 32
Tex-135-E, Freezing and Thawing Tests of Compacted SoilCement Mixture
Contents:
Section 4 Test Record Form .......................................................................................... 32-5
Section 8 Report .......................................................................................................... 32-11
Section 9 Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures .................................. 32-12
32-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 32 Tex-135-E, Freezing and Thawing

Tests of Compacted Soil-Cement Mixture
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the soil-cement losses, moisture changes, and volume changes
(swell and shrinkage) produced by repeated freezing and thawing of hardened soil-cement
specimens.
32-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
compaction device, automatic tamper with base plate to hold 152 mm (6 in.) I.D.
forming molds, equipped with 4.5 0.01 kg (10 0.02 lb.) ram and adjustable height of
fall; striking face of ram, 43 2 segment of a 74 2.5 mm (2.9 0.1 in.) radius circle
compaction mold, 152 mm I.D. + 2 or - 0.4 mm (6 in. I.D. [+ 0.0625 or - 0.0156 in.])
and 216 2 mm (8.5 1/16 in.) height, with removable collar (Test Method
"Tex-905-K, Determining the Volume of Molds, Rings and Unit Weight Measures")
measuring device, micrometer dial assembly for determining height of specimens, with
set of standard spacer blocks
balance, with minimum capacity of 16 kg (35 lbs.), accurate and readable to 0.1% of the
test load or 2 g ( .005 lbs.), whichever is greater
extra base plate, or other solid and unyielding surface or device
press, specimen ejection
drying oven, controlled to 110 5 C (230 9 F)
metal pans, wide and shallow, for mixing and drying materials
carriers or trays
stones, circular and porous, slightly less than 152 mm (6 in.) in diameter and
approximately 51 mm (2 in.) in height
supply of small tools, including 1.8 to 2.3 kg (4 to 5 lb.) rawhide hammer, 0.45 to 0.9
kg (1 to 2 lb.) plastic mallet, mixing pan and trowel, and level
freezing cabinet, capable of maintaining temperature of minus 23.3 C (-10 F) or lower
moist room, or suitable covered container capable of maintaining a temperature of 21

2 C (70 3 F) and a relative humidity of 98% to 100% for 7 days
wire scratch brush, of 51 x 4 mm (2 in. x 0.167 in.) flat No. 26 gauge wire bristles
assembled in 50 groups of 10 bristles each and mounted to form 5 longitudinal rows and
10 transverse rows of bristles on a 191 mm x 64 mm (7.5 in. x 2.5 in.) hardwood block
mechanical mixing device
scarifier, six-pronged ice pick, or similar apparatus, to remove the smooth compaction
planes at the top of the first, second and third layers of the specimen
flat pan, about 51 mm (2 in.) deep
pads, 6.4 mm (1/4 in.) thick, felt, blotters, sheets of plastic or similar material.
32-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Materials
Section 3
Materials
fresh supply of Portland cement meeting the requirements of the "Item 524, Hydraulic
Cement" of the TxDOT Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of
Highways, Streets, and Bridges
good quality tap water
material to be cement stabilized.
32-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Test Record Form
Section 4
Test Record Form
Record test data on 'Compressive Strength Test Worksheet for Soil-Cement Mixtures,' and
'Compression Test Results.'
32-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5
Preparing Sample
Select approximately 180 kg (400 lb.) sample of material to be treated with cement and
follow 'Part II, Preparing Samples for Compaction and Triaxial Tests' of Test Method
"Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing."
32-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6
Procedures
Dry Density of Laboratory Mixed Soil-Cement Specimens
The table below lists the steps necessary to calculate the dry density of laboratory mixed
soil-cement specimens.
Calculating the Dry Density of Laboratory Mixed Soil-Cement Specimens
Step
Action
1
Follow the method described under Test Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials," to determine the
optimum moisture and maximum density for a soil-cement mixture containing 6% cement.
The amount of cement is added as a percentage based on the dry weight of the soil.
NOTE: In performing this part of the test, dry mix the weighed material passing the 2.00 mm (No.
10) sieve.
2 Wet the material according to Test Method "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials" and stir.
3 Add cement to the material.
4 Mix thoroughly.
5 Compact each layer with a compactive effort of 1100 kN - m/mm3 (13.26 ft-lb/in3) (50 blows per
51 mm [2 in.], using the 4.5 kg [10 lb.] ram with 457 mm [18 in.] drop).
6
Scarify the tops of the first 3 layers to remove smooth compaction planes before placing and
compacting succeeding layers.
This scarification should form grooves at right angles to each other, approximately 3 mm (0.125
in.) wide and 3 mm (0.125 in.) deep, and approximately 6 mm (0.25 in.) apart.
7 Begin molding a specimen at 6% cement using the optimum moisture determined in Step 1. The
percent molding water would be varied slightly as the percent cement is increased or decreased to
mold nearer optimum moisture without running a new M-D curve for each percentage of cement.
% Cement Increase = difference in cement content between curve and other cement contents.
% Molding Water = % optimum from M-D curve + 0.25 (% cement increase).
NOTE: A new M-D curve for each percentage of cement may be performed, if desired.
8 Mold three specimens at 6% cement and optimum moisture for later testing.
9
Weigh and record one specimen as molded and place in an oven at 110 5 C (230 9 F) for at
least twelve hours or to constant mass (weight).
10 Calculate the percentage of moisture to check against design moisture content.
11 Weigh each compacted specimen with mold.
12 Then remove the mold and calculate the oven-dry density of one specimen in kg/m3 (lb/ft3) to
check against design density.
13 Identify one specimen as No. 1, along with other needed identification marks, and use this specimen
to obtain data on moisture and volume changes during the test.
14 Identify the second specimen as No. 2, along with other needed identification marks, and use this
specimen to obtain data on soil-cement losses during the freeze-thaw test.
15 Determine the average circumference and height of the No. 1 specimen and calculate its volume.
16 Place the molded specimens, in rectangular pans suitable for capillary wetting, in the moist
room for a period of seven days.
The specimens should be exposed to high humidity but protected from free water spray during
curing.
32-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Calculating the Dry Density of Laboratory Mixed Soil-Cement Specimens

Step
Action
17 Weigh and measure the No. 1 specimen at the end of the seven-day storage period to provide data
for calculating its moisture content and volume.
NOTE: It is important that all height and diameter measurements be accurate to within 0.25 in. and
be taken at the same points on the specimen at all times.
18 Using the percent molding water from Step 3, mold two additional sets of specimens, one at 4 %
cement, and one at 8% cement.
Each of these sets should have specimens numbered 1 and 2 to be handled as described above.
These, plus the No. 1 and No. 2 specimens at 6% cement, form a complete set.
19 Level the top surface of each specimen and measure before centering specimens over porous stones
before removing specimens from the molds by means of a small press.
20 Place a card on each specimen showing the laboratory identification number and the percent of
cement.
NOTE: If compressive strength information is desired, three additional samples at each cement
content should be molded.
21 In calculating the actual dry density of laboratory mixed soil-cement specimens, the dry mass of
material is considered to be the total mass of the oven-dry soil in the specimen.
The amount of moisture should be the weight of hygroscopic moisture in the soil plus the
amount of water added.
Road-mixed, wetted materials and soil-cement cores should have moisture and density
determined from the oven-dry masses.
Freezing and Thawing

The following table outlines the freezing and thawing tests of compacted soil-cement
mixtures.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Freezing and Thawing Tests of Compacted Soil-Cement Mixtures

Action
At the end of the seven day storage in the moist room, place water-saturated felt pads, blotters, or
sheets of plastic, no more than 6 mm (0.25 in.) thick, between the specimens and the porous
stones.
Place the assembly in a freezing cabinet having a constant temperature not warmer than minus
23.3 C (-10 F) for twenty-four hours and remove.
Weigh and measure all No. 1 specimens (volume and moisture change specimens) of each cement
content.
Replace the assembly in the moist room or a suitable covered container having a temperature
of 21 2 C (70 3 F) and a relative humidity of 98% to 100% for twenty-three hours and
remove.
Free potable water shall be made available to the absorbent pads under the specimens to permit
the specimens to absorb water by capillary action during the thawing period (use pans and
porous stones as in Test Method "Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression Tests for Disturbed Soils
and Base Materials").
Weigh and measure all of the No. 1 specimens after each thawing period.
Give the three No. 2 specimens (soil-cement loss specimens) two firm strokes on all areas with the
wire scratch brush.
Hold the brush with the long axis parallel to the longitudinal axis of the specimen.
32-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Step
8
9
10
11
12
Freezing and Thawing Tests of Compacted Soil-Cement Mixtures

Action
Apply these strokes to the full height and width of the specimen with a firm stroke
corresponding to approximately 1.4 kg (3 lbs.) force.
Eighteen to twenty vertical brush strokes are required to cover the sides of the specimen twice
and four strokes are required on each end.
NOTE: This pressure is measured by:
Clamping a specimen in a vertical position on the edge of a platform scale and zero the
scale.
Applying vertical brushing strokes to the specimen and note the force necessary to register
approximately 1.36 kg (3 lbs.).
Turn the specimens end over end before they are replaced on the water-saturated pads.
The steps described above constitute one cycle (48 hours) of freezing and thawing.
Again place the specimens in the freezing cabinet and continue the procedure for 12 cycles.
NOTE: Mass determinations of No. 2 specimens before and after brushing are usually made at the
end of each cycle. Some specimens made of silty and clayey soils tend to scale on sides and
ends, particularly after about the sixth cycle of test. Remove this scale with a sharp-pointed
instrument, since regular brushing may not be effective.
The No. 1 specimen of each cement content may be discontinued prior to 12 cycles, if
measurements become inaccurate due to soil-cement loss of the No. 2 specimen.
NOTE: If it is not possible to run the cycles continuously because of Sundays, holidays, or for any
other reason, hold the specimens in the freezing cabinet during the layover period.
After 12 cycles of test, break down the No. 1 specimens, dry to constant mass at 110 C (230 F),
and weigh to determine the oven-dry weight.
Calculate volume and moisture changes of specimen No. 1 and the soil-cement losses of specimen
No. 2 after the prescribed 12 cycles of the freeze thaw test.
32-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 7
Calculations
Perform the following calculations:
Calculate the difference between the volume of specimens No. 1 at the time of molding
and subsequent volumes as percentage of the original volume:
% of Original Volume = [(OV FV ) / OV ] 100
Where:
OV = Original Volume
FV = Final Volume.
Calculate the moisture content of specimens No. 1 at the time of molding and
subsequent moisture contents as a percentage of the original oven-dry weight of
specimen:
% of Original Oven Dry Weight of Specimen = [( WO WF ) / WO ]100
Where:
WO = Dry weight
WF = Molding weight or surface dry weight during test.
Correct the oven-dry mass of specimen No. 2 for water that has reacted with the cement
and soil during the test and is retained in the specimen at 110 C (230 F):
Corrected Oven Dry Mass = 100 ( A / B )
Where:
A = oven-dry weight after drying at 110 C (230 F)
B = percentage of water retained in specimen plus 100.
The percentage of water retained in specimens No. 2 after drying for use in the above
formula can be assumed to be equal to the water retained in corresponding specimen No. 1.
Calculate the soil-cement loss of specimens No. 2 as a percentage of the original ovendry mass of the specimen, where:
Soil Cement Loss = 100[( C D ) / C ]
Where:
C = original calculated oven-dry mass
D = final corrected oven-dry mass.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 8 Report
Section 8
Report
Include the following in the report:
The designed optimum moisture and maximum density of the molded specimens.
The moisture content and density obtained in molded specimens. Good laboratory
practice permits the following tolerances between design factors and those obtained in
the molded specimens:
Moisture content 1%
Density 48 kg/m3 (3 lb/ft3).
The designed cement content, in percent, of the molded specimens.
The maximum volume change, in percent, and maximum moisture content during test
of specimens No. 1.
The soil-cement loss, in percent, of specimens No. 2.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 9 Classification of Soils and SoilAggregate Mixtures
Section 9
Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures
The following percent loss recommendations by the Portland Cement Association

(PCA) have been considered satisfactory to insure durable soil-cement pavements that
resist leaching of the cement and degrading of the pavement structure.
Soil Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3, not over 14%
Soil Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, and A-5, not over 10%.
Soil Groups A-6 and A-7, not over 7%.
AASHTO has established a classification system for Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures.
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 33
Tex-140-E, Measuring Thickness of Pavement Layer
Contents:
Section 4 Report ............................................................................................................ 33-5
33-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 33 Tex-140-E, Measuring Thickness of

Pavement Layer
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method determines the thickness of a base, subbase, or subgrade when a core cannot be
obtained.
33-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Pavement Layer
Section 2 Apparatus
Section 2
Apparatus
drill with auger bit, grubbing hoe, or other acceptable tool
nail, blade, knife, or other suitable tool, not to exceed 3 mm (1/8 in.) in thickness, and
approximately 75 mm (3 in.) long
folding scale, 2 m (6 ft.), or other scale with 3 mm (1/8 in.) or smaller divisions
depth measurement indicator, DHT No. 2238 (not to be used for pay purposes).
33-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Pavement Layer
Section 3 Procedure
Section 3
Procedure
The following table lists the steps necessary to measure the thickness of a pavement layer.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Measuring the Thickness of a Pavement Layer

Action
Drill or dig a hole to sufficiently penetrate the layer immediately below the layer being
measured.
Determine the thickness of the layer after the finished grade (bluetops) has been obtained.
Make a vertical groove on the side of the hole to remove loose material and expose interface of
both layers.
Locate interface visually. When the interface is clearly defined, push a 6-penny nail or blade
horizontally into the interface approximately 25 mm (1 in.).
Measure from the clearly defined interface or top of nail (blade) to the top of the layer being
measured to nearest 3 mm (1/8 in.) and record as t1.
A straightedge or surveyor's stake may be used to place across top of hole to determine the top
of layer.
Move the nail to another location on the interface and measure the thickness.
Record as t2, etc.
Repeat until a minimum of 3 measurements per hole are obtained.
33-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Pavement Layer
Section 4 Report
Section 4
Report
Report the average of three (3) measurements (t1, t2 and t3) to the nearest 3 mm (1/8 in.) as
the thickness of the pavement layer.
NOTE 1: If lime or cement is used as a soil stabilizer in neutral or acid soils, the bottom of
this layer may be emphasized by a light application of 1% phenolphthalein indicator
solution prepared according to Test Method "Tex-600-J, Sampling and Testing
Hydrated Lime, Quicklime and Commercial Lime Slurry." This solution should be
applied after the vertical groove is made and from the bottom up. Once the interface is
identified, application of the solution should stop.
NOTE 2: If depth measurement indicator is used:
Drive the indicator into soil deeper than the specified requirement.
Rotate using a pin through the shaft.
Carefully remove indicator and lay on ground with groove up.
Identify bottom and top of layer.
Measure layer thickness.
Record layer thickness to nearest 3 mm (1/8 in.).
33-5
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 34
Tex-141-E, Manual Procedure for Description and
Identification of Soils
Contents:
Section 4 Pertinent Information for Soil Description .................................................... 34-5
Section 5 Sampling ........................................................................................................ 34-7
Section 6 Description Criteria ....................................................................................... 34-8
Section 7 Procedures and Criteria.................................................................................. 34-9
Section 8 Identification of Inorganic Fine-grained Soils............................................. 34-13
34-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 34 Tex-141-E, Manual Procedure for

Description and Identification of Soils
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method describes and identifies naturally occurring soils based on visual examination
and simple manual tests. The procedure may be performed in the field during sampling
and/or in the laboratory prior to detailed testing.
The familiarity of the user with Test Method "Tex-142-E, Laboratory Classification of
Soils for Engineering Purposes," will greatly improve the effectiveness of this method.
One can group similar soil samples so that only a minimum number of laboratory tests
need to be performed for positive soil classification.
The descriptive information required by this method can be used to describe a soil to aid
in the evaluation of its significant properties for engineering use. This method should be
used to enter pertinent information on the 'Field Log of Boring' during the geotechnical
exploration and sampling operation.
34-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2
Definitions
clay Clay is a fine grained soil that can be made to exhibit plasticity (putty-like
when air dry.
organic clay - Organic clay is a soil that would be classified as a clay except that its LL
after oven drying (dry sample preparation) is less then 75% of its LL before oven drying
(wet sample preparation).
organic silt - Organic silt is a soil that would be classified as a silt except that its LL
peat - Peat is a soil composed of vegetable tissue in various stages of decomposition

usually with a dark brown to black color, a spongy consistency, and a texture ranging
from fibrous to amorphous.

34-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
pocket knife or small spatula
hydrochloric acid a small bottle of diluted hydrochloric acid (HCL), one part of HCL
(10N) to three parts of water.
CAUTION: Do not add water to acid.
34-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Pertinent Information for Soil

Description
Section 4
Pertinent Information for Soil Description
The following table contains the information necessary for complete soil description.
Item
Color
Consistency
Density
Moisture
Condition
Structure
Soil Description Information

Description
Color is very useful in identifying organic soils and materials of similar origin and/or
stratum.
Color should be described for moist soils in accordance with the 'Standard Color Chart.'
For intact fine-grained and plastic soils, describe the consistency as very soft, soft, stiff,
medium stiff, very stiff, or hard.
Pocket Penetrometer (PP) measurements in kg/cm2 (TSF) may be used to aid in
estimating consistency.
For intact fine-grained soil, predominantly sand, describe the density in very, loose, loose,
medium dense, dense, and very dense.
Describe the moisture condition as dry, moist, or wet.
Description of soils secondary structures such as fissures, slickensides, lenses, layers, etc.
are important in understanding the weathering and depositional history of the material.
Odor
Describe the odor if organic or unusual. This is especially apparent in fresh samples.
If the samples are dried, the odor may often be revived by heating a moistened sample.
Foreign
The observation of materials such as glass, roots, bricks, etc. which are foreign to the
Materials
natural soil is a strong indication of fill material.
HCL Reaction The reaction of the soil with diluted HCL indicates the relative amount of calcium
carbonate (calcareous materials) in the soil.
Cementation
Describe the cementation of intact coarse-grained soils as weak, moderate, or strong.
Hardness
The relative difficulty of particles cracking, fracturing, or crumbling under a hammer blow.
Angularity
Describe the angularity of sand and gravel as angular, subangular, subrounded or
rounded.
A range of angularity such as subrounded to rounded or angular to subangular may be
used.
Shape
The shape of fractured or unfractured gravel, cobbles, and boulders as defined by the width
to thickness and length to width ratios. The particle length, width, and thickness refer to the
greatest, intermediate, and least dimensions of a particle, respectively.
34-5
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Pertinent Information for Soil

Description
Figure 341. Standard Color Chart.
34-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5 Sampling
Section 5
Sampling
For accurate description and identification, the minimum amount of the specimens to be
examined shall be according to the following schedule.
Minimum Specimen Size by Maximum Particle Size Sieve Opening
Maximum Particle Size Sieve Opening
Minimum Specimen Size Dry Weight
4.75 mm (No. 4)
100 g (0.25 lb.)
9.5 mm (3/8 in.)
200 g (0.5 lb.)
19.0 mm (3/4 in.)
1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
38.1 mm (1-1/2 in.)
8.0 kg (17.6 lb.)
75.0 mm (3 in.)
60.0 kg (132 lb.)
34-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6 Description Criteria
Section 6
Description Criteria
Describing the Reaction with HCL
Use the following when describing the reaction with hydrochloric acid:
Description
None
Weak
Strong
Reaction with HCL

Criteria
No visible reaction.
Some reaction, with bubbles forming slowly.
Violent reaction, with bubbles forming immediately.
Describing Consistency
Use the following when describing consistency:
Consistency
Description
Very Soft
Soft
Medium Stiff
Stiff
Very Stiff
Hard
Pocket Pen.
Less than 0.5
0.5 to 1.0
1.0 to 2.0
2.0 to 3.5
3.5 to 4.5
Greater than 4.5
Criteria
Thumb will penetrate soil more than 25 mm (1 in.)
Thumb will penetrate soil about 25 mm (1 in.)
Thumb will indent soil about 12.5 mm (1/2 in.)
Thumb will indent soil about 6 mm (1/4 in.)
Thumb will indent soil about 3 mm (1/8 in.)
Thumb will not indent soil but readily indented with
thumbnail.
Describing Structure
Use the following when describing structure:
Structure
Description
Stratified
Laminated
Fissured
Slickensided
Blocky
Lensed
Homogeneous
Criteria
Alternating layers of varying material or color with layers at least 6 mm (1/4 in.)
thick.
Alternating layers of varying material or color with the layers less than 6 mm (1/4
in.) thick.
Breaks along definite planes of fracture with little resistance to fracturing.
Fracture planes appear polished or glossy, sometimes striated.
Cohesive soil that can be broken down into small angular fragments.
Inclusion of small pockets of different soil, such as small lenses of sand scattered
through a mass of clay.
Same color and appearance throughout.
34-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 7 Procedures and Criteria
Section 7
Procedures and Criteria
Describing Dilatancy
Procedure
The following table lists the procedural steps for describing dilatancy.
Step
1
2
3
4
Describing Dilatancy
Action
Select enough material from the specimen to mold into a ball about 13 mm (1/2 in.) in
diameter. Mold the material, adding water if necessary, until it has a soft, but not sticky
consistency.
Smooth the soil ball in the palm of one hand with the blade of a knife or spatula. Shake
horizontally by striking the side of the hand vigorously against the other hand several times.
Note the reaction of water appearing on the surface of soil.
Squeeze the sample by closing the hand or pinching the soil between the fingers, and note the
reaction as none, slow, or rapid in accordance with the following criteria. The reaction is the
speed with which water appears while shaking, and disappearing while squeezing.
Describe dilatancy in accordance with the following criteria.
Criteria
The following table lists the criteria for describing dilatancy.

Description
None
Slow
Rapid
Criteria for Describing Dilantancy

Criteria
No visible change in the specimen.
Water appears slowly on the surface of the specimen during shaking and does not
disappear or disappears slowly upon squeezing.
Water appears quickly on the surface of the specimen during shaking and
disappears quickly upon squeezing.
34-9
TxDOT 11/2004

Describing Toughness
Procedure
The following table lists the procedural steps for describing toughness.
Step
1
Describing Toughness
Action
Following the completion of the dilatancy test, shape the test specimen into an elongated
pat and roll by hand on a smooth surface or between the palms into a thread about 3 mm
(1/8 in.) in diameter. (If the sample is too wet for rolling, spread sample into a thin layer
and allow some of the moisture to evaporate.)
Continue the kneading and rolling of the specimen until it has reached its plastic limit.
Note the pressure required to roll the sample into the 3 mm (1/8 in.) thread when it is near
the plastic limit.
Also note the strength of the thread when it is near the plastic limit.
Describe the toughness of the material as low, medium or high based on the following criteria.
Criteria
The following table lists the criteria for describing toughness.

Description
Low
Medium
High
Criteria for Describing Toughness

Criteria
Only slight pressure is required to roll the thread near the plastic limit.
The thread and the lump are weak and soft.
Medium pressure is required to roll the thread to near the plastic limit.
The thread and lump have medium stiffness.
Considerable pressure is required to roll the thread to near the plastic limit.
The thread and the lump have very high stiffness.
TxDOT 11/2004

Describing Plasticity
Criteria
On the basis of observations made during the toughness test, describe the plasticity of the
material according to the following criteria.
Description
Nonplastic
Low
Medium
High
Criteria for Describing Plasticity

Criteria
A 3 mm (1/8 in.) thread cannot be rolled at any water content.
The thread can barely be rolled and the lump cannot be formed when drier than the
plastic limit.
The thread is easy to roll and not much time is required to reach the plastic limit.
The thread cannot be rolled after reaching the plastic limit.
The lump crumbles when drier than the plastic limit.
Considerable amount of time is required for rolling and kneading to reach the plastic
limit.
The thread can be rerolled several times after reaching the plastic limit. The lump
can be formed without crumbling when drier than the plastic limit.
TxDOT 11/2004

Describing Dry Strength
Procedure
The following table lists the procedure for describing dry strength.
Describing Dry Strength
Step
1
3
4
Action
Select enough material from the specimen to mold into a ball about 25 mm (1 in.) in
diameter.
Mold the material until it has the consistency of putty, adding water if necessary.
Make at least three test specimens from the molded material.
A test specimen shall be a ball of material about 13 mm (1/2 in.) in diameter.
f the specimen contains natural dry lumps, those that are about 13 mm (1/2 in.) in diameter
may be used in place of the molded balls.
Allow the test specimens to dry in air or sun, or by artificial means, as long as the temperature
does not exceed 60 C (140 F).
Test the strength of the dry balls or lumps by crushing between the fingers.
Note the strength as none, low, medium, high, or very high in accordance with the following
criteria.
Critieria
The following table lists the criteria for describing dry strength.
Description
None
Low
Medium
High
Very High
Criteria for Describing Dry Strength

Criteria
The dry specimen crumbles into powder with mere pressure of handling.
The dry specimen crumbles into powder with some finger pressure.
The dry specimen breaks into pieces or crumbles with considerable finger pressure.
The dry specimen cannot be broken with finger pressure. Specimen will break into
pieces between thumb and a hard surface.
The dry specimen cannot be broken between the thumb and a hard surface.
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 8 Identification of Inorganic Fine-grained

Soils
Section 8
Identification of Inorganic Fine-grained Soils
Identification
The results of manual testing of soils for toughness, plasticity, dilatancy, and dry strength
can be used to identify the common inorganic soils as follows.
Soil Symbol
ML Silt
CL Lean Clay
MH Elastic
Silt
CH Fat Clay
Identification of Inorganic Fine-grained Soils

Dry Strength
Dilatancy
Plasticity
None to Low
Slow to Rapid
None to Low
Medium to High
Low to Medium
None to Slow
None to Slow
Low to Medium
Medium
Toughness
Low or thread cannot be
formed
Medium
Low to medium
High to Very
High
None
High
High
Criteria
Describing Particle Shape

Description
Flat
Elongated
Flat & elongated
Describing Cementation
Description
Weak
Moderate
Strong
Particle Shape Criteria for Identifying Fine-grained Soils

Criteria
Particles with width/thickness > 3
Particles with length/width > 3
Particles with width/thickness > 3 and Particles with length/width > 3
Cementation Criteria for Identifying Fine-grained Soils

Criteria
Crumbles or breaks with handling or little finger pressure.
Crumbles or breaks with considerable finger pressure.
Will not crumble or break with finger pressure.
Describing Angularity of Coarse-Grained Particles

Description
Angular
Subangular
Subrounded
Rounded
Angularity Criteria for Identifying Fine-grained Soils

Criteria
Particles have sharp edges and relative plane sides with unpolished surfaces.
Particles are similar to angular description but have rounded edges.
Particles have nearly plane sides but have well-rounded corners and edges.
Particles have smoothly curved sides and no edges.
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 35
Tex-142-E, Laboratory Classification of Soils for
Engineering Purposes
Contents:
Section 3 Preparing Soil for Classification.................................................................... 35-4
Section 5 Consistency.................................................................................................... 35-8
Section 6 Density........................................................................................................... 35-9
Section 7 Dry Unit Weight .......................................................................................... 35-10
35-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 35 Tex-142-E, Laboratory Classification

of Soils for Engineering Purposes
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
This method is a system for classifying disturbed and undisturbed soils based on laboratory
determination of liquid limit, plasticity index, and particle-size characteristics.
This method of soil classification is similar to the ASTM version of the Unified Soils
Classification System (USCS). This classification system identifies three major soil
groups: coarse-grained soils, fine-grained soils, and highly organic soils.
Based on visual observations and prescribed laboratory tests, a soil is assigned a group
symbol(s) and names and thereby classified.
There are other parameters such as unconfined compressive strength, dry unit weight,
and water content which can be used in conjunction with this method to provide
detailed description of undisturbed soil samplers.
35-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2
Definitions
plasticity chart - A plasticity chart is used to differentiate the plasticity and organic
characteristics of the fine-grained soils based on liquid limit (LL) and plasticity index
(PI) of the soils.
a - line - On the plasticity chart, A-line is a sloped line beginning at PI = 4 and LL =

25.5 with an equation of PI = 0.73(LL-20).
clay - Clay is a fine grained soil that can be made to exhibit plasticity (putty-like
when air dry.
organic clay - Organic clay is a soil that would be classified as a clay except that its LL
organic silt - Organic silt is a soil that would be classified as a silt except that its LL
peat - Peat is a soil composed of vegetable tissue in various stages of decomposition

usually with a dark brown to black color, a spongy consistency, and a texture ranging
from fibrous to amorphous.

coefficient of curvature, Cc - Coefficient of Curvature is the ratio (D30)2/(D10 D60),

where D60, D30, and D10 are the particle diameters corresponding to 60, 30, and 10%
finer on the cumulative particle-size distribution curve, respectively.
coefficient of uniformity, Cu. - Coefficient of Uniformity is the ratio (D60/D10), where

D60 and D10 are the particle diameters corresponding to 60 and 10% finer on the
cumulative particle-size distribution curve, respectively.
35-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Preparing Soil for Classification
Section 3
Preparing Soil for Classification
Before a sample can be classified according to this test method, the particle-size distribution
of the minus 75 mm (3 in.) sieve and minus 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve material and the soils
constants (LL, PL & PI) of the minus 425 m (No. 40) sieve material must be determined.
Use the following test methods to determine these parameters.
"Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils"
Following are the criteria for assigning group symbols and group names using laboratory
test results.
Coarse-Grained Soil
More than 50% of coarse fraction retained on the 75 m (No. 200) sieve.
Gravels more than 50% of coarse fraction retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve
Symbol
Group Name
Clean Gravel less than
GW
Well-graded
gravel
Cu 4 & 1 Cc 3
5% fines
GP
Poorly graded gravel
Cu 4 &/or 1 > Cc > 3
Gravel with fines 5 to
GW-GC
Well-graded gravel with
Cu 4 & 1 Cc 3
12% clay fines
clay
Cu < 4 &/or 1 > Cc > 3
GP-GC
Poorly graded gravel with
clay
Gravel with fines 5 to
GW-GM
Well-graded gravel with
Cu 4 & 1 Cc 3
12% silt fines
silt
Cu < 4 &/or 1 > Cc > 3
GP-GM
Poorly graded gravel with
silt
Gravel with more than 12% Fines classified as CL or CH
GC
Clayey Gravel
fines
Fines classified as ML or
GM
Silty Gravel
MH
NOTE: If gravel contains 15% sand, add "with sand" after group name. If fines are
organic, add "with organic fines" after the group name.
35-4
TxDOT 11/2004

Sands
50% or more of coarse fraction passes the 4.75 mm (No.4) sieve.
Sands 50% or more of coarse fraction passes the 4.75mm (No. 4) sieve
Symbol
Group Name
Clean Sands - less than 5%
SW
Well-graded sand
Cu 6 & 1 Cc 3
fines
Cu < 6 &/or 1 > Cc > 3
SP
Poorly graded sand
Sand with 5 to 12% clay
SW-SC
Well-graded sand with clay
Cu 6 & 1 Cc 3
fines
Cu < 6 &/or 1 > Cc > 3
SP-SC
Poorly graded sand with
clay
Sand with 5 to 12% silt
SW-SM
Well-graded sand with silt
Cu 6 & 1 Cc 3
fines
Cu < 6 &/or 1 > Cc > 3
SP-SM
Poorly graded sand with
silt
Sand with more than 12%
Fines classified as CL or CH
SC
Clayey Sand
fines
Fines classified as ML or
SM
Silty Sand
MH
NOTE: If sand contains 15% gravel, add "with gravel" after group name. If fines are
organic, add "with organic fines" after group name.
Fine-grained Soil
50% or more passes the 75 m (No. 200) sieve.
Silts and Clays Liquid Limit less than 50% & have less than 15% material retained on 75 m
(No. 200) sieve
Symbol
Group Name
Inorganic
PI > 7 & plots on or above "A" line
CL
Lean Clay
PI < 4 or plots below "A" line
ML
Silt
4 < PI < 7 & plots on or above "A"
CL-ML
Silty Clay
line
Organic - defined by (LLOL
Organic Clay
PI 4 & plots on or above "A" line
oven dried)/(LL-not dried)
<0.75
PI < 4 or plots below "A" line
Organic Silt
NOTE: If soil contains 15 to 29% plus 75 m (No. 200), add "with sand" or "with gravel"
after group name, whichever is predominant. If soil contains 30% or more plus 75 m
(No. 200), predominantly sand, add "sandy" before group name. If soil contains 30% or
more plus 75 m (No. 200), predominantly gravel, add "gravelly" before group name.
EXAMPLES:
35-5
TxDOT 11/2004

(CL) lean clay w/sand; lean clay w/gravel; sandy lean clay; sandy lean clay w/gravel;
gravelly lean clay; etc.
(CL-ML) silty clay w/sand; silty clay w/gravel; sandy silty clay; sandy silty clay w/gravel;
gravelly silty clay; etc.
(ML) silt w/sand; silt w/gravel; sandy silt; sandy silt w/gravel; gravelly silt w/sand
(OL) organic clay w/sand; organic clay w/gravel; sandy organic clay; sandy organic clay
w/gravel; etc.
(OL) organic silt w/sand; organic silt w/gravel; sandy organic silt; sandy organic silt
w/gravel; etc.
Silts and Clays
Liquid Limit of 50%
Silts and Clays Liquid Limit of 50% or more & have less than 15% material retained on 75 m
(No. 200)
Symbol
Group Name
Inorganic
PI plots on or above "A" line
CH
Fat Clay
PI plots below "A" line
MH
Elastic Silt
Organic defined by (LL-oven
PI plots on or above "A" line
OH
Organic Clay
dried)/(LL-not dried)<0.75
PI plots below "A" line
OH
Organic Silt
NOTE: If soil contains 15 to 29% plus 75 m (No. 200), add "with sand" or "with gravel"
after group name, whichever is predominant. If soil contains 30% or more plus 75 m
(No. 200), predominantly sand, add "sandy" before group name. If soil contains 30% or
more plus 75 m (No. 200), predominantly gravel, add "gravelly" before group name.
(CH) fat clay w/sand; fat clay w/gravel; sandy fat clay; sandy fat clay w/gravel; gravelly fat
clay; etc.
EXAMPLES:
(MH) elastic silt w/sand; elastic silt w/gravel; sandy elastic silt; sandy elastic silt w/gravel;
etc.
(OH) organic clay w/sand; organic clay w/gravel; sandy organic clay; sandy organic clay
w/gravel; etc.
(OH) organic silt w/sand; organic silt w/gravel; sandy organic silt; sandy organic silt
w/gravel; etc.
35-6
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4 Procedure
Section 4
Procedure
The following table details the procedure for classifying soils for engineering purposes.
Step
1
2
3
Classifying Soils for Engineering Purposes

Action
Determine the LL, PL, and PI of the soil according to test methods:
Tex-105-E, Determining Plastic Limit of Soils"
Determine the water content of the soil according to Test Method "Tex-103-E, Determining
Moisture Content in Soil Materials."
Determine the amount of material passing the 75 m (No. 200) sieve according to test methods
"Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils" for fine-grained soil; or "Tex-401-A, Sieve
Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate" for coarse-grained soil.
Determine the particle size distribution of the materials retained on the 75 m (No. 200) sieve
according to Test Method "Tex-406-A, Material Finer than 75m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates" decantation tests for concrete aggregates.
Use the 'Plasticity Chart,' LL, PI, percent material passing the 75 m (No. 200) sieve, and Cu
and Cc and classify the soil with group name and description with group symbol.
Fi Figure 35-1. Plasticity Chart.

Other than soil constants and particle size distribution, there are other engineering properties
that can be measured either in the field or laboratory in conjunction with this classification
system to provide a more complete description of the soil characteristics.
In general, there is a close correlation among the soil classification and the engineering
properties such as consistency, density, water content, and dry unit weight. When available,
this information should be used in conjunction with soil classification to aid in the
evaluation of the soil's significant properties for engineering use.
35-7
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 5 Consistency
Section 5
Consistency
The consistency of a predominantly clay and/or silt is defined by its unconfined compressive
(UC) strength when tested in the laboratory under the normal moisture condition in an
undisturbed condition. Typically, one would find higher water content associated with lower
unconfined compressive strength or softer material, and lower water content associated with
a higher unconfined compressive strength or harder material.
The following table classifies soil by unconfined compressive strength.
Soil Consistency
UC kg/cm2 (tsf)
less than 0.25
0.25 to 0.5
0.5 to 1.0
1.0 to 2.0
2.0 to 4.0
greater than 4.0
Consistency
Very Soft
Soft
Medium Stiff
Stiff
Very Stiff
Hard
35-8
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 6 Density
Section 6
Density
Soil density as typically measured by the N-Value of in-situ Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
or the Texas Cone Penetration Test (TCP) is an indication of the relative compactness and
bearing capacity of a predominantly granular material such as sand, clayey sand, silty sand,
and gravelly material. The water content of a granular material is mostly unimportant
because (1) the bearing strength is independent of water content, and (2) the water content of
a disturbed sample is not representative of the material.
The following table classifies soil by density.
SPT N Value
less than 4
4 to 10
10 to 30
30 to 50
Greater than 50
Soil Density
TCP Blows/0.3 m (12 in.)
less than 8
8 to 20
20 to 60
60 to 100
greater than 100
35-9
Density
Very Loose
Loose
Medium Dense
Dense
Very Dense
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 7 Dry Unit Weight
Section 7
Dry Unit Weight
Dry unit weight of the material usually increases with decreasing plasticity and/or increasing
percentage of coarse-grained particles in the soils. One can usually find a higher than usual
water content and lower dry unit weight in an organic material. The more plastic material
such as clay has a greater propensity to hold water and therefore has a higher water content
and lower dry unit weight.
The following table indicates the dry unit weight for soil types.
Dry Unit Weight for Soil Types
Dry Unit Weight Kg/m3 (pcf)
Soil Type (Group Symbol)
0.77 - 1.03 (60 - 80)
Organic Clay (OH)
1.03 - 1.22 (80 - 95)
Clay (CH)
1.16 - 1.35 (90 - 105)
Clay (CL)
1.22 - 1.42 (95 - 110)
Sandy Clay (CL)
1.29 - 1.55 (100 - 120)
Clayey Sand (SC)
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 36
Tex-145-E, Determining Sulfate Content in Soils Colorimetric Method
Contents:
Section 4 Material.......................................................................................................... 36-5
Section 5 Part I, Field Determination of Sulfates .......................................................... 36-6
Section 6 Test Report..................................................................................................... 36-8
Section 7 Part II, Laboratory Test.................................................................................. 36-9
Section 8 Test Report................................................................................................... 36-11
36-1
TxDOT 2/2005
Chapter 36 Tex-145-E, Determining Sulfate

Content in Soils - Colorimetric Method
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
Effective date: February 2005.
This method determines the soluble sulfate content of soil by using turbidimetric techniques.
36-2
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 2
Definitions
The following terms are referenced in this test method.
turbidimetric technique - the process of measuring the cloudiness of a liquid and

translating it into concentration. A reagent (sulfate test tablet) is combined with a
sample which causes cloudiness or turbidity in the sample.
ppm parts per million; measure of concentration.
filtrate (soil/water) material that has passed through a filter.
36-3
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 3 Apparatus
Section 3
Apparatus
colorimeter and the following accessories:
10 mL glass sample vial
sulfate test tablets
white plastic rod
9 V battery
auger sampler
core sampler, 2 in. diameter 4 ft. long
balance, minimum capacity of 3500 g, calibrated to weigh to nearest 0.1 g
sieves, U.S. Standard No. 4 (4.75 mm) and No. 40 (425
mortar and pestle
crusher
oven, capable of maintaining a temperature of 60 5C (140 9F)
beakers (glass or plastic), 250 mL
beakers (glass or plastic), 600 mL
graduated cylinder TD (ex) (glass or plastic), 10 mL
graduated cylinder (glass or plastic), 100 mL
wide-mouth round high-density poly ethylene (HDPE) bottles, 8 oz. (250 mL)
wide-mouth round high-density poly ethylene (HDPE) bottles, 16 oz. (500 mL)
funnel (glass or plastic), 80 mm diameter with short wide stems
filter paper (fine porosity), 15 cm diameter
2 mL disposable pipettes
16 oz. (500 mL) wash bottle for distilled or deionized water
dessicator
latex gloves
tweezers
pans, brush and spatula
sample splitter.
36-4
m)
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 4 Material
Section 4
Material
36-5
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 5 Part I, Field Determination of Sulfates
Section 5
Part I, Field Determination of Sulfates
The following procedure describes preparing soil samples for determining sulfate content in
the field.
Procedure
Preparing Sample
Use the following table to prepare samples.

Step
1
2
3
4
5
Preparing Sample
Action
Sample soil within the depth of proposed stabilization with a hand auger at the sampling
frequency required by the guide schedule.
Obtain a 300 g representative sample.
Air-dry the sample to constant weight.
Pulverize the 300 g to pass the No. 40 (425 m) sieve.
Split the sample and obtain 10 g of representative sample.
It is recommended to do replicates for more accuracy. This means split the material to obtain
three samples of 20 g each and run on each sample the colorimetric test.
Weigh 10g to the nearest 0.1 g.
Measuring Sulfate Content
The table below describes the necessary steps for analysis of sulfate content in soils.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Action
Place the 10 g soil sample in an 8 oz. (250 mL) HDPE bottle.
Add 200 mL of distilled or deionized water. This provides an initial dilution ratio of 1:20.
Vigorously shake the bottle of soil/water solution by hand for 1 minute (min.). Wait for 12
hours (hr).
After a minimum of 12 hr. has elapsed, place one filter paper along the inside of the funnel
and place the funnel into a 8 oz. (250 mL) beaker to capture the filtrate.
Shake the bottle of soil/water solution again for 1 min. and pour the solution into the funnel.
Allow all the solution to filter and drain into the beaker.
Using a clean, 2 mL disposable pipette, fill the 10 mL graduated cylinder with the filtrate.
Place the 10 mL filtrate into a sample vial.
Wipe the outside of the vial clean with a Kimwipe or equivalent delicate task wipe to
remove dirt, fingerprints, or anything else that will obstruct a light beam from passing
through the glass and filtrate.
NOTE: Insure the test vial is clean and free from any residue from previous testing.
Switch the colorimeter unit to ON.
Press the MODE key until SUL method is displayed.
Place the sample vial into the sample chamber with the vial mark aligned with the
housing mark.
36-6
TxDOT 2/2005

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Section 5 Part I, Field Determination of Sulfates
Press the ZERO/TEST key. The method symbol flashes for approximately 3 seconds and
confirms zero calibration.
After zero calibration, remove the vial from the sample chamber.
Add one sulfate test tablet to the vial without touching the tablet with hands and crush
immediately with the white plastic rod provided.
CAUTION: Use latex gloves and tweezers when handling the sulfate test tablet. The tablets are
toxic and care should be taken to avoid contact with the skin, eye, or ingestion.
Tamp the sulfate test tablet with the rod in a random motion until it is completely dissolved
and dispersed throughout the sample vial.
Cap the vial, wipe the outside of the glass clean again, and immediately place the sample in
the chamber with the marks aligned.
Press the ZERO/TEST key. The method symbol flashes for approximately 3 seconds and the
result will appear in the display.
Take a minimum of three readings per sample and average the results.
NOTE: If an error message is displayed, go to Step 19.
Multiply the average result times the dilution. (Example: 100 (average reading) 20 (1:20
dilution) = 2000 ppm.)
NOTE: This test will only read concentrations from 5-200 mg/l (100-4000 ppm) for a 1:20
dilution.
Report the concentration in parts per million (ppm).
If the following error messages are displayed, report the following:
Err message: The result is below the measuring range limit.
Report the sulfate concentration as <100 ppm.
Err message: The result exceeds the measuring range.
This requires diluting the sample with more deionized water to bring the reading within
the measurable range, as stated below:
a. Measure out 5 mL of the filtrate into a 10 mL graduated cylinder and add exactly 5 mL
of distilled or deionized water using a clean pipette.
b. The new solution is now at 1:40 dilution ratio, which corresponds to a maximum
reading range of 8,000 ppm. Place the new diluted solution in a sample vial and repeat
Steps 8-18.
c. If a Err message is displayed again, this means the material has more than 8,000
ppm sulfate content. Report the sulfate concentration as > 8,000ppm.
36-7
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 6
Test Report
Report average sulfate concentration in ppm to the nearest whole number.
36-8
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 7 Part II, Laboratory Test
Section 7
Part II, Laboratory Test
The following procedure describes preparing soil samples for determining sulfate content in
the laboratory.
Procedure
Preparing Sample
Use the following table for prepare the sample.

Step
1
2
3
4
Preparing Sample
Action
Dry the entire Shelby tube or bagged sample in a 60 5C (140 9F) oven and allow to
cool to 25 3C (77 5F) in a desiccator to constant weight.
After the sample is dried, crush, grind, and split to obtain approximately a 1500 g (3.3 lb.)
representative sample to pass the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.
Pulverize the 1500g sample to pass the 425 m (No. 40) sieve.
Split the sample to obtain three 40 g representative sample and weigh to the nearest 0.1 g.
The table below describes the necessary steps for laboratory analysis of sulfate content in
soils.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
Sulfate Content Measurement

Action
Weigh 20 g to the nearest 0.1 g of oven-dried soil and place the soil in a 16 oz. (500 mL)
HDPE bottle.
Add 400 mL of distilled or deionized water. This provides an initial dilution ratio of 1:20.
Vigorously shake the bottle of soil/water solution by hand for 1 min. Wait for 12 hr.
After a minimum of 12 hr. has elapsed, place one filter paper along the inside of the funnel
and place the funnel into a 600 mL beaker to capture the filtrate.
Agitate the sample again for 1 minute and pour the soil/water solution into the funnel. Allow
all the solution to filter and drain into the beaker. Ensure the funnel is covered during the
filtration process to ensure soil and other substance does not contaminate the solution.
Using a clean, uncontaminated pipette, measure out 10 mL of the filtrate into a 10 mL
graduated cylinder. Transfer the 10 mL filtrate from cylinder into a sample vial. Wipe the
outside of the vial clean with a Kimwipe or task wipe to remove dirt, fingerprints, or
anything else that will obstruct a light beam from passing through the glass and filtrate.
NOTE: Insure the test vial is clean and free from any residue from previous testing.
Switch the colorimeter unit to ON.
Press the MODE key until SUL method is displayed.
Place the sample vial into the sample chamber with the vial mark aligned with the
housing mark.
Press the ZERO/TEST key. The method symbol flashes for approximately 3 seconds and
confirms zero calibration.
After zero calibration, remove the vial from the sample chamber.
36-9
TxDOT 2/2005

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Section 7 Part II, Laboratory Test
Add one sulfate test tablet to the vial without touching the tablet with hands and crush
immediately with the white plastic rod provided.
CAUTION: Use latex gloves and tweezers when handling the sulfate test tablet. The tablets
are toxic and care should be taken to avoid contact with the skin, eye, or ingestion.
Tamp the sulfate test tablet with the rod in a random motion until it is completely dissolved
and dispersed throughout the sample vial.
Cap the vial, wipe the outside of the glass clean again, and immediately place the sample in
the chamber with the marks aligned.
Press the ZERO/TEST key. The method symbol flashes for approximately 3 seconds and the
result will appear in the display. Take a minimum of three readings per sample and average
the results.
If an error message is displayed, go to Step 19.
Multiply the average result times the dilution. (Example: 100 (average reading) 20 (1:20
dilution) = 2000 ppm.)
NOTE: This test will only read concentrations from 5-200 mg/l (100-4000 ppm).
Report the concentration in parts per million (ppm).
If the following error messages are displayed, take the corresponding actions:
- Err message: The result is below the measuring range limit.
Report the sulfate concentration as < 100 ppm.
Err message: The result exceeds the measuring range.
Dilute the sample with more deionized water to bring the reading within the
measuring range, as stated below:
a. Measure out 5 mL of the filtrate into a 10 mL graduated cylinder and add exactly 5
mL of distilled or deionized water using a clean pipette.
b. The new solution is now at 1:40 dilution ratio, which corresponds to a maximum
reading range of 8,000 ppm. Place the new diluted solution in a sample vial and repeat
Steps 8-18.
c. If Err message is displayed again, this means the material has more than 8,000
ppm sulfate content and additional dilutions will be required until an absolute number
is obtained. Repeat Steps 8 through 15 and Steps 17 and 18.
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 8
Test Report
Report average sulfate concentration in ppm to the nearest whole number.
TxDOT 2/2005
Chapter 37
Tex-146-E, Conductivity Test for Field Detection of Sulfates
in Soil
Contents:
Section 3 Apparatus and Materials ................................................................................ 37-4
Section 4 Preparing Samples ......................................................................................... 37-5
Section 5 Calibration Procedure .................................................................................... 37-6
Section 6 Interpreting Data............................................................................................ 37-7
100-E, Soils and Aggregates Test Procedures 37-1
TxDOT 2/2005
Chapter 37 Tex-146-E, Conductivity Test for

Field Detection of Sulfates in Soil
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
Effective date: February 2005.
Use this test method to detect the presence of soluble salts, including those from sulfate
concentrations, by conductivity.
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 2
Definitions
conductivity the measure of a solutions ability to transmit a current due to the sum
total of the conductivities of the ions present in the solution.
microsiemen (S) the unit of measure for conductance.
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 3 Apparatus and Materials
Section 3
Apparatus and Materials
The following apparatus and materials are required:
portable conductivity meter
9 V battery
conductivity standard solutions, such as 450
wide mouth high-density poly ethylene (HDPE) bottles, 4 oz. (125 mL) (one for every
sample taken in the field)
sieves, U.S. Standard 425

and pan)
portable scale, minimum capacity of 400 g, accurate and readable to 0.1 g, or 0.1
percent of the test load, whichever is greater
distilled or deionized water
stopwatch
100 mL graduated cylinder
500 mL wash bottle for distilled or deionized water
mortar and pestle
weighting dishes, small spatula, and brush
hand auger.
S and 4500
S sulfate solutions
m (No. 40). (3 in. or 8in. diameter No. 40 sieve with a lid
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 4 Preparing Samples
Section 4
Preparing Samples
Use the following procedure to prepare soil samples for conductivity testing.
Preparing Sample
Step
Action
1
Sample soil within the depth of proposed stabilization with a hand auger at the sampling
frequency required by the guide schedule.
2
Use the mortar and pestle to pulverize the sample to pass a No. 40 (425 m) sieve.
NOTE: If necessary, air dry the material before using mortar and pestle.
3
Sieve the soil sample to obtain at least 20 g of soil passing the No. 40 (425 m) sieve. Large
particles can be removed by hand.
4
Estimate the moisture content (wc) of the soil, before weighing.
5
Weigh a moist sample (Wt), using the following equation to obtain a 5g. sample of soil:
Wt = 5 g. + 5* wc
Example: With estimated moisture content of 20%, the wet sample mass to weigh for testing is
6 g.
Wt = 5 g. + 5* 0.2 = 5g. + 1g. = 6 g.
*NOTE: Soil types vary throughout the state. Most soils with 20% moisture content will not pulverize
and pass the No. 40 sieve until the soils are dry. Use a heat gun or blow dryer along with a cigarette
lighter converter to dry the sample before passing through the No. 40 sieve to avoid complications and
speed up the operation in the field.
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 5 Calibration Procedure
Section 5
Calibration Procedure
Use the following procedures for calibration of the portable conductivity testing.
Calibrating Conductivity Meter
The following table describes the procedure for calibrating the conductivity meter.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Conductivity Meter Calibration

Action
Turn the conductivity meter on using the ON/OFF Switch. Using the pH/s switch, select the
s range you will be using for the test procedure.
Rinse conductivity electrode thoroughly by agitating in distilled or deionized water.
Wipe off conductivity electrode with a clean napkin or task wipe, and allow it to dry.
When dry, conductivity should read 0 in air.
Adjust ZERO pot screw if the reading is incorrect.
NOTE: If the probe does not zero, it may indicate dried solids on the sensor, so clean with a
mild detergent solution, rinse with deionized water and wipe it dry.
Immerse the electrode in a known conductivity solution.
Adjust SPAN pot screw to the known conductivity standard value.
Rinse and dry the electrode and commence field testing
Conductivity Procedure
The table below describes the conductivity procedure.

Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Conductivity Procedure
Action
Place the soil sample in a 4 oz. (HDPE) bottle.
Measure 100 mL to the nearest 1 mL of distilled or deionized water in a 100 mL graduated
cylinder and add to a 150 mL beaker.
Prior to testing, take the conductivity reading of the distilled or deionized water to determine if
the water is contaminated. The water should have a reading of not more than 10 s secure a
different source of distilled or deionized water.
NOTE: Rinse and clean the electrode after every reading taken in subsequent steps of this
procedure.
Add the water to the soil and vigorously shake the sample by hand for 1 minute.
Immediately take a conductivity measurement of the soil-water solution with the meter and
subtract the conductivity of the water from Step 2.
After a minimum of 12 hours has elapsed, vigorously shake the sample again for 1 minute.
Immediately take a second conductivity measurement of the soil-water solution with the meter
and subtract the conductivity of the water from Step 2.
Report both readings from Steps 5 and 7 and refer to Interpretation of Data for further
instruction.
TxDOT 2/2005

Section 6 Interpreting Data
Section 6
Interpreting Data
Upon completion of this test, record two conductivity measurements approximately 12 hr.
apart.
Sample and test the soil in accordance to "Tex-145-E, Determining Sulfate Content in
Soils" if either of the following conditions applies:
either reading from Step 5 or the final reading from Step 7 is 238 S or
the reading in Step 7 exceeds the reading in Step 5 by 50 S
TxDOT 2/2005
Chapter 38
Tex-198-E, Minimum Standards for Acceptance of a
Laboratory for Soils and Flexible Base Testing
Contents:
Section 2 Documentation............................................................................................... 38-3
Section 3 Requirements ................................................................................................. 38-4
Section 4 Procedures.................................................................................................... 38-26
100-E Soils & Aggregates Test Procedures
38-1
TxDOT 11/2004
Chapter 38 Tex-198-E, Minimum Standards for

Acceptance of a Laboratory for Soils and
Flexible Base Testing
Section 1 Overview
Section 1
Overview
Use this procedure to determine if a laboratory meets the minimum standards for soils and
flexible base testing. The scope of a laboratory's qualification may include only those test
procedures relevant to its operations or which may be required under contract. All applicable
equipment shall be calibrated or verified at the specified intervals. In addition to
requirements shown below, each piece of apparatus required to perform each test method
must be available in the laboratory.
The values stated in U.S. customary units are to be regarded as standard except for units of
weight, metric is considered the standard.
38-2
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 2 Documentation
Section 2
Documentation
Laboratories shall maintain records for all calibrated or verified equipment. Miscellaneous
items such as trowels, pans, scoops, spatulas, straightedges, funnels, brushes, containers, etc.
are excluded. Such records shall include the following information for each piece of
equipment:
description of equipment
serial number, or other ID
frequency of calibration
calibrating technician
date of calibration
date of last calibration
date of next calibration
procedure used to calibrate equipment
detailed results of calibration work
See 'Calibration/Verification of Grooving Tools' for an example of a typical worksheet used to

document calibration and verification of equipment.
38-3
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 3 Requirements
Section 3
Requirements
Moved Equipment
In addition to the intervals specified below, the following equipment must be re-calibrated
or verified each time it is moved prior to being used again: balances/scales, compression
machines, thermometers (check for broken mercury column), and ovens.
Sieves
In addition to the noted six-month visual inspections, results from annual soils and
aggregates proficiency samples can be used to verify the accuracy of sieves.
"Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling Soils for Highways

Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling Soils for Highways
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Metallic tape, 100 ft (30 m) long
Visual inspection
NA
12
Post hole digger, shovel, prospectors

pick, other hand tools
Jack hammer and air compressor
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Engineers level and level rod
Visual inspection
NA
12
Stakes
Visual inspection
NA
12
Gasoline burner and pan
Visual inspection
NA
12
Ruler, 6 ft (2 m)
Visual inspection
NA
12
Power drill rig with core and/or auger

attachments
Sample bags and moisture cans for
disturbed samples
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Materials to maintain moisture content

and boxes for packing undisturbed
cores
Soil auger
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Sample splitter or quartering cloth
Visual inspection
NA
12
38-4
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-101-E, Preparing Soils and Flexible Base Materials for Testing

Tex-101-E, Preparing Soils and Flexible Base Materials for Testing
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Sieves, as listed in procedure
Check physical condition

Check accuracy
Tex-907-K
Balance, minimum capacity of 80 lb. (36

kg) with a minimum accuracy and
readability of 5 g or 0.1% of the test
Drying oven, maintained at 140F
(60C)
Crusher (optional)
Verify calibration record
Tex-901-K
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or
Tex-927-K
Visual inspection
NA
12
Mechanical pulverizer (optional)
Visual inspection
NA
12
Wedgewood mortar and pestle
Visual inspection
NA
12
Scoop
Visual inspection
NA
12
Small siphon tube (optional)
Visual inspection
NA
12
Sample containers, metal pans,

cardboard cartons
Filter paper
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Sample splitter, quartering machine, or

quartering cloth
Dispenser cup
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Mechanical mixer (stirring device)
Visual inspection
NA
12
Plaster of Paris molds (optional)
Visual inspection
NA
12
6
12
12
"Tex-102-E, Determining Slaking Time

Equipment
Tex-102-E, Determining Slaking Time

Requirements
Procedure
Apparatus as listed in Test Method

Tex-101-E
Same as Tex-101-E
38-5
Same as
Tex-101-E
Interval
(Months)
Same as
Tex-101-E
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials

Tex-103-E, Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)

(1105C)
Microwave oven
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or
Tex-927-K
Visual inspection
NA
12
Balance, having a precision

(repeatability) of 0.01 g for
specimens having a mass of 200g or
less, 0.1 g for specimens having a
mass between 200 g and 1000 g, or
0.5g for specimens having a mass
greater than 1000 g or 0.1% of the test
Specimen containers and close fitting
lids for small specimens
Specimen containers for microwave
ovens
Container handling apparatus
Tex-901-K
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Dessicator cabinet or jar containing

indicator silica gel or anhydrous
calcium sulfate
Heat sink, for microwave ovens
"Tex-104-E, Determining Liquid Limits of Soils

Equipment
Tex-104-E, Determining Liquid Limits of Soils

Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)

(1105C)
Balance, minimum capacity of 100 g,
accurate and readable to 0.01 g or 0.1%
of the test load, whichever is greater
Porcelain mixing dish, 4 to 5 in. in
diameter
Spatula
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or
Tex-927-K
Tex-901-K
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Grooving tool
Check dimensions
Procedure 6
12
Liquid limit device
Procedure 7
12
Height of drop metal gage block
Check wear and

dimensions
Check height
NA
12
Spray bottle
Visual inspection
NA
12
Weighing dishes, non-absorbent with

lids
Visual inspection
NA
12
38-6
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-105-E, Determining Plastic Limit of Soils

Equipment
Tex-105-E, Determining Plastic Limit of Soils

Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)

(1105C)
Porcelain mixing dish (4 to 5 in. in
diameter)
Spatula
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or
Tex-927-K
Tex-901-K
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Plastic limit rolling device and paper
Visual inspection
NA
12
Weighing dishes
Visual inspection
NA
12
Plaster of Paris disks
Visual inspection
NA
12
Rolling surface, non absorptive, light

texture (12 in. x 12 in.)
Visual inspection
NA
12
"Tex-107-E, Determining the Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils

Tex-107-E, Determining the Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or
Tex-927-K
Verify calibration
record
Tex-901-K
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Straight edge
NA
NA
12
Grooving tool
Check dimensions
Procedure 6
12
Bar linear shrinkage mold
Check dimensions
Procedure 8
12
Number 20 engineer scale or other

suitable rule
Visual inspection
NA
12

(1105C)
Porcelain mixing dish (4.5 in - 5.5 in) in
iameter
Spatula
38-7
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-108-E, Determining the Specific Gravity of Soils

Tex-108-E, Determining the Specific Gravity of Soils
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Volumetric flask, 500ml
Visual inspection
NA
12

Verify calibration
record
Tex-901-K
12
Hot plate or sand bath
Visual inspection
NA
12
Constant temperature water bath
Verify temperature
settings
Visual inspection and
Calibrate/verify temp.
Procedure 3
Procedure 5 ;
Tex-926-K
Bent wire or glass rod
Visual inspection
NA
12
Aspirator or vacuum pump
Visual inspection
NA
12
Weighing dishes
Visual inspection
NA
12
Thermometer, calibrated between -5F

to 110F by 2F intervals (15C and
43C by 1C intervals)
38-8
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils
Tex-110-E, Sieve Analysis of Material Retained on the 425m (No. 40) sieve, Part I
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or 4
Tex-927-K,
(1105C)
Balance, minimum capacity of 33 lb (15
kg), accurate and readable to 0.5 g or
0.1% of the test load, whichever is
greater
Mechanical sieve shaker
Tex-901-K
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Sample splitter, quartering machine, or

quartering cloth
Standard U.S. sieves, as listed in
procedure
Visual inspection
NA
12

Check accuracy
Tex-907-K,
Pans
Visual inspection
NA
6
12
12
Tex-110-E, Hydrometer Analysis of Soils Passing 425m (No. 40) Sieve, Part II
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or 4
Tex-927-K
(1105C)
accurate and readable to at least 0.01 g
Stirring apparatus (either a mechanical
stirring device or an air dispersion
device)
Constant temperature water bath
Thermometer, range of 1F to 220F
(0C to 104C), accurate to 1F (0.5C)
Tex-901-K
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Verify temperature
settings
Check accuracy
Procedure 3
Procedure 5 ,
Tex-926-K
Tex-907-K
Sedimentation cylinder, as described in

Apparatus portion of procedure
Evaporating dishes
Visual inspection
NA
6
12
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Timing device w/second hand
Verify accuracy
Hydrometer, graduated in grams per

liter, type 151 H or 152 H
Beaker, 7.5 oz (250 ml)
Visual inspection
Procedure 1
or Tex-924-K
NA
Visual inspection
NA
12
38-9
12
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-111-E, Determining Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the 75m (No. 200)
Sieve
Tex-111-E, Determining Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the 75m (No. 200) Sieve
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or 4
Tex-927-K
(1105C)
Balance, accurate and readable to 0.01 g Verify calibration record Tex-901-K
12
for specimens having a mass of 200 g or
less, 0.1 g for specimens having a mass
between 200 g and 1000 g, or 0.5 g for
specimens having a mass greater than
1000 g or 0.1% of the test load,
whichever is greater
Check physical condition Tex-907-K,
6
Check accuracy
12
Quartering machine, sample splitter, or
Visual inspection
NA
12
quartering cloth
Stirring device with dispersion cup or
Visual inspection
NA
12
soil dispersion tube
Sample containers
Visual inspection
NA
12
"Tex-112-E, Admixing Lime to Reduce the Plasticity Index of Soils

Tex-112-E, Admixing Lime to Reduce the Plasticity Index of Soils
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure

"Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and
"Tex-104-E, Determining Liquid
Limits of Soils
"Tex-105-E, Determining Plastic Limit
of Soils
Same as Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-101-E
Interval
(Months)
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as Tex-104-E
Same as
Tex-104-E
Same as
Tex-104-E
Same as Tex-105-E
Same as
Tex-105-E
Same as
Tex-105-E
38-10
TxDOT 11/2004


Relationship of Base Material
Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base

Material and Cohesionless Sand
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Automatic tamper
Verify compactive effort Procedure 9
36
Compaction mold
Verify calibration
records
Verify calibration
records
NA
12
NA
12
Tex-901-K
12
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or
Tex-927-K
Visual inspection
NA
12
Hydraulic extrusion press
Visual inspection
NA
12
Metal pans
Visual inspection
NA
12
Circular porous stones
Visual inspection
NA
12
Small hand tools
Visual inspection
NA
12
Finishing tool
Visual inspection
NA
12
Level
Visual inspection
NA
12
45 lb. (1.8kg to 2.3 kg) rawhide

hammer
12 lb. (0.5 kg to 0.9 kg) plastic mallet
Visual and weight

inspection
Visual and weight
inspection
NA
12
NA
12
Height measuring device (metal stand,

spacer blocks, dial indicator)
Balance, minimum capacity of 33 lb
(15 kg), accurate and readable to 0.5 g
or 0.1% of the test load, whichever is
greater
(1105C)
Extra base plate
38-11
TxDOT 11/2004


Tex-114-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of

Subgrade and Embankment Soils
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Automatic tamper
Verify compactive effort Procedure 9
36
Compaction mold
Height measuring device (metal stand,
spacer blocks, dial indicator)
Balance, minimum capacity of 33 lb
(15 kg), accurate and readable to 0.5 g
or 0.1%of the test load, whichever is
greater
(1105C)
Verify calibration
records
Verify calibration
records
NA
12
NA
12
Tex-901-K
12
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or
Tex-927-K

Check accuracy
6
12
Extra base plate
Visual inspection
Tex-907-K
Proficiency
Sample
NA
Hydraulic extrusion press
Visual inspection
NA
12
Metal pans
Visual inspection
NA
12
Circular porous stones
Visual inspection
NA
12
Small hand tools
Visual inspection
NA
12
Level
Visual inspection
NA
12
Finishing tool
Visual inspection
NA
12
45 lb (1.8 kg to 2.3 kg ) rawhide

hammer
Visual and weight

inspection
NA
12
38-12
12
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-115-E, Field Method for Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base
Materials
Tex-115-E, Field Method for Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base Materials
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Part I, Nuclear Gauge Method
Nuclear testing gauge
Verify calibration record As specified by 12
manufacturer
Calibration curves for nuclear gauge
Visual inspection
NA
12
Scraper plate and drill rod guide
Visual inspection
NA
12
Drill rod and driver or hammer
Visual inspection
NA
12
Shovel, sieve, trowel or straightedge

and miscellaneous hand tools
Standardizing block
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Gauge log book
Visual inspection
NA
12
Portable reference standard
Visual inspection
NA
12
Part II, Sand Cone Method

Buckets with lids or plastic bags
Visual inspection
NA
12
Drying pans
Visual inspection
NA
12
Trowel, straight edge, small hand tools
Visual inspection
NA
12
Attachable jar, or other sand container
Visual inspection
NA
12
Metal base plate or template
Visual inspection
NA
12
Detachable appliance consisting of a

cylindrical valve with an orifice
approximately 0.5 in (13 mm) in
diameter
Balance, with a minimum capacity of
50 lb (20 Kg.) and a readability of 1 g,
accurate to 5 g or 1% of the test load,
whichever is greater
Drying equipment
Visual inspection
NA
12
Tex-901-K
12
Same as Tex-103-E
Calibrated sand cone and sand
Verify calibration
Same as Tex103-E
Each Test

Check accuracy
Same as
Tex-103-E
In accordance
with
Tex-115-E
Tex-907-K
Proficiency
Sample
38-13
6
12
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-116-E, Ball Mill Method for Determining the Disintegration of Flexible Base
Material
Tex-116-E, Ball Mill Method for Determining the Disintegration of Flexible Base Material
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Oven, Air-dryer maintained at
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or
4
Tex-927-K
1409F (605C)
Balance, minimum capacity of 33lb
(15kg), with a readability of no greater
than 1 g and accuracy of at least 1 g or
0.1%of the test load, whichever is
greater
Tex-901-K
12

Check accuracy
6
12
Wet ball mill machine
NA
24
Crusher (optional)
Check RPM, dimensions

and revolution counter
Check weight and
dimensions as per
Apparatus section of
procedure
Visual inspection
Tex-907-K
Proficiency
Sample
Procedure 10
NA
12
Misc. pans, wash bottles, etc.
Visual inspection
NA
12
Container (for liquid), 0.5gal (2L)
Visual inspection
NA
12
Metal Spheres
38-14
12
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression Tests for Disturbed Soils and Base Materials
Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression for Disturbed Soils and Base Materials

Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Same as Tex-101-E
Same as
Same as
Tex-101-E
Tex-101-E
Tex-101-E
Same as Tex-113-E
Same as
Same as
Tex-113-E
Tex-113-E
Tex-113-E
Same as Tex-114-E
Same as
Same as
Tex-114-E
Tex-114-E
Tex-114-E
Triaxial Cells
Visual inspection
NA
12
Aspirator or other vacuum pump
Visual inspection
NA
12
Air compressor
Visual inspection
NA
12
Load frame and assembly
Tex-902-K
12
NA
12
NA
12
NA
12
Circumference measuring device
Verify calibration
records
Verify calibration
records
Verify calibration
records
Verify calibration
records
Visual inspection
NA
12
Lead weights
Visual inspection
NA
12
Pans and porous stones
Visual inspection
NA
12
Cover for top of sample
Visual inspection
NA
12
Pressure regulator, gauges, and valves

Equipment for measuring sample
deformation
Axial load measuring device
38-15
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-118-E, Triaxial Compression Test for Undisturbed Soils

Tex-118-E, Triaxial Compression Test for Undisturbed Soils
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Balance, able to weigh soil specimens

of less than 100g to the nearest 0.01g,
and specimens of 100g or heavier to the
nearest 0.1g
Axial load device, as described in
Apparatus
Axial load measuring device, as
described in Apparatus
Chamber pressure maintaining and
measuring device, as described in
Apparatus
Devices to measure the height and
diameter of the specimen, as described
in Apparatus
Triaxial compression chamber, as
Impermeable rigid specimen cap and
base
Deformation indicator, as described in
Apparatus
Rubber membrane, as described in
Apparatus
Sample extruder
Verify calibration
records
Tex-901-K
12
Verify calibration
records
Verify calibration
records
Verify calibration
records
NA
12
NA
12
NA
12
Verify calibration
records
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Timing device, to measure to the

nearest 1 second
Sample containers
Calibrate
Procedure 1
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Miscellaneous hand tool and equipment
Visual inspection
NA
12
38-16
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-120-E, Soil-Cement Testing

Equipment
Tex-120-E, Soil-Cement Testing

Requirements

Tex-101-E
Same as Tex-101-E

Tex-113-E
Same as Tex-113-E

Tex-117-E
Same as Tex-117-E
High capacity compression testing

device 60,000 lb (267 kN)
Verify calibration
records
Verify calibration
records
Triaxial screw jack press (use when

anticipated strengths 400 psi (2758
KPa))
Procedure
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-113-E
Same as
Tex-117-E
Tex-902-K
Interval
(Months)
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-113-E
Same as
Tex-117-E
12
Tex-902-K
12
"Tex-121-E, Soil-Lime Testing

Equipment
Tex-121-E, Soil-Lime Testing

Requirements

Tex-101-E
Same as Tex-101-E

Tex-113-E
Same as Tex-113-E

Tex-128-E
Same as Tex-128-E

Tex-117-E
Same as Tex-117-E

device (60,000lb) (267kN), meeting the
Triaxial screw jack press (use if
anticipated strengths 400psi (2758
KPa) )
Verify calibration
records
Verify calibration
records
38-17
Procedure
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-113-E
Same as
Tex-128-E
Same as
Tex-117-E
Tex-902-K
Interval
(Months)
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-113-E
Same as
Tex-128-E
Same as
Tex-117-E
12
Tex-902-K
12
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-123-E Determining the Drainage Factor of Soil Materials

Tex-123-E, Determining the Drainage Factor of Soil Materials
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Visual inspection
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-113-E or
Tex-114-E
Same as
Tex-117-E
NA
Interval
(Months)
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-113-E or
Tex-114-E
Same as
Tex-117-E
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Small proving ring
Visual inspection
NA
12
Loading press assembly
Visual inspection
NA
12
Water reservoir bottle as described in

Apparatus
Drilled loading plate as described in
Apparatus
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12

Tex-101-E
Same as Tex-101-E

Tex-Tex-113-E or Tex-114-E
Same as Tex-113-E or
Tex-114-E

Tex-117-E
Same as Tex-117-E
Circular loading plate, as described in

Apparatus
Upper and lower cylindrical loading
heads as described in Apparatus
Triaxial test cells
38-18
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-124-E, Determining Potential Vertical Rise

Tex-124-E, Determining Potential Vertical Rise
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Visual inspection
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-103-E
Same as
Tex-104-E
Same as
Tex-105-E
Same as
Tex-106-E
Same as
Tex-207-F
NA
Interval
(Months)
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-103-E
Same as
Tex-104-E
Same as
Tex-105-E
Same as
Tex-106-E
Same as
Tex-207-F
12
Visual inspection
NA
12

Tex-101-E
Same as Tex-101-E

Tex-103-E
Same as Tex-103-E

Tex-104-E
Same as Tex-104-E

Tex-105-E
Same as Tex-105-E

Tex-106-E
Same as Tex-106-E

Tex-207-F
Same as Tex-207-F
Supply of paraffin, cutting knives,

other small hand tools
Sampling device, core drilling rig
equipment to take disturbed or
undisturbed core samples of the
material in place
"Tex-125-E, Determining Modulus of Subgrade Reaction (K Value)

Tex-125-E, Determining Modulus of Subgrade Reaction (K Value)
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Loading device, as described in

Apparatus
Hydraulic jack assembly with spherical
bearing attachment
Dial gauges, as described in
Apparatus
Interval
(Months)
Visual inspection
NA
12
Verify calibration
records
Verify calibration
records, visual
inspection
Verify dimensions
NA
12
NA
12
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Thermometer
12
Set of circular steel bearing plates, as

Verify dimensions
Procedure 5 ;
Tex-926-K
NA
Deflection beam, as described in

Apparatus
Miscellaneous hand tools
38-19
12
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-126-E, Molding, Testing, and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Materials
Tex-126-E, Molding, Testing, and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Materials

Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Same as Tex-101-E
Same as
Same as
Tex-101-E
Tex-101-E
Tex-101-E
Motorized gyratory press
Verify calibration
Tex-916-K
12
records
Compaction mold, as described in
Verify dimensions
NA
12
Apparatus
Spacer block, 8 in (200 mm) high
Check dimensions
NA
12
Press
Visual inspection
NA
12
Mechanical mixer
Visual inspection
NA
12
Ovens, able to heat to 2905F

(1433C), 2505F (1213C),
1405F (603C),
Electric hot plate
Procedure 2 or
Tex-927-K
Visual inspection
NA
12
Dolly, caster mounted,
Check dimensions
NA
12
Metal pans, as described in

Apparatus
Circular porous stones, slightly less
than 6in. in diameter and 2in. high
Metal disks, as described in
Apparatus
Filter paper, 6in. in diameter
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Check dimensions
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Small tools, trowels, plastic mallet
Visual inspection
NA
12
Fine soil pans, round pans and sample

pans
Visual inspection
NA
12

Check accuracy
6
12
Screw jack press
Verify calibration
records
Tex-907-K
Proficiency
Sample
Tex-902-K
38-20
12
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-127-E, Lime-Fly Ash Compressive Strength Test Methods

Tex-127-E, Lime-Fly Ash Compressive Strength Test Methods
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure

Tex-101-E
Same as Tex-101-E

Tex-113-E or Tex-114-E
Same as Tex-113-E or
Tex-114-E

Tex-117-E
Same as Tex-117-E

device (60,000lb (267kN)), meeting the
Verify calibration
records
Triaxial screw jack press, (use if

anticipated strengths 400psi (2757
KPa) )
Verify calibration
records
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-117-E
Tex-902-K
Interval
(Months)
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-117-E
12
Tex-902-K
12
"Tex-128-E, Determining Soil pH

Equipment
Tex-128-E, Determining Soil pH

Requirements
pH meter with glass electrode, pH

range 0-14 0.1
Buffer solutions, such as pH 4.0, 7.0,
and 9.0
Tex-101-E
Check fluid level
NA
Interval
(Months)
Each use
Check standard against

machine
Same as Tex-101-E
NA
As prescribed

(60C)
Verify temperature
Same as
Tex-101-E
Procedure 2 or
Tex-927-K
Same as
Tex-101-E
4
Balance, accurate within 0.1% of the

test load at any point within the range
of use, graduated to at least 0.01g
Verify calibration
records
Tex-901-K
12
Glass stirring rod
Visual inspection
NA
12
Glass beaker, 250ml
Visual inspection
NA
12
Stirring device, mechanical or magnetic
Visual inspection
NA
12
Thermometer, 32-212F (0-100C)

Procedure 5 ;
Tex-926-K
12
38-21
Procedure
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-129-E, Measuring the Resistivity of Soils Materials

Tex-129-E, Measuring the Resistivity of Soils Materials
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Drying oven, maintained at 140 9 F

(60 5C)
Splitter or quartering cloth
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or
Tex-927-K
Visual inspection
NA
12
Portable resistivity meter, Vibroground

Model 293 or equal
Resistivity box
Verify calibration
records
Verify dimensions as per
Apparatus
Visual inspection
NA
12
NA
12
NA
12
Balance, minimum capacity of 1500g,

accurate and readable to 0.5g, or 0.1%
Verify calibration
records
Tex-901-K
12

Check accuracy
6
12
Graduated beaker, 200ml
Visually inspect
Tex-907-K
Proficiency
Sample
NA
Drying pans, mixing pans, trowel, and

small scoop
Visually inspect
NA
12
Straight edge
38-22
12
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-131-E, Consolidated Undrained Triaxial Compression Test for Undisturbed

Soils
Tex-131-E, Consolidated Undrained Triaxial Compression Test for Undisturbed Soils

Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Balance, with a minimum capacity of
Verify calibration
Tex-901-K
12
4000g, accurate and readable to least
records
0.1g
Axial load device, as described in
Apparatus
Axial load measuring device, as
Chamber pressure maintaining and
measuring device, as described in
Apparatus
Devices to measure the height and
diameter of the specimen, as described
in Apparatus
Pore pressure measuring device
Verify calibration
records
Verify calibration
records
Verify calibration
records
NA
12
NA
12
NA
12
Verify calibration
records
NA
12
Verify calibration
records
Visual inspection
NA
12
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Verify temperature
Procedure 2 or
Tex-927-K
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Sample containers
Visual inspection
NA
12
Miscellaneous hand tool and equipment
Visual inspection
NA
12
Filter paper
Visual inspection
NA
12
Vacuum membrane expander
Visual inspection
NA
12
Sample cutter
Visual inspection
NA
12
Porous stones
Visual inspection
NA
12
Sample trimming equipment
Visual inspection
NA
12
Triaxial compression chamber, as

Impermeable rigid specimen cap and
base, as described in Apparatus
Drying oven, thermostatically
controlled, capable of maintaining a
temperature of 230 9F (110 5C)
Deformation indicator, as described in
Apparatus
Rubber membrane, as described in
Apparatus
Sample extruder
38-23
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-132-E, Texas Cone Penetration

Equipment
Tex-132-E, Texas Cone Penetration

Requirements
Procedure
Hammer, as described in Apparatus

Drill stem, sufficient to accomplish
drilling to the desired depth
Anvil, threaded to fit the drill stem,
slotted to accept the hammer
Conical driving point, as described in
Apparatus
Interval
(Months)
Visual inspection, verify

weight and drop height
Visual inspection
NA
12
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection, verify

dimensions
NA
12
"Tex-135-E, Freezing and Thawing Tests of Compacted Soil-Cement Mixture
Tex-135-E, Freezing and Thawing Tests of Compacted Soil-Cement Mixture

Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Same as Tex-113-E
Same as
Same as
Tex-113-E
Tex-113-E
Tex-113-E
Freezing cabinet, as described in
Verify temperature
Procedure 2
12
Apparatus
Moist room, as described in
Verify temperature
Procedure 2
12
Apparatus
Wire scratch brush, as described in
Visual inspection
NA
12
Apparatus
Scarifier
Visual inspection
NA
12
Carriers or trays
Visual inspection
NA
12
Mechanical mixing device
Visual inspection
NA
12
Flat pan, 2 deep
Visual inspection
NA
12
Pads (1/4 inch thick), felt, blotters,

sheets of plastic, or similar material
Visual inspection
NA
12
38-24
TxDOT 11/2004

"Tex-140-E, Measuring Thickness of Pavement Layer

Tex-140-E, Measuring Thickness of Pavement Layer
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Drill with auger bit, grubbing hoe, or

other acceptable digging tool
Nail, blade, knife, or other suitable tool,
not to exceed 1/8 in thickness, and
about 3 long
Folding ruler (6ft), or other scale with
1/8 or smaller divisions
Depth measurement indicator,
DHT#2238 (not to be used for pay
purposes)
Interval
(Months)
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
Visual inspection
NA
12
"Tex-141-E, Manual Procedure for Description and Identification of Soils
Tex-141-E, Manual Procedure for Description and Identification of Soils

Equipment
Requirements
Procedure
Interval
(Months)
Pocket knife or small spatula
Visual inspection
NA
12
Hydrochloric acid, one part HCl (10N)
to three parts water
Visual inspection
NA
NA
"Tex-142-E Laboratory Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes

Tex-142-E, Laboratory Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
Equipment
Requirements
Procedure

Tex-101-E
Same as Tex-101-E

Tex-104-E
Same as Tex-104-E

Tex-105-E
Same as Tex-105-E

Tex-106-E
Same as Tex-106-E

Tex-110-E,
Same as Tex-110-E
38-25
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-104-E
Same as
Tex-105-E
Same as
Tex-106-E
Same as
Tex-110-E
Interval
(Months)
Same as
Tex-101-E
Same as
Tex-104-E
Same as
Tex-105-E
Same as
Tex-106-E
Same as
Tex-110-E
TxDOT 11/2004

Section 4
Procedures
Procedure 1 Timers
Apparatus
Calibrated timer
Procedure
1.
Hold the calibrated timer in one hand and the timer to be checked in the opposite hand.
2.
Start the timers simultaneously by pressing the start buttons at the same time.
3.
Allow the timers to run at least 15min., then stop the timers simultaneously. Record the
time indicated by both timers.
4.
Record the difference between the two timers. Calculate and record the percent
accuracy.
%accuracy =
( A B)
x100
B
A = Reading on lab timer (sec)

B = Reading on standard timer (sec)
NOTE: If no accuracy is specified in the test procedure, choose a maximum allowable error
of one second per minute.
38-26
TxDOT 11/2004

Procedure 2 - Oven
Apparatus
A calibrated digital thermometer graduated in 2F (1C), having a range including the

temperature range to be checked.
When using the calibrated digital thermometer, place the thermocouple probe on
the shelf where the samples are normally placed.
Take the first reading at least 1 hour after closing the oven (oven should remain
undisturbed). Take as many readings as necessary to determine if the temperature
range is within the specified tolerance (three consecutive readings, taken no less
than hour apart and within the tolerance allowed, are required).
Adjust the temperature of the oven if an observed temperature reading is outside

the specified tolerance (allow at least hour for the temperature to stabilize
between each adjustment).
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 as necessary.
-OR
A calibrated thermometer graduated in 2F (1.0C) increments, having a range including

the temperature range to be checked.
When using the calibrated thermometer, place it inside the brass well with the
clothespin attached to the thermometer.Position the thermometer on the shelf where
the samples are normally placed. Take the first reading at least 1 hour after closing
the oven (oven should remain undisturbed).Take as many readings as necessary to
determine if the temperature range is within the specified tolerance (three
consecutive readings, taken no less than hour apart and within the tolerance
allowed, are required).
Adjust the temperature of the oven if an observed temperature reading is outside

the specified tolerance (allow at least hour for the temperature to stabilize
between each adjustment).
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 as necessary.
A brass thermometer well to retain heat while the oven door is open. This is essential
for a constant temperature reading.
A clothespin to hold the thermometer in such a manner as to enable the operator to read
the scale easily from outside or inside the oven.
Procedure 3 - Water Bath
Place a calibrated thermometer in center of the water bath for 1 hour to verify temperature
setting.
NOTE: Check setting at which the water bath is used.
38-27
TxDOT 11/2004

Procedure 4 - Mechanical Shaker
Match the sieve and aggregate such that a minimum of tem percent of the total sample
weight is retained on each sieve. After sieving on the mechanical shaker for a given time,
the thoroughness of sieving shall be checked by hand shaking each sieve with a lateral and
vertical motion, accompanied by a jarring action so as to keep the material moving
continuously over the surface of the sieve. If hand shaking shows more than 1% passing any
given sieve, then shaking time should be increased and the check repeated until all screens
show less than 1% by weight passing a given sieve.
Procedure 5 - Thermometers
Examine documentation for each thermometer used. Examine documentation for the
standard used.
The documentation on thermometers used should include:
temperature read at each calibration point
true temperature read at each calibration point
serial or identification number of each thermometer
date calibrated or checked
signature of person who read calibration.
The documentation on standard used should include:
serial or identification number of standard used
dated standard used
signature of person who ran calibration on standard.
Procedure 6 - Grooving Tool
Verify that the grooving tool meets all of the dimensions outlined in "Tex-104-E,
Determining Liquid Limits of Soil. The measurements should be checked using a calibrated
caliper that will measure to the nearest 0.01 mm and a measuring magnifier.
38-28
TxDOT 11/2004

Procedure 7 - Liquid Limit Testing Device
Verify that all of the dimensions outlined in Tex-104-E, Determining Liquid Limits of
Soil. are within acceptable limits using a calibrated caliper and small ruler. A straight edge
is necessary to complete some of the measurements.
Verify that the cam is smooth and free of any deformations that would cause jarring of the
sample other than the calibrated drop at the end of the rotation.
Measure the contact point between the cup and the base of the liquid limit device. This wear
spot should measure no more than 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) in diameter. This measurement should
be taken at the widest point.
Calibrate the height of the drop of the cup as described in Tex-104-E, Determining Liquid
Limits of Soil.
Procedure. 8 - Bar Linear Shrinkage Mold
The shrinkage mold should match the dimensions outlined in "Tex-107-E, Determining the
Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils. The dimensions listed are internal dimensions.
Procedure 9 - Automatic Tamper for Soil and Base Compaction
To calibrate the automatic tamper two specimens of the same moisture content must be
prepared and compacted according to "Tex-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials. One sample should be compacted
with the automatic tamper. The second sample should be compacted using the hand hammer
that can be obtained from the Materials and Pavements Section. The base plate should be
removed from the compactor and placed on the concrete slab. Attach the sample mold to the
base plate and hold the sample mold and base plate secure with a foot while compacting.
The densities of the two samples should be within two percent of each other. If the two
samples are not within two percent corrective action should be taken. Some causes for not
meeting the density requirement are loss of compactive effort due to improper base
mounting, incorrect drop height, hammer weight, a sticking grabber, etc.
Procedure. 10 Wet Ball Mill
Verify that all of the dimensions are within tolerances listed for the wet ball mill machine as
outlined in "Tex-116-E, Ball Mill Method for Determining the Disintegration of Flexible
Base Material. Check the mill for leaks when sealed.
Verify that the RPM of the mill is 58-62. Inspect the apparatus for a revolution counter that
will turn off the motor after the completion of 600 revolutions.
Verify that the size and weight of the metal spheres are within tolerances listed in Tex-116E, Ball Mill Method for Determining the Disintegration of Flexible Base Material.
38-29
TxDOT 11/2004

Soi

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Soi

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

100-E, Soils & Aggregates

Revised February 2005

100-E, Soils & Aggregates Test Procedures

Manual Notice 2005-1

Holders of the 100-E, Soils & Aggregates Test Procedures

Thomas R. Bohuslav, P.E., Director, Construction Division

100-E, Soils & Aggregates Test Procedures

Chapter 36, "Tex-145-E, Determining Sulfate Content in Soils Colorimetric Method

The following chapter has been revised:

Chapter 15, "Tex-114-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density

Extensive revisions made throughout test method.

Manual Notice 2004-1

Holders of the Manual of Testing Procedures

Thomas R. Bohuslav, P.E., Director, Construction Division

100-E, Soils & Aggregates Test Procedures

100-E, Soils & Aggregates Test Procedures

Other sections appear as the subject warrants.

100-E, Soils & Aggregates Test Procedures

100-E, Soils & Aggregate Test Procedures

Chapter 2 Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling

100-E, Soils & Aggregate Test Procedures

Chapter 2 Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling

aggregate - Aggregate is granular material of mineral composition such as sand, gravel,

concrete - Concrete is a composite material consisting of a binding medium within

conglomerate - Conglomerate is the coarse grained, clastic, sedimentary accumulation

100-E, Soils & Aggregate Test Procedures

Chapter 2 Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling

granite - Granite is an igneous rock consisting of quartz and alkali feldspars.

gravel - Gravel consists of unconsolidated or loose detrital sediment (aggregate

lightweight aggregate - Lightweight aggregate consists of expanded shale, clay or slate,

limestone rock asphalt - Limestone rock asphalt is limestone impregnated with

lithification - Lithification is the process of hardening, induration and compaction of

mineral filler - Mineral filler is a fine aggregate or manufactured material used to

quarry - A quarry is an open surface excavation of minerals or construction materials.

sandstone - Sandstone is sedimentary rock consisting predominantly of weathered

slag - Slag is a non-metallic by-product of the smelting or refining of metals,. and

soil - Soil is defined as a superficial, unconsolidated deposit of disintegrated and

100-E, Soils & Aggregate Test Procedures

Chapter 2 Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling

source - A source is a geographical location of naturally occurring material that can be

stone - Stone consists of crushed, angular particles of rock.

virgin material - Virgin material is material not previously used in construction.

100-E, Soils & Aggregate Test Procedures

Chapter 2 Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling

Section 3 Soil Survey

the design of ditches and backslopes in cut sections to prevent slides

the location of local material for base and aggregate

the need for stabilization of sub-grade, sub-base and base materials

the supporting values of soils as foundation materials.

100-E, Soils & Aggregate Test Procedures

Chapter 2 Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling

100-E, Soils & Aggregate Test Procedures

Chapter 2 Tex-100-E, Surveying and Sampling

sample bags and moisture cans for disturbed samples

power drill rig with core and/or auger attachments

metallic tape, 30 m (100 ft.) long

post hole digger, shovel, prospector's pick, other hand tools

jackhammer and air compressor

sample splitter or quartering cloth

engineer's level and level rod

gasoline burner and pan

100-E, Soils & Aggregate Test Procedures

100-E, Soils & Aggregates Test Procedures

Chapter 3 Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and